Surgeon General's Office


PRESENTED BY
J*     %
^
:s. 


V' 
 
A
          COMPENDIUM
                    OF  THE

ANATOMY OF THE HUMAN BODY,
   Intended firinciftally for the use of Students.
          BY ANDREW  FYFE.
IN TWO  VOLUMES.
VOL.  I.
            THIRD AMERICAN EDITION.

                   ——      xh*i^\
              To this Edition is prefixed', v   '   •£'*.-*
      A COMPENDIOUS HISTORY OF ANATOMY,
                   AND  THE
          RUYSCHIAN ART AND METHOD
Of making- Preparations to exhibit the Structure of the Human Body,
                 ILLUSTRATED
 With a Representiition of the Quicksilver Tray and its Apptnclages,
          W hich are not in the London Edition.
      PHILADELPHIA:
PUBLISHED BY BENJAMIN C. BUZBY,
   N;>. 2, North Third-street
1810. 
 
A
COMPENDIOUS  HISTORY
OF
ANATOMY.
     FROM the works of Hippocrates, the father of
 medicine, who flourished about four hundred years be-
fore the birth of Christ, is to be collected all the informa-
 tion of antiquity on the subject of Anatomy. This great
 physician, wliose principal attention was directed to the
 symptoms and cure of diseases, was, nevertheless, well
 aware of the importance of  Anatomical knowledge to
 perfection in the healing art:  hence we find, that his
 works abound with anatomical facts and observations,
 interspersed with  the prevailing doctrines of the day.
 When it is considered, how many obstacles were throw*
 in the way of this science, from climate, prejudice,  and
 superstition, the perseverance and acquirements of this
 great man, the ornament of the medical profession, can-
 not be sufficiently  admired.   He describes  some parts
 peculiar to the human body, which could only be ascer-
 tained by actual dissection. The body he made to con-
 sist of solids, fluids, and spirits;  of containing and con-
 tained parts. The  elementary humours he divided into
 four kinds; blood, phlegm, choler or bile, and melancholy
 or occult bile. This was agreeable to the7 philosophy of
the age in which he lived ; as  likewise the notions of all
bodies being composed of earth, air, fire,  and water.
 He never distinguished between nerves, arteries, veins,
or tendons;  but calls the heart and its pericardium a 
4
powerful muscle ; he knew the aorta, vena cava, pulmo-
nary arteries and veins, and entertained obscure notions
of the uses of the valves ; but considered the auricles as
a fan. He mentions the distributions of the arteries and
veins by trunks and ramifications from the heart; and
asserts, that all the arteries originate from the heart.
The liver was  thought to be the root of the veins, the
fountain of the blood; and he  supposed it to  separate
bile. He thought  the arteries carried the  spirits ; but
was entirely ignorant of the circulation of the  blood,
and of the use of the  diaphragm ;  and his seating the
soul in the left ventricle of the heart is a memorable
example of human vanity, and of that inherent inclina-
tion in man, boldly to account for what is inexplicable.
The heart and lungs, he imagined,  received part of our
drink.  Of the organ of hearing,  it is concluded,  he
knew little, for he only mentions the tympanum.  As to
the brain, which he thought a gland, (an idea which has
since been erroneously supposed to belong to Malpighi)
the nerves and their uses, vision and the  senses, he was
totally ignorant as to the causes ; yet  he makes the
brain the seat of wisdom.  The glands he imperfectly
understood. The P\ thagorean doctrines of conception,
generation, and pregnancy, are, in  general, absurd and
superstitious ; as likewise  his notions of the  Pythago-
rean numbers, which seem to have been the prevailing
philosophical follies of the  day. On moles,  false con-
ceptions, and  the nourishment of the foetus, a rational
judgment is formed ;  he comprehended  the  communi-
cation from the  mother to  the foetus, by means of the
umbilical cord ; though, in another place, he  supposes
that it absorbs nutriment by the mouth, and from the
surrounding fluid in the ovum.
   After Hippocrates, anatomy continued to be improv-
ed ; but, as opportunities were extremely limited, from
the prejudices of mankind,  its progress was but  slow,
and chiefly confined to the  two schools of Athens and
Alexandria. In the former, the names of Socrates, Pla-
to, Xenophon, Aristotle,  and  Theophrastus,  are still
preserved along with many of their  works ; and although
we observe that their general attention was directed to
philosophy, yet  natural history and anatomy were  far
from being overlooked; their opportunities, however, 
                         5
of examiningbodies were confined; and after their time.
the studv of natural knowledge at Athens sunk for ever-
But  while it decayed in Greece and Asia, it rose w th
increased ener^v, under the protection of the Ptolo-
mies, at Alexandria. In this school, which was so long
pre-eminent, Erisistratus and Herophilus were
hicrhly distinguished for anatomical knowledge.  Bv the
liberal patronage of the Ptolomies, they enjoved ample
opportunities of dissecting human bodies; and the con-
sequent improvements which anatomy received were
very great.   They not only  corrected many former er-
rors, but wrote with great judgment upon neuro'ogy:
"Hjev observed a variety of structure in nerves supply-
ing different parts, and hence distinguished them into
those which were necessary to sense, and those which
were subservient to motion.
   Betweln the times of Herophilus and Erisistratus fo
Galen, a period of five  hundred  years, Asct.epiades,
Rufus Ephesius. and  the  sensible and elegant writer
 Celsus, flourished.  The two latter have given the
appellations and situations of all the parts of the human
body, in compendio, in  which many discoveries appear
to have been made from the time of Hippocrates.  Nei-
ther one nor the other dwelt much on  the uses of the
 parts,  kufiis writes Greek in the concise Attic style,
 and Celsus is the most classical writer that ever appear-
 ed in the art of medicine.
   Claudius Galenus,  or Galen, was physician to
 four emperors,  and was, without exception, the  most
 distinguished practitioner of the age in which he lived.
 He has arranged all the prior anatomical science that
 Herophilus and Erisistratus had obtained  from the  actu-
 al dissection of human subjects, and incorporated it into
 his voluminous  treatises  on all the  branches of medi-
 cine.  The medical principles of this great man, formed
 on the Peripatetic philosophy of Aristotle, are not to the
 present purpose ; except that they reigned triumphantly
 in the schools and universities, disdaining and crushing
 all innovators or improvers, for a period of nearly fifteen
 hundred years.   The celebrated Galen, however, was
 a man of uncommon erudition, and he brought into one
 point of view, with much labour, learning, and industry,
 all the medical and philosophical science of his prede- 
ccssors.  The anatomical part was indubitably extract-
ed from the great Herophilus and Erisistratus, and, con-
sequently, hi general contains what those first dissectors
of human bodies had observed or written.  In the works
of this eminent physician, anatomy appears very conspi-
cuous and methodical.  He gives the situation  and uses
of all the  parts of the human body, whether  animal,
vital, or natural.  What discoveries  he made, cannot
be ascertained; but Galen was  the  first author who
seems to have digested, in regular order, the human
functions, the brain  and the membranes, the senses, the
contents of the thorax and abdomen, osteology, a com-
plete myology and  neurology, in which are the origin
and  insertion of the muscles, their action, &c. and the
distribution of the whole nervous system.   The lacteal
vessels, likewise, were well known ; though the extent
of their effects, their passing through the thoracic due
and  subclavian vein,  to the bloed, were  not  compre-
hended.  The exhalent arteries and inhalents were men-
tioned, both by Hippocrates and Galen ; but the princi-
ples of action were  unknown.  The circulation of the
blood,  the real uses of the liver, glands, heart, dia-
phragm, pancreas, kidney, ureters, bladder, universal
cellular structure, the power of the nervous system over
the arteries and veins, the lymphatic absorbent system,
were to him unknown.
   From the time of Galen to the fifteenth century, anato-
my was rather on the decline, anatomists being consi-
dered learned or  ignorant  in proportion to their know-
ledge of his works.   The destruction of Alexandria in-
troduced learning among the Arabians ,< but they made
but little progress in the knowledge of the human body.
Abuollaliph,  however,  towards the  close of the
twelfth century, exposed many of Galen's errors in os-
teology, by frequenting burial-grounds,
   Among the early cultivators of the science of anato-
my in the fifteenth century,  the great Ves alius flou-
visaed; who may with propriety be styled the restorer
of anatomy;  being  the first who dared expose the
errors of Galen, in medicine and anatomy, by referring
to the  human body.  This wonderful man, whose per-
severance and  genius cannot be  sufficiently admired,
was  born at JBrussel, in 1415. After having gone through 
7
the usual studies of the age, he went to Montpellfer, to
study medicine.  The principal professors in the uni-
versity of Paris requested him to come there, where he
attended their lectures.  Vesalius's zeal for medicine,
particularly anatomy, induced him to brave every dan-
ger to which he was exposed, by clandestinely procur-
ing bodies for dissection  He did not, however, confine
his attention to the human subject  only, but opened a
great number of animals.  In the pursuit of his favour-
ite science,  his veneration for Galin diminished in pro-
portion  as he detected his inaccuracies ; till at length
he threw off all controul of this great standard of anci-
ent medicine and anatomy, and became the advocate for
actual dissection of the human body, to which he con-
stantly referred in all his disputations.
   The war, which commenced at that time  in France,
obliging Vesalius to leave  Paris, he returned  to his own
country, Louvain.  The knowledge he had acquired in
anatomy induced him to profess it publicly in that city ;
but, in order to extend his anatomical researches,in 1535,
he followed the army of the Emperor Charles the Fifth,
against  France.  His reputation increased. He was cho-
sen Professor of Anatomy in the university of Padua,
by the republic of Venice, and there gave lectures on
medicine, particularly anatomy, for seven years.
   In  1539,  Vesalius  published his  anatomical plates,
which attracted the admiration of the learned. In this,
ami in his other works, all the errors of Galen  are ex-
posed  A multitude of enemies sprung up against this
bold innovator of old established authority. All Europe
resounded with  invectives against him :  Eustachius at
Rome, Driander at Marpurg, and Sylvius at Paris, be-
came his public enemies, particularly the latter, who
employed every species of culumny to lessen  him in the
esteem  of his "patrons: instead of Vesalius, he  called
him Vesanus, or a madman ;  and accused him of igno-
rance, arrogance, and impiety.  Fallcpius was the only
one among  his opponents who preserved any modera-
tion.  Having been a pupil of Vesalius, he never forgot
how much he was indebted to his preceptor; and, al-
though  lie was.far more able than Sylvius to criticise,
from having powerful objections to bi-in^ forward againsc
the work, he proceeded in the ri.ost  li.-Lcate. and res- 
8
pectful manner, influenced by the greatest esteem and
gratitude for the  assistance he had received  from his
venerable master.  Vesalius, on the other hand, acted
towards his pupil in the  most gentle and honourable
manner.  As soon as the remarks of Fallopius on h;s
work, had reached Spain, Vesalius prepared to answer
them, and  replied to him as a father would to a son.
Fallopius, who has rendered his name dear to posterity
by his extensive knowledge in anatomy, possessed sen-
timents very different from Sylvius; he was not asham-
ed of acknowledging  his obligations to Vesalius, for the
greater part of his information on anatomy : he admits
that Vesalius has not shown sufficient respect to Galen,
but confesses that his objections are generally correct.
Notwithstanding all opposition, the reputation of Vesa-
lins daily increased,  and he established anatomy on so-
lid and permanent principles, when the Emperor Charles
the Fifth, by whom he had been already honoured, no-
minated him his first physician, and kept him constant-
ly at Court. He now  gained the confidence of the nobi-
lity, and frequently gave unequivocal marks of his pro-
found knowledge in the practice of physic.  But an un-
expected event soon reduced this great man to distress.
Upon the death of a  Spanish gentleman, whom he fud
attended during life, Vesalius requested permission  of
the relatives of the deceased to open the body.  The mo-
ment he exposed the cavity of the thorax, he saw the
heart palpitating.  This unfortunate affair came to the
ears of the  gentleman's relations, who prosecuted Vesa-
lius not onv as a murderer, but accused him of impiety
before the Inquisition, which severe tribunal was about
to punish him  for the crime, when Philip the Second,
of Spain, suggested  the means of removing him from
the decision  of n,s judges,  and caused him to make a
pilgrimage to the Holy Land; in consequence of which
Vesalius resolved to make the tour of Pak•stine.  He
passed over to Cyprus with James Ma.ate.te, a Vene-
tian general, aud thence to Jerusalem   boon after the
de-.th of the celebrated  Fa'.lopius, which happened in
t..e year 1564, the senate of V"tn <e recal'ed Vc-salms
to nil the  chair; but  on his .jvage to  Pa In a, lie was
shipwrecked on -he  iha:,-t of Zante, wlv. re Uiis great
man, reduced to  tic uUao«t extremity, perished *ith 
hunger, on the 15th of October 1564, at the age of fifty
years. It is said, that a goldsmith, who landed on that
part of the island soon after the accident, caused him
to be interred, and that the following epitaph is engra-
ven  on his tomb in the church of the Virgin Mary, is
that island:
                      Tumulus
         Andre* Vfsalii Brvxellienjis,
               S^ui obiit idibus Octobris,
                  Anno m- d. lxiv.
                 Jl'tatis vero sua L.
              Cum Hierosolymis rediisset.

   Vesalius had scarcely attained his twenty-fifth year
when he published his work, Be Structura Corporis Hu-
mani----on the structure of the Human Body.  This
extraordinary production would appear incredible in so
young a  man, were it not attested by the  best authori.
ty.  "Vesalius in my opinion," says Mons. Portal, "is
one  of the greatest men that ever existed  Let astro-
" nomers boast of Copernicus; natural philosophers, of
*• Galileo, Torricelli, &c. mathematicans, of Paschal;
" and the geographers, of Christopher Columbus; I
" shall always rank  Vesalius above them  all."   The
house of Vesalius was lately the convent of Capuchins,
at Brussels.   These pious men considered it an honour
to date their letters Ex Aldibus Vesalianis.  It appears,
that in the year 1546, Vesalius was at Basle, to correct
the press for a new edition of his works.   He occupied
his leisure hours, whilst he resided there, in preparing
a human skeleton, which he  presented to the body of
physicians in that city.  It was received with the great-
est pleasure ; and, as a proof of their gratitude, the ftil.
lowing inscription was put under it, which remains to
this  day ;
                Andreas  Vesal. Bruxell,
               Carvli V. Aug. Archiatrus
               j^andatiss- Anatomicorum
                 Administr. Comm,
                  In hac  Urbe Regia
                   Publictaturus
                Virile quod cernis Sceleton,
                Artis tt Industrie sute
     a 4              Spccivien, 
1KJ
                   Anno Christidno
                     M. D. XLVI.
                 JExhibu.it erexitque.

   From the time of Vesalius, the value of human dis-
 section was fully appreciated, though opposed by the
 prejud'ces of the vuTgar.  The beginning of the seven-
 teenth centWry is remarkable for the discovery of the cir-
 culation of the blood, by the immortal Harvey, in which
 he was assisted by the previous discoveries of Fabri-
 cius on the -alves in the veins, and by Setjvetus, Co-
 lumbus, and Cesalpinus, who nearly fifty years before
 demonstrated the circulation of the blood through the
 lungs.  This has been the most important discovery
 ever made in anatomy, and upon it depends the whole
 of our present physiology.   Soon afterwards, Aselius,
 an I'alian, discovered the lacteals, which  Pecquet, in
 1651, traced to the thoracic duct, and  thence to the left
 subclavian vein.   In 1653,  Rudbeck  Bartholin dis-"
 covered the lymphatics : it does not appear that there
 was  any commun<l"ition between them ; both, therefore j
 are infilled to  <V al praise.   The latter has, however,
 additional credit from his having entertained  very ac-
 curate ideas of the physiology of the  lympatic system,'
 which was afterwards more fully explained by Glisson.
   The two  last centuries  have  nearly perfected our
 knowledge of thte human body.  Every nation in Europe'
 has  produced  anatomists of the greatest reputation.'
 The  names  of  Albixus,  Coopeh,  Diemerbrock,
 HlGHMOKE, ClfESEr.DEN, Lewenhoeck, Mal'pxgiii,
 R^ayow, Ruysch, Willis, and Win slow,  form but
 a  small number of those who have enlightened the
 science of anatomy in the seventeenth century.  In the
 eighteenth, the following are particularly distinguished :
 HALI.ER,  MORGAGN1, Z1N N,  WaLTER,  SCARPA,'
 Soemmering, the Monros, the Hume.w, Cri'icl-
 shank, aud Bailey.
   Fortunately for mankind,' anatomy is now become an
 indispensable branch of medical science ; and through-
out Europe we have every where distinguished teach-
ers, who are daily adding to tin- stock of  useful infor-
mation. 
                    11


       TIIE EUYSCHIAN ART,

               AND METHOD

Of making Prefiarations to exhibit the Structure

                   OF  THE

            HUMAN BODY.
   The Injecting i ray and its Appendages.

For the purpose of facilitating the process of Quicksil-
  ver Injections, and preventing the loss of Quicksilver^
  which is constantly occasioned by the old method* 
13
       EXPLANATION  OF  THE  PLATE.
   A.  The Tray:  This should be made of mahogany,
 about three-quarters of an inch in thickness, and the
 several parts  should be joined together with  screws;
 every joint should bemade perfectly water-tight, and the
 inside painted black ;  as this is much more favourable
 for seeing the fine parts of white membranes laying up-
 on it, and the quicksilver flowing through the minute
 ramifications of their vessels.  The machine being made
 in this  form, is  intended to be occasionally filled with
 water, for the  purpose  of injecting broad and flat parts,
 which require  to be so managed as to prevent their dry-
 ing, and to which  the  common jar, represented in the
 plate is not adapted, as placentae, large portions of me-
 sentery and intestine, female breasts ; &c.
   B.  An iron pipe with an ivory plug, for the purpose
 of drawing off the water and quicksilver remaining in
 the tray after the injection is finished; it is made of iron,
 that it may not be  affected  by the quicksilver.
   C C The right  and  left sides ofthe Tray, cut down
 to form a rest for the arms, whilst the hands are em-
 ployed upon a preparation at the bottom of it. The  front
 D, is also made considerably lower than the sides, for
 the more convenient management of the  preparation.
 The bottom of the tray, should be about twenty inches
 square ; the front about three inches high, and  the sides
 four and a half:  the clear dimensions on the inside, are
here meant.
  E.  A ledge  in one corner, for the convenience of
 fixing the bottle containing the quicksilver ;  it has a
 hole sufficiently  large to receive the bottle which it let
 through, and stands  on the bottom of the tray to per-
 serve it from  any accident, which it is very Jiable to
 from its weight.
  F. F.  Two uprights;  the foot of each fixes in two
 square staples, within  the  right  ancU left  sides of the
tray, and ought to  be about twenty-four inches high.
  G.   The cross-piece, the ends of which slide up or
down in the  mortise ofthe uprights, and are fixed to a-
ny height, by  means of pins passing through them and
the ends ofthe cross-piece  to keep them steadily fixed
to each other.  In  the lower edge of this crosa-pie^e  is 
13
fixed several small hooks, from which may be suspend-
ed one or more injecting tubes.
  H. Is a glass jar  containing water, in which is im-
mersed a hand, with the quicksilver injecting pipe fixed
in the artery as in the process of filling the vessels. The
hand is suspended by a string from the edge of the jar.
       PREPARATIONS OF  THE  VISCERA.

    THE various parts ofthe body may be preserved in
  a healthy state, either to exhibit their form or structure,
  or to compare them with morbid parts.

             GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.

   1. When removed from the body, and  the  useless
 parts dissected away, the part  to be preserved  is to be
 soaked in water, in order to get out the blood.
   2. When it is necessary to give parts their  natural
 form, which is lost by macerating, put them into a satu-
 rated solution of allum, retaining them by any means in
 the required form,  until they become  hardened.  If it
 be a hollow part, a,s the stomach, bladder, &c. fill  it with',
 and immerse it  in, the solution.
   3.  When an opening is to be exhibited, as that of thjs
 .ureter, the bile-duct, the lacunae ofthe urethra, Steno-
 nian duct, Fallopian tube, &c. introduce a bristle. After
 this maimer preserve the  uterus and  its appendages,
 cutting open the vagi.la and cavity of the  uterus, the
 bladder, intestine, .stomach, heart in the  pericardiurt,
 liver, spleen, kidney, &c. &c.
  4. All preparations ofthe brain are best hardened in
 a saturated solution of corrosive sublimate.
  5. iThe parts are to be suspended in proof spirit by
raw silk, in a tie-over bottle, and covered with bladder,
taking care  to exclude all air.   When  dry, varnish the
bladder with mucilage  of gum  arabic several  times ;
then put  a sheet of t*Iiin lead over, and varnish its edges
with mucilage ; and lastly, tie another Madder over, and
 ive it a coal of common spirit varnitdi, in which lamp-
     , or other colouring matter is mixed. 
14
    PREPARATIONS OF MORBID PARTS.
  All morbid parts should, immediately after their re-
moval from the body, be put into rectified spirit of wine
for  a dav or two and then preserved  in proof spirit.
These preparations foul a great quantity of spirit, and
should therefore be kept in stopper-classes, from which
the spirit can easily be removed, and fresh put in, until
the preparation ceases  to foul the spirit, when it may
be put into a tie-over bottle.
  PREPARATIONS MADE  BY MACERATING.

  Preparations obtained by this process are very various.
             general observations.
  1.  Let the water be frequently changed, until it is no
longer coloured with blood, but never after the blood is
steeped away.
  2.  Let the macerating pan be placed in a warm place,
tp facilitate putrefaction.
  3.  The macerating pan should never be in a cold place,
for the spermaceti-like conversion of the soft parts will
be formed, and the bones spoiled.
  4. The soft parts surrounding bones are a long time
before they detach themselves from the bones.
  5. Bones, when macerated, should be exposed to the
sun's va\s, and frequently wetted with  clean  water, or
thty may be bleached with the diluted oxvgenated mu-
riatic acid.
                      BONES.
   Bones are macerated to he preserved whole, or they
 are  sawed to expose their internal structure.
   Bores ofthe head.  Put the  whole head, without dis-
 turbipg the flesh or brains, into the pan.  When suffi-
 ciently nra--cerated, all the soft parts will come avny
 vith the periosteum : then detach the vertebae, and wash
 out  the bi-^n-  bones are separated from each otherby
 filling the cranium with peas, and putting it into water.
 The same method is tob* adopted with other bones. 
15
  Bones in general, for structure.  Divide the femur into
two halves . theos innominatum, the petious portion of
the temporal bone, the parietal bones, 8tc. these, when
macerated, will exhibit the compact, the spongy, lami-
nated, and reticular substance of bones.
                    A  FOETUS.
  Cut carefully away the  fatty substance enveloping a
foetus, but do not cut any  ofthe cartilages.  Steep out
its blood, and macerate.  It should be frequently looked
at, and taken out when  the flesh is all destroyed, before
the cartilages are separated.   The following prepara-
tions  are obtained in this way:
  1.  The superior extremity to show its bones, the pro-
gress of ossification,  and the cartilage to be formed in-
to bone.
  2.  The lower extremity, to expose the same circum-
stance.
  3.  The spine, which forms a beautiful preparation.
  4.  The pelvis, not less elegant.
  Preservation. The  above all  to be preserved in proof
spirit.
                     CUTICLE.
  The cuticle ofthe  hand and foot  may be separated by
maceration ; the  former is called  corotheca, the latter
podatheca. The arm and foot of a large foetus are to be
preferred ; they are first to be  well washed with a soft
spunge in soap and water.
  Preservation.  Suspend them in proof spirit;  first tie
the part by which they are to be  suspended, then put
them into the  bottle with the spirit,  and  gently pour
some spirit into the cuticle, to  distend it like a glove or
stocking.
          INJECTING INSTRUMENTS.
  The celebrated Dutch Anatomist,  Buysch, first in.
vented the art of injecting animal bodies.
  There are three kinds of apparatus  used in making
injected  preparations.  The one for the coarse and fine
injections, and the minute  injection;  the other  for in-
jecting with quicksilver ;  and the third, called the oys- 
16
ter syringe, fbr injecting minute preparations with the
minute injection only.
  The first consists of a brass syringe made for the pur-
pose, of various sizes, from one carrying six ounces to
one sufficiently large to hold two pounds. The point of
these syringes is adapted to the pipes into which it is to
be affixed.   To this syringe belong a stop-cock, and a
great variety of pipes.
  The instrument for injecting quicksilver consists of
along glass tube, at whose end is fixed, by screwing in,
a steel pipe, the end of which is extremely fine.
  The oyster syringe is similar to the large syringe,
except in size. It is so small, that when the syringe is
in the hand, and full, its piston may be commanded by
the thumb of that hand to throw its contents into any
perparation in the other hand.  The pipe affixed by
being screwed to the end of this syringe is nearly as
small as that belonging to the quicksilver tube.
  These instrument are always to be had at the surgical
instrument makers.
                  INJECTIONS.

  The injections employed for anatomical purposes are
of four  different kinds :  coarse, fine, minute and mer-
curial.
               COARSE  INJECTIONS.
  Red.  Yellow bees' wax, sixteen ounces—the  palest
resin, eight ounces—turpentine varnish, six ounces, by
measure—finely levigated vermillion, three ounces.
  Yellow.  Yellow bees' wax, sixteen ounces—pale refin,
eight ounces—turpentine varnish, six ounces —king's
yellow, two ounces and a  half.
  White. Fine virgins' wax, sixteen ounces—pail resin,
eight ounces—turpentine varnish, six ounces—best flake
white, five ounces and a half.
  Pale blue. Fine virgins' wax, sixteen ounces—pale
resin, eight ounces  —turpentine varnish, six ounces-
best flake white,three ounces and a half—fine blue smalt,
three ounces and a half.
  Dark  blue.   Fine  virgins' wax, sixteen ounces—pale 
17
 resin, eight ounces—terpentine varnish, six  ounces-
 blue verditer, ten ounces and a half.
   Blati.  Yello w bees' wax, sixteen ounces—pale resin,
 eight ounces—turpentine  varnish,  six  ounces—pure
 lamp black, one ounce.
   Green.  Yallow bees' wax, sixteen ounces—pale resin,
 eight ounces—turpentine varnish, six ounces—levigated
 crystalized  verdigrise,  four ounces and a half—best
 flake white, one ounce—levigated gamboge, one ounce.
   Liquefy the wax, resin, and turpentine varnish over
 a slow fire, in an earthen pipkin ; then add the colouring
 matter, having previously mixed it  in another pipkin,
 with a very small quantity of the melted composition.
 Stir the whole well together with a wooden  pestle, so
 that the colouring ingredients  may be intimately and
 Bmoothly blended : place the whole  again over the fire,
 and, when they have acquired a due heat, the injection
 will be fit for use.

                FINE INJECTIONS.
   Brown spirit varnish, white spirit varnish, of each four
 ounces—turpentine varnish, one ounce.
   These are to be put together in  an  earthen pipkin,
 over a slow fire, until they have acquired the necessary
 degree of heat.   To make it of a^ red colour, put one
 ounce of finely levigated  vermillioh into another pipkin,
 and gradually add the heated  materials, stirring the
 whole with  a  wooden pestle,  that  the colour may be
 equally diffused.
  One ounce and a quarter of king's yellow—two ounces
 of best flake white—one  ounce and a half of fine blue
 smalt, with one ounce and a quarter of best flake white-
 four ounces of blue verditer—half an ounce of pure
 lampblack—are the proportions for the various colours
 to the quantity of ingredients ordered above.
             minute injections.
  The size, which forms the vehicle to the colouring
 matter in these  injections, is  made in  the following
 manner:
  Take, of the finest and most transparent glue, one
pound, break it into small pieces, put it into an earthen
pot, and pour on it three pints of cold water, let it stand 
IS
twenty-four hours, stirring it now and then with a stick s
then set it over a slow fire for half an hour, or until all
the pieces  are perfectly dissolved ; skim off' the froth
from the surface, and strain it through a flannel for use.
  Isinglass and the cuttings of parchment make an ele-
gant size for very particular injections ; and those who
are not very nice may use the best double size of the
shops.
  Red. Size, one pint—Chinese  vermillion, two ounces.
  Yellow. Size, one pint—king's yellow, two ounces and
an half.
  White. Size, one pint—best flake white, three ounces
and an half.
  Blue. Size, one pint—fine blue smalt, six ounces.
  Green.  Size, one pint—levigated  crystalized verdi-
grise, two ounces—best flake white, levigated gamboge,
of each eight scruples.
  Black. Size, one pint—lamp-black, one ounce.

            GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.

  1. All injections are to be heated to such a degree as
not to destroy the texture ofthe vessels they are intend-
ed  to fill ; the best criterion of this  degree of heat is
dipping the finger into the injection.   If the finger can
bear the heat, the texture of the vessels will not be hurt.
  2.  All the coloured materials should be as finely levi-
gated as possible, before they are mixed with the injec«
tion.
  3-  Great care should be taken lest the oily ones boil
over, or bubble ; and that the heat be gentle, otherwise
the colour will be altered.
  4.  They should be constantly stirred, lest the colour-
ing material,  which is much heavier than the vehicle,
fall to the  bottom.
   5. The instrument, to stir them with should be a wood-
en  pestle, and there should be one far each colour.
   6.  A large tin pan to contain water, with two or three
lesser ones fixed in it  for the injections, will be found
very  useful, and  prevent all accidents, and  the colour
from spoiling, when on the fire. 
iv
     Preparation made with Coarse Injection.

 ^ The blood-vessels are mostly filled with coarse injec-
tion, and the parts dissected to shew their course ; and
when the  anatomist  wishes to exhibit the minuter
branches, the fine injection is to be thrown in first, and
followed by the coarse.
             general OBSERVATIONS.
  There are several circumstances to be observed in
injecting with the fine and coarse injections, which are
applicable to  every part into which they are thrown;
these are—
   I  The part to be  injected should be freed from its
blood as  much as r.ossible, by steeping it for  several
hours in warm water, and repeatedly  changing  it.
   2. Having emptied the part of its blood, the pipes are
to be fixed in their proper vessels, and all other vessels
 to be tied with a ligature.
   3. The heat of the water is then to be gradually in-
 creased to the same temperature  with the injection to
 be thrown in.>
   4.  The  injecting syringe  should be steeped in the
 water wiVh the part to be injected, until wanted.
   5. The  injection being  finished, and the subject cold,
 remove the pipes, and tie up the  parts they were in.
 Whenever a vessel is open, by accident or  otherwise,
 be sure to secure it by a ligature, or cover it with a
 piece of  thin and moist  bladder, or  the injection will
 always be oozing out.
   6. The parts dissected and dried are to be varnished
 twice with copal or hard varnish, first  washing them free
 from grease with some soap lees, and well drying them
 again.
          BLOOD-VESSEL SUBJECT.
  Select an emaciated subject, between the age of two
and fourteen years.
  Preparation.  Make an incision through the integu-
ments the whole  length of the sternum ; then, whh a
saw, divide the sternum longitudinally into  two equal
     vol. I.            B 
                        20
parts ; introduce a dissecting knife under the divided
bone on each side, separate it from  the mediastinum,
and lay open the thorax, by bending  back the two por-
tions ofthe sternum and the  cartilages ofthe ribs: an
incision is then to be made  into the pericardium, and
the left ventricle of the heart, and a large pipe intro-
duced into the aorta, and secured by a  ligature.  The
subject is next to be put into warm water, and gradu-
ally heated.  The time gentralh required to heat the
whole subject is four hours, in a large body of water.
  If the \eins are to be injected, three more  pipes are
required : one  to be put into the angular vein, at the
corner of the orbit;  another into a vein as  near the
fingers as possible ; and the  third into a vein as near
the toes as possible.                                   .
  I.tjection.   The  subject and injection being properly  '
heated, throw the coarse red injection into the heart
pipe,  which will  fill the arterial system ; and then the
coarse yellow injection into the head pipe first, the next
into the pipes of the extremities.  The subject, when
injected,  should  be  put into cold water, with its face
downwards.
  Dissection. Open the abdomen by an incision from the
sternum to the umbilicus and from thence to each ili-
um.   Cut away the abdominal  viscera, the stomach,  i
spleen, and intestines ;  leaving the mesenteric vessels
as long as possible : dissect away the liver, leaving the
vena p>rt» and hepatic artery as long as possible. This
done, dissect away the fat and cellular membrane from
the vessels ; secure  the mesenteric vessels in an arbo-
rescent form on a piece of pasteboard.  The kidneys,
urinary bladder, uterus, and its appendages,  are to be
preserved and dried in their situations.   From the tho-
rax are to be removed, the lungs and heart, or the lat-  \
ter may remain.  The integuments being carefully dis-
sected from the sternum, <t is to  be bent back, and kept
in that situation, to expose the internal mammary arte-
ries.  The dissecting away  the skin is next, in order to
exhibit the muscles,  and expose  the arteries and veins.
The skin should oniy be removed from time to time to
carry  on the dism etion, and never more than that cov-
ering  tin  part  to  be  tiissected ; otherwise  the  parts
from which the skin is removed will become dry, and  : 
21
the dissection  be spoiled.  In dissecting the arteries
and veins,  the  dissector will  find no  difficulty, if he
proceeds cautiously from the larger trunk towards their
extremities  The brain is to be removed bv sawing a-
way a large portion ofthe bone on each side ofthe  lon-
gitudinal sinus  ofthe dura mater.  The cheeks should
be pushed out by introducing horse hair into the mouth.
  Drying.   When  dissected, or  before, the subject
should be hung up by the  iead in a frame : one arm is
to be placed at a little distance from the side, and  the
other turned up over the head, with the palm of the
hand in front:  the legs at a little distance from each
other, and kept in these postures by packthread.  Should
any muscles obstruct the s'ght ofthe arteries, they are
to be separated to a proper distance by pieces of wood.
This done, expose it to a current of air  in a place
where  it cannot get wet;  and if the weather be moist,
remove, from  time  to time,  all  moisture, by  a  soft
spunge.
   Preservation.  Varnish  it several times, and keep it
in a dry placer, and in a proper case, with a glass front
and back.

     A HEAD, FOR ARTERIES AND VEINS.
   Choose  an emaciated head of an  adult, separated
from the body, by a transverse section, about the sixth
or seventh vertebra.
  Preparation.   Put a  pipe into each  carotid, or what
is better, one pipe with a bifurcation ; remove a  por-
tion of bone over the longitudinal sinus ofthe dura  ma-
ter, about the middle ofthe parietal bones, and secure
a pipe  in the  longitudinal sinus,  pointed towards the
occiput.  Put the head into warm  *ater, to soak, pres-
sing the blood occasionally out of  the  external and in-
ternal jugulars   Then tie up the jugular veins and ver-
tebral  arteries, and all the small vessels.
  I.jection.  Into the carotids throw the red injection,
and the yellow, or dark blue, into  the pipe in the sinus
of the dura mater.  The former will  fill the arteries,
the latter the veins.
  Dissection.   Follow the  course of the larger trunks,
dissect out the globes  of the eyes, and remove, with a
fine saw, the portion of the  jaw-bone behind the last 
22
 molaris, to show the  course of the internal carotids.
 To prepare the while he 11, a  portion of the  cranium
 must be rem■->»•; d, by sawing on one side  of the longi-
 tudinal sinus ->f the dura mater from the  frontal sinus
 to the horizontal spine of the occipital bone, and then
 saw'mg hor'>zontallv  above the ear, from one extremity
 ofthe former incision to the other.  The dura mater
• sho'ld be removed with a  pair of  srissars, the brain
 carefully washed out, and  the  tentorium and falx pre-
 served   It is better to  make a perpendicular section
 of the head,  a little to  one side ofthe sagittal suture,
 through the nose, foramen magnum, and vertebrae; and
 thus prepare each  side.    The course of the cervical ar-
 terv is to be shown by dissecting away the muscles, &c.
 from between the ti\ms\erse processes.
    Preservation.  Varvsli  it several times, and keep it
 in   glass case, suspended; or fix it by the neck, and
 cover it with  a glass bell.

      AN ARM, FOR ARTERIES AND VEINS.

    Remove the superior extremity  from  the trunk, by
 separating the clavicle from the  sternum, raising it,
 and passing the knife under it to the  articulation, in-
 cluding the greater part ofthe pectoral muscle.  Then
 cut under the scapula,  so as to remove  w<th  the arrat
 the clavicle, scapula, and subscapularis muscle
    Preparation.  After soaking it  in u arm w ater, force
 out the blood from the veins, by pressing  the extremity1
 from the fingers toward the shoulder.  Fix a pipe in
 the axillary artery, and another in the largest vein onr
 the back ofthe hand ; some warm water  may be injec-
 ted into the vein,  so as to  wash  out the blot d ; and,
 When pressed out, the a\i!lary vein should be tied. Tie
 any muscular branches  that mav be gaping
    Injection.   Sied  injection may be thrown  into the ar-
 ttrv, tnd yellow, or  dam blue,  into the vein
    Dissection-  This is very s.inple ;  it requires onlv th»
 remo.al uf all the cellular an.I  f'att) membrane, and ex-
 pos ng the course of the vessels.   Tie up the limb by
 the eii.icle.
    Preservation.  Whan varnished, keep it in a cool and
  dry place. 
23
    A Lower Extremity, for Arteries and Veins.
   Having removed the contents of the abdomen, make
 a section through the symphysis of the pubis, and the
 ligaments connecting the ilium and sacrum, so as to re-
 move one side ofthe pelvis.
   Preparation.  Fix a pipe in a vein  as near the toes ag
 possible, and another in the iliac artery.  When the
 limb has been well soaked in warm water, press out the
 blood from the veins,  or throw in some warm water at
 the venal pipe ; but carefully press it  out again, and
 tie up the iliac vein.   Secure all divided vessels.
   Injection.   Blue injection, or yellow, may be put into
 the vein, and red into  the artery.
   Dissection.  Expose the course of the  artery and
 veins, particularly the profunda of the thigh.

     The Gravid Uterus, for Arteries and Veins.
   The gravid uterus, or the uterus soon after it has ex-
 pelled the foetus, may be injected, to show its large and
 tortuous vessels.  It may be injected whilst in the bo-
 dy ; but this is always  attended with much difficulty,
 and never succeeds so well as when removed from the
 body. Therefore separate the spermatic and hypogas-
 tric vessels as far from the uterus as possible, and cut
 out the uterus with  the  bladder,  vagina, and external
 parts of generation.
   Preparation.   Put a pipe in each  spermatic artery,
 and each hypogastric,  and also one in each spermatic
 and hypogastric vein ; so that,  at least, there will be
 four pipes for arteries, and four for veins, necessary.
 Be very careful that all the divided vessels be secured
 by ligature, which only can ensure swecess.
   Injection.   Red and yellow are mostly preferred ; the
 former for the arteries,  the latter for the veins.  Be
 careful that  the red be thrown  into all the arterial
 pipes, and the yellow  into  the venal ; and, to prevent
 mistakes, it  wilt be better to have  the pipes of the
veins different from those ofthe arteries.
   Dissection.  Distend the vagina and uterus with horse
hajr, either by introducing it  through the  vagina, or,
if the foetus  be  in  it,  by  a perpendicular  section
 through  the anterior parictes, which is to be sewed up 
24
again.   Then  dissect away all loose cellular structure
and fat, preserving the round and broad ligaments, and
Fallopian tubes.  Should the foetus be in the uterus, an
incision should be made, as above directed, except the
placenta be adhering there, which is known by the
great number  of vess Is. and then on the opposite side,
and through the membranes, to remove the child ; cut
the umbilical  cord close to the foetus,  and fix a pipe in
one umbilical  artery, and another in the umbilical vein,
the latter carrying arterial blood, should  be filled with
red injection,  and the artery with yellow ;  the cord is
to be laid round the  placenta.
   Preservation-  When well varnished, suspend it in a
case, with a glass front and back.

        A Placenta, for Arteries and Veins.
   This is perhaps the easiest preparation to make with
coarse injection, and should, therefore, be  the first at-
tempt  of the student.
   Preparation   Fix a large pipe in the vein, and a small
one in  one of  the  arteries   The difficulty usually at-
tendant on getting the pipe into the artery is obviated
in a great measure by introducing the point ofthe scis-
sars into these vessels, and  slitting them down  for a-
bout half an inch, then spreading the artery open upon
the f >re-finger, and keeping it so by pressure with the
thumb, by which the pipe  may  be carried in without
difficulty.   A  ligature should be  passed  round eack
pipe with a needle,  taking  care  not to  puncture any
of the vessels
   Injection.   The usual colours are to be  selected ; but
instead of throwing the  yellow into the vein, it should
be pushed into the artery, for the artery  here performs
the function of a vein, and vice versa.  When there are
two placentae  there  should be different colours used.
   Dissection.   The spongy substance is to be carefully
dissected away from the injected vessels, the placenta
soaked in cold water, to get rid of its blood, and then
dried, curling the cord around it; and should the mem-
branes not be  much torn  they may be distended with
curled hair over it.
   Preservation. Varnish it  well ;  fix its bottom in a
case with a glass top.. 
25
    The Heart, in Situ ; with the Head and Adjacent
                       Vessels.
   For this purpose choose the head of a young subject,
 or an adult whose heart  is free from  fat.  The liver,
 stomach, spleen, &c are to be removed from the ab-
 domen, and the  aorta divided just  as  it gives off the
 eoeliac artery.  The incision into  the  chest should be
 carried  through  the. integuments, from the trachea to
 the ensiform cartilage, the sternum sawed through, and
 bent one half on each side, from the extremity of the
 cartilages nearest the ribs ; then divide one of the pul-
 monary veins as  near as possible  to the lungs, and re-
 move a portion  of bone over the longitudinal sinus of
 of the dura  mater.
   Preparation.   Having well soaked the parts in warm
 water, and squeezed the blood from the heart and ves-
 sels, by the inferior cava and pulmonary vein, put a pipe
 into the longitudinal sinus of the dura mater, pointed
 towards the  occipital bone, another into the pulmonary
 vein, a third into the vena azygos, and one into the re-
 ccptaculum chyli,  or thoracic duct.  Tie up carefully
 the aorta and the vena cava inferior, and put a strong
 ligature around the middle of each arm.
   J, jection.  Three colours are required ;—one for the
 arteries, which should be red ; another for the veins,
 v liich may be yellow or blue ;  and the third for the tho-
 racic duct, which should  be white, to imitate chyle.
 Throw the red injection into the pipe in the  pulmonary
 vein, v. h.eh will  fill the  left auricle,  ventricle, aorta,
 and all the arteries.  The  pipe in the head is for the
 yellow injection ;  by this will be filled  the veins of the
 head, face, neck, and chest, the right auricle of the
 heart, the right ventricle, and the pulmonary arterits.
 Should the vena azygos not be injected, the yellow in-
jection is to  be thr wn  into it.  A small quantity of
 white injection is  sufficient for the  thoracic duct.
  Dissection. Remove the  body by a transverse section
 at the last dorsal  vertebra, then amputate the arms at
their middle, saw away one side  of the bones of the
scull, and  wash away th.- brain:  then  dissect away all
the loose cellular membrane and  fat,  and expose the
various  parts in  the  best  manner ; dissect away  the
                     n  1 
26
lungs, leaving the pulmonary arteries as long as pos-
sible.
  Preservation.   This is, when well done, a  valuable
preparation,  and deserving  of great care.  Varnish it
well, and preserve it in a square glass case.

    A Foetus, to exhibit the Peculiarities of its
                     Circulation.
  For this purpose select  a  still-born  foetus ;  and, if
possible, one that died from a flooding of the mother.
  Preparation   Dissect the umbilical vein from the ar-
teries, about four inches from the  umbilicus, and fix a
pipe in  it, taking  care not to include  the arteries.—
Throw warm water into this pipe, and wash out the
blood, which will  flow out by  the umbilical arteries.
 Having  drained away as much ofthe water as possible,
tie a ligature very  loose on the umbilical arteries.
   Injection.  The  foetus being heated, throw in gently
 any  coloured injection.  The water will come  away
 first through the umbilical arteries ; and, when the in-
jection appears, make the  ligature firm, to prevent its
 further  egress.
   Dissection.   The peculiarities in the foetal circulation
 are the  umbilical cord, the ductus venosus,  the ductus
 arteriosus, and foramen ovale.   When the body is cold,
 proceed to the dissection ; remove the head from the
 cervical vertebra:, the arms, with the scapula, andpec-
 toral muscles ;  the inferior extremity  at the articula-
 tion with the pelvis, the whole  of the  parietes of the
 abdomen, leaving  the  arteries running to the cord by
 the sides ofthe bladder ;  the anterior  part of the tho-
 rax, with the sternum, cartilages, and  part ofthe ribs,
 the integuments and muscles of the back.  Next cut
 away the lungs, and remove the pericardium ;  keep the
 diaphragm  in its place,  and turn up the liver, so as to
 expose the ductus venosus.   Some dissection and care
  is here necessary.   Dissect away  the  stomach and in-
  testines, and lay out the mesentric vessels, distend the
  bladder with air,  and  cut  away any tiling that may ob-
  st; uct the view ofthe vessels.   The foramen ovale can-
  not be  exhibited.
    Preservation.  After having varnished it  hang it in
  a glass bell, with a hook at its top. 
                      PENIS.
  The penis may be injected, to show the two corpora
cavernosa, the corpus spongiosum, ar.d glans, with the
arteries and veins.  For this purpose am healthy penis
will do, but  large ones are generally preferred   Hav-
ing cut through the integuments and soft parts in the
pelvis, in the direction the saw is to  be passed, saw
through the middle of each crista ofthe pubis, straight
down, and through the ascending  ramus of each ischi-
um, close to their commencement, and thus remove the
pubis, with the bladder and external parts of generation.
  Preparation.  Make an incision into either of the cru-
ra ofthe  corpora cavernosa, and into the bulbous part
ofthe urethra, as near to  the prostrate  gland  as possi-
ble ; soak it in hot  water, and carefully press out the
blood from every part.   Introduce a  probe along the
vena magna ipsius  penis, by an incision at its root, to
break down its valves ; fix a pipe in each of these in-
cisions, and another in each vas defe: ens, at its en-
trance into the  vesicular seminals,  and secure all the
divided vessels.
  Injection.   Four colours are necessary ; those gene-
rally preferred are red, yellow, blue, and while. Throw
the red into the  corpus spongiosum, which will distend
the glans : the yellow  into the corpus cavernosum pipe;
the blue into the vena magna  ipsius  penis ;  and the
white into the vasa  deferentia.
  Dissection.  Inflate the  bladder, dissect away all the.
s ft parts, and  keep the  penis erect against the sym-
phisis pubis.
  Preservation.   In  a covered box.

                    TESTICLE.
  A testicle of an adult should be chosen free from dis-
ease, and great  care  is requisite  in removing it from
tlu- bodv  First, enlarge the ring of the oblique muscle,
push  the testicle through  from the scrotum, and sepa-
rate its cellular connecting substance, then cut the sper-
matic arterv and pampiniform plexus as high  as possi-
sible  and then the vas deferens.
  Preparation.   When well soaked  press out the blood
from the veins j put a pipe into the spermatic aiurv, 
and another into a vein ;  and secure all  other  open
mouths.
  Injection.  Red is to be sent into the afltery, and yel-
low or blue into the vein, which is without valves. Then
fix the quicksilver tube in the vas deferens, and suspend
it in water; this done fill it with mercury, and in twenty-
four hours it mav be removed to be dissected.
  Dissection.   Cut away the tunica  vaginalis, and the
tunica albuginea, which requires great care :  then re-
move all the  cellular and adipose membrane, and dry
it on a board previously waxed.
  Preservation.  In a  common preparation glass, on a
blue or green  paper ground.

         The System  ofthe Vena Par tee.

  Remove the liver, spleen, stomach, and intestines al-
together, of a person whose mesentery is free from fat,
cutting away  at the root of the  mesentery, behind the
peritoneum.
  Preparation.  Cut  into  a mesenteric vein, as near to
the intestine  as possible,  and secure it with  a ligiture
passed around it with a needle, taking care not to wound
any other vein.  Inject warm water, and let it again run
out by the divided vessels. Drain its waters off, and se-
cure all the veins, the hemorrhoidal especially.
   Injection.   Throw any colour into the pipe, which will
pass into the splenic, mesenteric, and internal haevnorr-
hoidal vein, and into the vena porta:.
   Dissection.   Remove all the soft parts ; the stomach,
spleen, and intestines; cutting the vessels as long as pos-
sible, and dry them in the best manner, either attached
to the liver, or dissect away the  liver from the vena por-
l«e, taking care to preserve some of its ramifications.
  Preservation.  In a covered box

                      HEART.
   The heart is mostly injected out of the body, to show
its common and proper vessels. For this purpose, choose
a lean heart.  Cut through the  thoracic viscera imme.
diately at the top of the thorax  } divide the intercostal
arteries by drawing the knife down the pleura, over the
ribs beyond their origin, separate the vena cava im'.n- 
                        29
or and aorta, in the abdomen, with the ciivx hepaticx;
and remove the thoracic viscera, with the portion ofthe
diaphragm surrounding the vessels.
  Preparation.  Soak the blood and coagula out ofthe
cavities ofthe heart, and press the blood from the cor-
onaries.  Put  a pipe into the vena cava superior, and a-
nolher into one ofthe pulmonary veins.  Then tie the
lungs at their root, the vena  cava  inferior, the arteria
innominata, the left carotid and subclavian ; and pass a
Hgaturc, with a slip kn<t round  the sinus qf the aorta,
and secure all other open vessels.
  Injection.  The common coloured injections, red and
yellow, only are wanted. Throw the former into the pul-
monary vien, which will fill the left auricle, ventricle,
aorta,  and coronary arteries.  The yellow, being sent in-
to the  superior cava, will distend the right auricle, co-
ronary veins, right ventricle,  and pulmonary artery.  In
order to fill the coronaries well, the injector must stop
twoor  threetimes in the course ofthe process, to squeeze
on the injection in them with  his nail ;  then  heat the
whole  again, and throw in more injection.  The prepa-
ration  having cooled,  a pipe is to be fixed at the bottom
ofthe  aorta, and some red injection just hot enongh to
run through the syringe, is to be pushed along the aor-
ta, an  assistant throwing cold water on the intercostals,
if the  injection runs through them.
   Dissection.  Cut away the lungs, pericardium, and
all the soft parts.
  Preservation.  Either in a covered box, or under a
glass bell.


     STOMACH. INTESTINES. BLADDER.

   These are best injected with the whole  subject, but
may be removed and  injected separately.
            GENEItAL OBSERVATIONS.
   1.   The anatomist can only succeed  by having the
preparation constantly heated as he is throwing in the
injection.
   2  The injection should be thrown in very gradually.
   3. W Lei injected, the part should be immediately im-
mersed in cold wuwr. 
30
      Preparations with AFinitte Injection.
                      BONES.
  The viscularity of bones is to be demonstrated, by
throwing fine  injection  into an extremity, cutting out
the bone when cold, separating it from all the soft parts,
immersing it in water for a few days, to soak out the
blood, and then putting it into a mixture of muratic a-
cid and water in the proportion of one ounce to a quart
for three or four months, adding about ever)- month a
drachm of acid. The limb of a ricketty child is to be cho-
sen.
  Injection.  Put a pipe into  the largest  artery ofthe
extremity, and throw gradually the red injection into
it, fixing the stop-cock in the pipe.
                    A  FOETUS.
  Still-born children, when injected with minute injec-
tion, afford a number of beautiful preparations.
  Preparation-   No water should be thrown intothe ves-
sels.  Fix a pipe with a stop-cock intothe umbilical vein
and lie the arteries in the ligature.
  Injection   Red  injection is always  chosen for this
purpose ;  and throw it in with great care, until the ad-
domen and skin all over become very tumid.  First mu-
cus comes from the nose and mouth, then the meconium
from the anus, and often pure size.
  Dissection   Cut off'the head from the shoulders, the
arms  below the snouldrr joint, and  the legs below the
acetabulum : then preserve a small  quantity of  the in-
teguments around the navel, and remove all the interior
parietes ofthe abdomen and chest,  so as to exhibit the
thoracic and abdominal viscera.   Cut away the integu-
ments and posterior part of the theca vertebralis, to ex-
hibit the medulla spinalis.
  Preservation.   Soak out the  blood, and preserve it in
proof spirit, to she v.  the viscera and their vascularity.
  From a  well-injected  foetus may be obtained the fol-
lowing preparations.
  1.  If the foetus be about seven months old, the mem-
brana pupillaris.
  2-  If it be male of this age, the  testiele in the abdo-
men, with the gubernaculum. 
                         31

  3.  The vascular and radiated fibres of the parietal
hones-
  4.  The vascular membrane, including the teeth.
  5.  The viscera of the chest separate, if better injec-
ted than those ofthe abdomen, showing the vascularity
ofthe lungs  thvmas gland, and heart.
  6.  The stomach, which is t® be inverted, to show its
vascular vilHous coat.
  7-  The intestines, which are to be separated from th*
mesentery, and inverted, to show their villous coat-
  8.  The glandulte renales and kidnies together, to ex-
hibit  their relative size, and the lobulated structure of
the kidney.
  9.  The uterus and its appendages, to show the long
ovaria and plicx ofthe neck ofthe uterus and vagina.
  10.  The  external parts ofthe female organs of gen-
eration, to show the h.men-
  11.  A  red portion of the skin,  to exhibit its  vascu-
larity.
  12.  The  medulla spinalis, to show its vessels, and the
cauda equina.
  13.  The  membrana tympuni, to exhibit its vascular-
ity.
  11.  The  cavitv ofthe tympanum,  to show its  vascu-
larity, and that ol' the periosteum of its bones.
  15.  The  vestibuluin and cochlea, to show the mem-
branous semicircular canalsof the former, with their am-
pullae injected, and the  vascularity ofthe zona mollis.
  16.  The  head, to show 'he natural appearance ofthe
face, the  papillae ofthe  lips, tongue, he
  17.   The  hanl, to show its natural colour.
  Preservation.  The above  preparations are  all to  be
well  soaked from  their blood,  and preserved in proof
spirit of wine.
  18.  A  Portion of skin, freed of its adeps, to show  its
vascularity.
  19.  The  membrana tympani, to show its vessels.
  20.  The  heart, to show the foramen ovale, by disten-
ding the cavities v ith air; and, when dry, cutting away
the outermost sides of  the auricles, and introducing a
bristle.
  21.  Any  large muscle, freed from its cellular mem-
brane and fat, and dried, to show the vascularity of the
muscle. 
                        32
  Preservation.  These are all to be dried, well varnish-
ed, and preserved in bottles  Some prefer putting them
into spirit of turpentine ; but this should be avoided as
much as  possible, for the turpentine is always oozing in
warm water, and dirtying the glass.

                     UTERUS.
  The object of injecting an uterus with'fine injection,
is to exhibit the vascularity of its internal  membrane,
which  furnishes the catamenia.  For this  purpose the
uterus of a person whose menstruation has not been stop-
ped by age or disease is to be selected.
  Preparation.   Remove the uterus, by divitling the ves-
sels as long as possible, the rountl and broad ligaments,
and as much as possible of the vagina.  Tie a pipe in
each hypogastric artery, and secure all the divided ves-
sels.
  Injection.  Any  coloured injection may be chosen,
but red looks best.
  Dissection.  Cut away all the loose cellular membrane,
bladder, and rectum,  if there be any, from around the
vagina, and cut it open along the middle of its superior
part; continue this incision on each side ofthe anterior
part ofthe uterus, so as to exhibit the posterior surface
of its cavity.
  Preservation.  If the injection be successful, which
it seldom is more  than one time in ten, suspend it by
the ligaments, and preserve it in the proof spirit.

                AN  ADULT HEAD.
  Separate the head as low at the last cervical vertebra
from the shoulders.
  Preparation.   Put  a bifurcated pipe into the carotids..
Secure the vertebral  arteries and jugular veins, and all
the divided parts.
  I-jection.  1 fie red injection is always preferred.
  From an adult head injected in this way maybe made
the following preparations.
  1.  The upper  eyelid,  to show the  vascularity of
Meiboviius,s glands.
  2.  The choroid membrane, exhibiting its vascularity.
  3.  The retina, suspended by the optic  nerve, exhi-
biting its vascularity. 
33-
  4.  A section of the optic nerve, to exhibit the cen-
tral artery.
  5.  The whole of the  cerebrum, cerebellum, and me-
aula oblongata, with the pia mater ; or,
  6.  The pia mater separated from the convolutions of
the brain, to exhibit the  intergyral processes and the  to-
tnentum cerebri.
.  7  . °ne ,,a|f of the nostrils, to exhibit  the vascular-
ity of Schneider's membrane, and that of the membrane
lining the antrum of Highmore.
  1.  The tongue, 1} ing  in the jaw,  and suspended  by
the palatum molle, with the posterior fauces cut away,
to show the epiglottis and glottis, the uvula and velum
pendulum  palati, the tongue, its papillae and excretory
ducts, and the vascularity of the gums and sublingual
glands
  Preservation.  The above preparations are to be soak-
ed well in cold water, to get out ail the blood, and then
preserved in proof spirit.
        Preparations with Quicksilver.

  Mercury cannot be coloured by any substances; it
must, therefore, always present the same silver colour.

             GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.

  1.  The part should  always be injected in a proper
tray, that the mercury may be easily collected.
  2.  A lancet, with a curved needle ready threaded,
should be always at hand.
  3  A. bottle, whose neck is not so wide as to permit the
quicksilver tube going to the bottom, when put into it.
  4.  When  injecting,  if any  circumstance renders it
necessary for the injector to put aside the tube with the
mercury, it should be placed in the bottle, the mercury
remaining in  it, to be handy and prevent delay.
  5.  Injecting  with  mercury is always tedious, and
frequently unsuccessful.  The parts exposed must be
kept moist, by sprinkling them with  cold water. 
34
             A Superior Extremity.
   To inject the lymphaties of an arm, choose one from
 a dropsical subject, without fat; make an incision into
 the skin aronnd the wrist, and seek diligently, with a
 magnifying glass, for an absorbent, into which the pipe
 is to be put, when the quicksilver will immediately run.
 The shoulder should now be placed considerable  lower
 than the hand ; and, when the mercury runs out at the
 divided vessels in the  axilla, tie them  up, and also the
 lymphatic, into wh'di the pipe was introduced.   Then
 seek for another absorbent. When the mercury ceases
 to run in a lymphatic tie the vessel, and  seek for another.
  Dissection.  Begin at the lymphatics, where the mer-
 cury entered, and trace them ; removing every thiiig
 that obstructs their view, but preserve the glands.

             An Inferior Extremity.

  The limb for this purpose should also be taken from
 a dropsical person, and the same method adopted as
 with the superior extremity, seeking as near to the toes
 as possible for the  lymphatics.

             A PAROTID  GLAND.

  Cut down upon  the masseter muscle,  and seek for
 the Stenonian duct, which is the excretory duct ofthe
 parotid.  Tie the quicksilver  pipe in  it,  then fix the
tube,  and pour into it the quicksilver ;  and when it
 ceases to  run, remove  the tube antl pipe, and tit the
duct   Be particularly careful, in dissecting away the
gland,  not to cut it.
  Preservation. Dry it on a waxed board,  and preserve
it on a blue paper and pasteboard, in  spirit of turpen-
tine.
                      LIVER.

  The lymphatics running on the peritoneal coat of the
liver, and over the gall-bladder, make  a beautiful pre-
paration.  The liver should be well soaked for several
days,  and the pipe put into the lymphatics ofthe sus-
pensory and coronory ligaments, and the  mercury for-
 eed along them, breaking down the valves with the nail, 
35
 by pressing on the mercury.  Secure the vessels at the
 portae of the liver, when the mercurv  gets there, and
 tie the lymphatics when filled.  Should the anatomist's
 attempt to force the  quicksilver beyond the valves be
 unsuccessful, he must  fix  upon the  minute obvious
 branch, and let it run  in its proper course.
   Preservation.   Throw some coarse injection into the
 cavae hepaticae and vena portae,  without heating the li-
 ver thoroughly ;  inflate the gall-bladder, and dry the
 whole.  Varnish it, and preserve  it in the best manner
 under a glass bell,  or preserve  the  injected part in
 proof spirit,  without any wax injection.

                      LUNGS.
   The superficial lymphatics of the lungs are to be fil-
 led from the part most remote from the root  of the
 lungs.
   Preservation.  Cut away  the  part on which the lym-
 phatics are filled.  Dry it on  a waxed board, varnish
 it, and preserve it in a bottle, on a green or blue piece
 of paper; or preserve it in proof spirit, without dry-
 ing it.
                      HAND.
   Select the hand of  an aged female (separated from
 the arm by a transverse section,  three inches above the
 wrist) that has died of a lingering disease.  Soak out
 the blood in warm water ; fix the pipe in the radial ar-
 tery, then add  the tube, and pour into  it the mercury.
 As the mercury appears in the other arteries and veins,
 take them up and secure them with ligatures.  Should
 the mercury  still escape from  small  branches, put a
 cord round the arm, and with a piece of wood tighten
 it, by twisting the wood, taking care not to prevent the
 mercury passing  into  the  hand.   Then suspend  the
 hand in a glass filled with water, and suspend also the
 tube and quicksilver in the manner represented in the
 annexed plate,  for a day or two, that the mercury may
 get into the small vessels.   When injected remove the
 pipe, and tie, by a strong string, the fore-arm ;  put the
 hand into water, until putrefaction separates the cuticle.
  Preservation.  Dry it carefully, and varnish it; then
fix the tiire-arm in a pedestal of plaister of Paris, and
keep tins bjautiful preparation under a glass bell. 
36
                   LACTEALS.
  Remove the mesentery and intestines, if the former
be perfectly free from fat, and let them remain several
days in water, which  should be frequently changed.
Search for an absorbent, on the  intestine,  into  which
introduce the quicksilver, which  will  run on  to the
glands in the mesentery, where it will stop. When the
lacteals are filled, the preparation will be more elegant
if red and yellow  coarse injection  be thrown  into the
mesenteric arteries and veins.
  Preservation.   Spread the mesentery on a  waxed
board, inflate a portion ofthe intestine, clear away all
that is useless ; dry and varnish, and preserve it in a
glass frame.
         CORRODED PREPARATIONS.

  These preparations are made by filling the vessels
with coarse injection, and corroding the  soft parts so
as to exhibit those vessels.

             GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.
  1. The liquor for corrosion is to consist of three parts
of muriatic acid, and one of water.
  2. The liquor should be kept in a well  glazed earth-
en vessel, with a top to it, also well glazed.
  3. The part to be corroded should be carefully moved
in and out of this  liquor,  as the slightest force may
break the vessels.
  4.  When corroded, the pulpy flesh is to be carefully
washed away, by placing it under a cock of water, the
water flowing very  slowly ;  or, in some instances, by
squirting it away.
  5.  When the preparation is freed  of  its flesh,  it
should  be fixed in a situation it is to remain  in, either
in a  plaister of Paris  pedestal, or on a flat surface.
   6.  If the flesh be not perfectly destroyed, the pre-
paration is to be returned to the corroding liquor for a
fortnight or month longer, or until it becomes pulpy. 
37
              HEART AND LUNGS.

  These viscera, occupying less space in children than
adults, are to be preferred.   It is of no consequence
whether they are fat or lean.   The integuments should
be cut from the fore part ofthe neck ; and the trachea,
jugular veins, and carotid arteries removed, and, with
them, the viscera  of the  thorax,  carefully separating
the subclavian vessels from the clavicle, without injur-
ing them, and dividing the axillary vessels and the ca-
va inferior and aorta, just below the diaphragm.
  Preparation.   Soak the whole well, to free it of its
blood, and press out all the fluids :  fix a pipe in the in-
ferior cava, and another in one of the pulmonary veins,
taking care not to injure the others by tying it.  Then
secure the carotids, the jugulars, the axillary vessels,
the vertebral artery, the intercostals, the aorta, after it
has formed its arch, the internal mammaries, and every
vessel that can be found.
  Injection.  Red and yellow are generally preferred,
but red and blue are more proper and more elegant.
Throw the blue into the vena cava inferior, which will
distend the right auricle, the superior cava, the jugular
veins, and great coronary vein, the right ventricle, and
pulmonary arteries.  The red injection will fill the left
auricle  and pulmonary veins, the aorta, subclavians, ca-
rotids, &c.
  Preservation.  Great care  is requisite in freeing the
injection from the pulpy flesh.  When done, let the a-
pex ofthe heart be placed immediately in a plaister of
Paris pedestal, and cover it with a  glass.  If the pul-
monary vessels are  well preserved, it forms a valuable
preparation.  If one good preparation  be obtained in
ten trials, it will amply repay the anatomist.


                      HEART.

   A fat heart will do for this purpose.  Inject it as di-
 rected in page 29, and put it into the corroding liquor.
   Preservation.  Lay  it on some cotton, on a pedestal,
 and cover it with a glass. 
38
                      LIVER.

  The liver of a child is to be preferred to that of an
adult, it occupying much less room : its vessels should
be cut long, and with it the portion of the duodenum,
perforated bv the bile duct.
  Preparation-  Fix a pipe into the hepatic artery, an-
other into the vena p rtx, a third into the ductus com-
munis choledochus, and a  fourth  in the vena cava he-
patica.
  Injection. The four injections are to be red, yellow,
dark blue, and light  blue.  First,  throw  the red  injec-
tion into the hepatic artery, next the dark blue into the
vena ports, then the light'blue into the cavae hepaticae,
and lastly, the  yellow  into the ductus communis chol-
edochus.
  Preservation.   Remove the pipes as soon as the injec-
tion will permit; and, when corroded,  fix the trunks
in the best manner possible,  upon a proper pedestal:
then  wash away the flesh, dry it,  and  cover it with  a
glass.

                     KIDNEY.

  Choose the kidney of an old drunkard.  Cut  the e-
mulgent vessels close  to  the  aorta  and cava, and the
ureter, very low ;  then remove the kidney, with its sur-
rounding adeps.
  Preparation   Soak out the  blood, and press out all
the fluid.  Fix a pipe  in the emulgent artery, another
in the vein, and a third in the ureter ; and tie up all
the open  mouthed vessels.
  Injection.  Red, blue, and  yellow.  First throw the
yellow into the vein, then the red into the artery, and
lastly, the blue into the ureter.
  Preservation.  Under a glass bell.
  The kidneys  of different animals form a beautiful
exhibition. 
PART I.
                    OF  THE


         BONES  IN GENERAL,


WHICH ARE THE FIRMEST PARTS OF THE BODY,

              AND SERVE FOR THE

    SUPPORT OF THE OTHER ORGANS.
       The following parts are to be attended to.

    THE Radiated appearance of the Fibres on broad
Bones in Children.
  The Longitudinal Fibres, forming the long Bones of
Children.
  The Lamella, in the long Bones of Adults.
  The Sides of the long Bones in Adults, thick at the
middle, and thin towards the extremities.
• The Reticular Substance in the middle of long Bones:
  The CancelU in the extremities of long Bones.
  The Little  Cavities for containing Marrow and  Ves-
sels in the most solid parts ofthe Bones.
  The CancelU between the plates of the broad  Bones.
  The Seriosteum which  covers Bones in general, and
convevs Nutritious Vessels into their Substance.
  The  Periosteum Internum, or Membrana  Medullaris,
which lines the Reticulaeand Caneelli of Bones, and con-
tains the  Marrow.
  The Passages ofthe  principal Vessels of Bones.
  The Hilcs tor the transmission of Nerves which can be
seen onh in certain Bones
  The  Globules of Fat  which compose the Marrow. 
                        40
  The Connection of Bones by Suture, where no motion
is allowed.
  The Connection of Bones by Cartilage, where some mo-
tion is necessary.
  The Connection of Bones by Ligament, where exten-
sive motion is required.
  The Cartilages upon the ends of Bones, for the  safe
and easy motion of the Joints.
  The Perichondrium, or Membrane covering the Carti-
lages, which in moveable Joints gives these Cartilages
a great degree of smoothness.
  The Substances, called Glands of the  Joints, for the
secretion of Synovia.
  The Epiphyses  upon the  ends of moveable Bones in
Children.for facilitating and hastening their ossification.
  The Epiphyses changed into Apophyses, or Processes,
upon certain parts of Bones of Adults, for the attach-
ment of Muscles, &c. and which obtain particular names
ace >rding to their appearances ; as Coronoid, Condy-
loid, &c.
  The numerous Cavities of Bones, as Glenoid, Cotyloid,
be. the names varying according to their appearances.
           Ofthe Skeleton in General,

  THE Assemblage of Bones Joined together to form
a Skeleton,
  A Natural Skeleton, or one joined together by its own
Ligaments.
  An Artificial Skeleton, or one joined together by Wire,
&c. &c.
  The  Division of the Skeleton into Head, Trunk, Supe-
rior Extremities, and Inferior Extremities.
            Of the Skull in General.

  The Skull divided into the Cranium, and Bonet of the
Face.
  The General Figure ofthe upper part of the Cranium,
compared to that of an Egg. 
                        *1
  The flat form ofthe Cranium, laterally;
  The Smooth Surface ofthe upper part ofthe Cranium,
where it is little affected by Muscular Fibres.
  The Periosteum ofthe head, called Pericranium.
  The under and outer Surface ofthe Cranium, irregular
where it gives attachment to Muscles, &c. and passa-
ges to Vessels and Nerves.
  The anterior and under part of the Cranium, hoi loin,
to make part ofthe Orbits.
  The posterior part ofthe Cranium, marked bv Muscles
of the Trunk.
  The upper and inner Surface of the Cranium, hollow,
for lodging the Brain.
  The under and inner Surface ofthe Cranium, with un-
equal  Cavities, for lodging the  Lobes of the Brain and
Cerebellum.
  The Furrovis along the inner side of the Cranium, foj ,
the reception ofthe Blood-vessels ofthe Dura Mater.
  The Sinuosities upon the inner Surface of certain Cra-
nia, for lodging Luxuriances ofthe brain.
  The Pits seen in some Crania, for lodging Granulout
Bodies on the Dura Mater.
  The External Table ofthe Cranium.
  The Internal table of'the Cranium, called Vitrea, some-
what thinner than the external.
  The Diploe, or CancelU,  between the tables of the
Cranium.
  The Diploe a wanting in certain parts ofthe Cranium.
  The Cranium in general composed of eight bones, six
of which are said to be proper to the Cranium, the tvio
last common to it and to the Face ■

         The six proper to the Cranium, are

  The OsFrontis, placed in the fore-partof the Cranium.
  The tvjo Ossa Parietalia, placed in the upper and lat-
eral parts ofthe Cranium.
  The two Ossa Temporvm, placed in the under and lat-
eral parts.
  The Os Occipitis, which forms the back and some of
 the lower part of the Cranium.
c 2 
42
   The tvio Bones common to the Cranium and Face are,
  The Os Kthmoides, placed in the fore-part of the Base
ofthe Cranium
  The Os Sphenoides, situated in the middle of the Base.
  The Sutures, placed between the bones ofthe Crani-
um, for allowing the Ossification to begin originally in
different poin's. are, the three True Sutures,and two False
or Squamous Sutures.

            The three True Sutures are,
  The Coronal Suture, placed between the Frontal and
Parietal Bones, losing its serrated appearance near its
terminations.
  The Lambdoid Suture, lying  between the  Parietal,
Temporal, and Occipital Bones.
  The parts of the  Lambdoid Suture, placed between
the Occipital and Temporal Bones, called Additamenta
ofthe Lambdoid Suture.
  The Sagittal  Suture, situated between the Parietal
Bones.
  The Sagittal Suture, sometimes continued to the Nose.
  The Serrated Appearance of the True Sutures,  seen
distinctly on the  outside of the Cranium only.
  The True Sutures, having little ofthe serrated appear-
ance on the inside ofthe Cranium.
  The two False Sutures, placed between the upper edge
ofthe temporal,  and under Edge ofthe Parietal Bones.
  The Portion of the two False Sutures, situated be-
tween the under and back part of the Parietal anel the
Temporal Bones  called by some Additamenta ofthe Squa-
mous Sutures, and which have in that part the true ser-
raied appearance.
   Additional Bones, called Ossa Triquetra, or Wormi-
ana, sometimes found in  the different Sutures, though
most frequently in the middle of the Lambdoid Suture.

  The Sutures said to be  common  to the Bones of the
              Cranium and Face, are,
  The Ethmoid  Suture,  which surrounds the Ethmoid
Bone.
  Tne Sphenoid  Suture,  which surrounds the Sphenoid
Bone. 
43
  The Transverse Suture, which runs across the orbits
and root ofthe Nose, between the Frontal, Malar, Sphe-
noid, Ethmoid, superior Maxillary, and Nasal Bones.
  The Zygomatic Sutures, placed between the Temporal
and Cheek Bones.
                  OS  FRONTIS.

  The Situation of the Os Frontis,  in the fore-part of
the Cranium.
  Its Shape, which has been compared to that of a Clam
shell
  lis External Surface, smooth and convex.
  The external and internal Angular, or Orbitar Proces-
ses.
  The Superciliary Ridges, on which  the Eye-brows are
placed.
  Projections over the Frontal Sinuses.
  The Nasal Process, forming part ofthe  Nose.
  Part of the Temporal Process,  or Ridge Which forms
the boundary between  the temporal and Frontal Mus-
cle s.
  The hollow Orbitar Processes,  or Plates, which form
the upper part of the Orbits.
  The Sinuosity behind the upper end ofthe Supercilia-
ry Ridge, for lodging the Lacrymal Gland.
  Behind each  Internal Angular Process, a small Pit,
to which the  Cartilaginous Pulley of the Superior ob-
lipue  Muscle is fixed.
  The Temporal Fossa, for lodging part of the Muscle
of that name.
  The Opening between the Orbitar Plates, for receiv-
ing the Cribriform Plate ofthe Ethmoid Bone.
  The  Foramen Supra Orbiturium, through  which  a
branch of the Ucular Artery, and part  of the Ophthal-
mic Branch of the Fifth Pair of  Nerves pass to the soft
parts ofthe Foreheads.
  The Foramen Orbiturium Internum, Anterius et Poste-
rius, through which smalltwigs of Nerves pass from the
first part of the  Fifth Pair,  and of Arteries  from the
Ocular Arterv  into the Nose- 
44
   Small Perforations found upon the under and fore-part
 of the Frontal Bone, for the transmission of very minute
 Arteries or Nerves.
   The concave,  inner, and fore-part of the Os  Frontis,
 for lodging the  Anterior Lobes ofthe brain.
   The convex under parts, for supporting these Lobes,
 and covering the Eyes.
   The Ridges and Depressions of the Orbitar Processes,
 marked by the  Convolutions ofthe Brain.
   Small Furrows on the inside ofthe  Bone, for  lodging
 the Blood vessels ofthe Dura Mater.
   Slight Sinuosities, more evident on  the under than on
 the upper part ofthe Bone, occasioned by the Convolu-
 tions  ofthe anterior part ofthe Brain.
   The Frontal Spine, for the attachment ofthe  Falx.
   The Frontal  Furrow, extending upwards from the
 Spine, for lodging the upper part of the superior Lon-
 gitudinal Sinus.
   The Foramen Cecum at the under part of the Spine,
 fora process ofthe Falx ofthe Dura Mater, and small
 Blood vessels.
   The Frontal Sinuses, placed behind the  inner ends of
 the Superciliary Ridges, and, in some Skulls,  forming
 Prominences near the root of the Nose.
   The Walls ofthe Sinuses, formed by a separation of
 the Tables ofthe Bone.
   Their Partition,  by which they are prevented from
 communicating  with each other.
   A Communication which they  sometimes have with
 each other.
   A Passage from each, leading into the Cavity ofthe
 anterior Ethmoid Cells,  and from thence to the Nose.
—The Sinuses add  to the  strength and melody of the
voice.
   In a Foetus of nine months, the Os  Frontis is compo-
sed of two Pieces—The Superciliary Holes and  Fron-
tal Sinuses are not yet formed.
             OSSA  PARIETALIA.
  THE Situation of the Parietal Bones in the upper and
lateral parts ofthe Cranium. 
45
  The^wre of each Parietal Bone a Trapezium, or ap-
proaching that of a Square.
  The upper edge longest.
  The anterior Edge, next in length.
  The posterior Edge, Shorter.
  The inferior, shortest, and in form of a ragged arch,
to be connected to the upper edge of the Squamous part
ofthe Temporal Bone.
  The three first Edges of the Bone ragged, where they
assist in forming the True Sutures.
  The corners of the Bone obtuse, excepting the under
and anterior, which forms a kinel of process.
  The external convex smooth surface ofthe Rone.
  The transverse arched  Ridge, or Line, placed exter-
nally, a little below the middle height of the Bone, for
the origin ofthe  Temporal Muscle.
  The radiated Furrows at the under part ofthe Bone,
formed by the  Fibres ofthe temporal Muscle.
  The  Foramen Parietale,  for the passage of a Vein
from the Integuments ofthe Head to the superior lon-
gitudinal Sinus ;  and sometimes for the transmission of
a small Artery to the Falx ofthe Dura Mater.
  The internal concave Surface of the Bone.
  The  Furrows made by the blood-vessels of the Dura
Mater, the  principal of which begin by a Trunk at the
under and fore-part ofthe Bone-
  The  Depression at the upper Edge of the Bone, which
5s most distinctly seen when the Bones are conjoined, for
the attachment ofthe Falx, and lodgment of the supe-
rior longitudinal  Sinus.
  The Fossa at the  under and back part of the Bone,
for lodging a small part of the lateral Sinus.
  Numerous Depressions  found on the inside of the
Bone, occasioned by the pronTmences of the Brain.
  The Connection of the Parietal  Bones to the Frontal
one, by the Coronal  Suture,—to each other by the Sa-
gittal Suture.
  In the Foetus the sides of the Parietal Bones are in-
complete, and  there is no  Parietal Hole.
  Between  the Parietal Bones and the middle of the Os
Frontis, there  is  a Membranous Substance filling the in-
terstice, and getting the name of Bregma, Fons, or Fon-
'anella, from "its having been supposed  by the Ancients 
46
that the superfluous humours of the Brain are evacua-
ted through it.
                 OS OCCIPITIS.
  The Situation of the Occipital Bone in the back and
under part ofthe Cranium.
  Its rhomboid figure.
  The two lateral Angles-
  The external Surface, convex and smooth at the up-
per part.
  The large arched Ridge, near the middle of the con-
vex Surface to the centre  of which the Trapezii Mus-
cles are fixed, the outer parts giving origin to the Oc-
cipito Frontalis.
  The smaller Arch, under the former.
  The Depressions between the large and small Arch-
es, for the connection of the Complexi.
  The Impressions between  the Arches and the Tem-
poral Bones, for the attachment ofthe Splenii.
  Cavities between the  smaller Arch and the Foramen
Magnum, for the reception ofthe Recti Minores.
  The perpendicular Spine, between the Muscles ofthe
opposite Sides.
  The unequal Edges of the  Foramen Magnum,  for the
insertion of Ligaments, by  which the Head is fixed to
the Vertebrae of'he neck.
  The inferior Angle, called Cuneiform or Basilar Pro.,
cess.
  The unequal Surface  of the  Cuneiform Process, for
the attachment of the Recti  Anteriores Muscles.
  The Condyles placed at  the Base of the Cuneiform
Process, and sides of the Foramen Magnum,  for the
articulation with the first  Vertebra ofthe Neck.
  The oval Form and smooth Cartilaginous Surface of
the Condyles, corresponding with the superior articu-
lating Processes ofthe first Vertebra.
  The rough Edges ofthe Condyles, for the attachment
of their Capsular Ligaments.
  The rough Surface between the Condyles and  Mas-
toid Processes of Hie Temporal Bones, for the insertion
ofthe Recti Capitis LaUrales Muscles. 
                        47
  The Internal Surface ofthe Bone, hollow, for contain-
ing the back part ofthe Brain and Cerebellum.
  The Cruciform Spine ofthe inner side.
  The upper Limb of the perpendicular Spine,  hollow
in the mieldle, or frequently at one side, for the  recep-
tion of the superior longitudinal Sinus, and the attach-
ment ofthe  Falx.
  The lateral Limbs placed opposite to the great ex-
ternal arched Spine, and hollow in the middle, for con-
taining the lateral  Sinuses, and giving attachment to
the Tentorium ofthe Dura Mater.
  The lower Limb of the perpendicular Spine, for the
attachment ofthe Falx Minor.
  The Foss<e at the sides of the upper Limb, for  con-
taining the posterior Lobes ofthe Brain.
  The Foss<e at the sides of the lower  Limb, for con-
taining the Cerebellum.
  The concave Surface of the Cuneiform Process  for re-
ceiving the Medulla Oblongata, and Basilar Artery.
  The Depressions at each side  of the Cuneiform  Pro-
cess where the inferior Petrosal Sinuses are placed.
  The Foramen Magnum, behind the Basilar Process,
and at the sides of the Condyles, for the passage of the
Medulla Oblongata, Vertebral Vessels, and Accessory
Nerves.                                      _   .
  The superior  or  anterior Condyloid Foramina, tor tlie
passage of the Ninth pair of Nerves.
  The posterior Condyloid Foramina, for the passage ot
Veins into the Lateral Sinuses.              _
  The Connection of the Bone to the OssaPanetaha, by
the Lambdoid Suture.
  In the Foetus the Occipital Bone is divided into Jour
tieceti the first reaching from the middle of the  Lamb-
doid Suture to the Foramen Magnum,  the second and
third are placed at the  sides of that Foramen, and the
fourth forms the Cuneiform Process.
               OSSA  TEMPORUM.

  The Situation o' e: ch  Temporal  Bone in the under
pint of the side of the C.aiuum. 
                        48
  The Squamous Plate, which form* a part of the Tern-
pie, and gives origin to a portion of the Temporal Mu*-
clc-
  The Mastoid Process, at the  under and back part of
the Bone, giving insertion to strong Muscles, and con-
taining cells which communicate with each  other, and
with the Cavity of the Tympanum.
  The Pars Petrosa hard like a rock, and placed at the
base ofthe Bone, from which it  runs obliquely forwards
and iuwards, and contains the internal Organ of hear-
ing ;  to be afterwards described.
  The Zygomatic Process, running from the under and
fore-part of  the Squamous Plate, to join the Os Malae,
and form an  Arch, under which the Temporal Muscle
passes to the Lower Jaw.
   A Tubercle at the root of this Process, covered with
 Cartilage, and making part  of  the Articulation of tli«
 Lower Jaw.
   The  Styloid Process, placed at the root of the Pars
 Petrosa, and going obliquely downwards and forwards,
 to give origin to Muscles which belong to  the Tongue
 and Throat.
   The Vaginal Process, of an inconsiderable size, sur-
 rouneling the root ofthe  Styloid Process.
   The Rough Margin at the under part of the external
 Meatus, sometimes also considered  as a Process, and
 called Auditory.
   A Grojve, at the under part of the root of the Mas-
 toid Process, giving  origin to the  Digastric Muscle.
   The Glenoid Cavity, lined with  Cartilage at the root
 ofthe Zygoma, for the articulation of the Lower Jaw.
   The Glenoid Fissure, at the back-part of this Cavity,
 for the attachment ofthe Capsular Ligament of the ar-
 ticulation ofthe Jaw.
    A Depression between the articular Cavity and Sty-
 loid Process, for lodging a portion of the Parotid Gland.
    The Thimble-like  Cavity, or the Jugular Fossa, at the
  inner side of the  root of the Styloid Process, for lodg-
  ing the top ofthe internal Jugular Vein.
    Meatus Auditorius  Externus, between the Mastoid and
  Zygomatic  Processes, leading inwards and forwards to
  the Organ of hearing.
    Forauen  Stylo-Mastoideum, or  Jquaduct of Fallopius, 
f  between the  Stvloid and  Mastoid Processes, for the
J  transmission ofthe Portio Dura ofthe Seventh Pair of
L  Nerves.
A,    The Foramen Caroticum, at the inner and fore-part
I-  ofthe Jugular Fossa, leading upwards, then forwards
*  through the point of the  Pars Petrosa, for the trans-
   mission of the internal Carotid Artery to the Brain.
     Iter a Palato ad Aurem, or Eustachian Tube, between
k  the Fissure for the Capsular Ligament of the Lower
\  Jaw, and the  Passage of the internal Carotid Artery ;
I  and, in the Subject,  by the addition of a  Cartilage,
   formed into a trumpet-like Tube, which  conveys air
   from the Nose to the Tympanum ofthe Ear.
     Foramen  Mastoideum,, occasionally  found at the back
   part of the Mastoid Process,  or in the Lambdoid Su-
   ture.  When present, it sometimes transmits an Artery
   to the Dura Mater, but more  commonly a  Vein from
   the Integuments ofthe Head to the lateral  Sinus.
     The upper and inner Edge  of the  Squamous  Plate,
   formed into ridges and furrows, where  it is connected
   with the Parietal Bone.
     The inner Surface of  the  Squamous Plate, unequal
   where it is marked by  the Convolutions of the Brain,
JL  and by the Arteries ofthe Dura Mater.
     The anterior and outer Surface of the Pars Petrosa,
   opposed to the lateral  Lobes of the Brain.
     The posterior and inner Surface of the Pars Petrosa,
   opposed to the Cerebellum.
     A Ridge between the two Surfaces ofthe Pars Petro-
   sa, for the attachment ofthe Tentorium.
     A Groove upon  the  ridge of the Pars Petrosa, for
   lodging the superior Petrosal Sinus.
     Fossa, at the root of the posterior  Surface  of the
   Pars Petrosa, and opposite to the Mastoid Process,  for
   lodging the lateral Sinus, where-it turns downwards to
   go out of the Cranium.
     Meatus Auditorius Internus, or Foramen Auditivum, in
   the posterior Surface of the Pars Petrosa, for the pas.
   sage ofthe Seventh Pair of Nerves.
     Foramen Innominatum, in the anterior Surface ofthe
   Pars Petrosa, for the passage of a reflected Nerve from
   ^tlle Fifth to the Seventh Pair.
     foramen Lacerum Posterius, or  Hole common to the 
                       50
Pars Petrosa and Cuneiform  Process of the Occipital
Bone, for the passage ofthe lateral Sinus, Eighth Pair,
and accessory Nerves.  The  Nerves pass through the
fore-part ofthe Hole, and are separated from the Sinus
by a Process ofthe Dura Mater.
  The Connection ofthe Bone, by its upper curved Edge,
to the Parietal Bone by the Squamous Suture.
  To the under and back part'ofthe Parietal Bone, by
the Aditamentum ofthe Squamous Suture.
  To the Occipital Bone, by the Additamentum ot the
Lambdoid Suture.                          ♦!..■.
   In a Foetus, the Squamous is separated from the Pe-
trous part by a Fissure.   There  is no  appearance of
Mastoid or Styloid Process, and  instead of a Meatus
Externus, there is only a Ring of Bone, in which the
Membrana Tympani is fixed.
                OS  ETHMOIDES.

  The Situation of the Ethmoid or Cribriform Bone in
the fore part of the Base of the Cranium.
  Its Cuboid Figure.
  The Cribriform Plate, perforated  with  many holes,
for the transmission of the First, or Olfactory Pair of
Nerves.
  The Crista  Galli arising from the middle ofthe Cri-
briform  Plate, to give attachment to the  Falx of the
Dura Mater.
   A Notch at the fore-part of the root ofthe Crista Gal-
li, contributing, in a very small degree, to the forma-
tion ofthe Foramen Caecum ofthe Frontal Bone.
  The Nasal Plate, extending downwards from the base
ofthe Crista  Galli, to form the upper and back part of
the Septum, or Partition ofthe Nostrils.
   The Ethmoid Cells placed under the Cribriform Plate,
a little to the outside of the Nasal Lamella, separated
from each other by  thin Plates, and serving the same
purposes as the Frontal Sinuses.
   Their Communications with each other, with the Fron-
tal Sinus,  and also with the Cavity ofthe Nose.
   The Os  Spongiosum, or  Turbittatum duperius, hanging 
                         51
down from the oethmoid Cells at the side of the Nasal
Lamella, for enlarging the Organ of Sm«-ll.
  Its Triangular form and Spongy Texture.
  Its Convexity towards the Septum, and Concavity out-
wards
  The Os Planum, or Orbitar Plate, for covering a large
share of the oethmoid  Cells, and forming  the greater
part of the inner  side ofthe Oibit.
  The Connection of the C/ibriform  Plate to the Orbitar
Plates of tile Frontal Bone,  by  the cefhmoid Suture ;
and to the Sphenoid Bone, by a Suture common to the
two Bones, but generally considered as belonging to the
 latter.
   The Connection ofthe Os Planum  to the Orbitar Plate
 ofthe Frontal Bone by part of the Transverse Suture.
   The posterior Edge of the Nasal  Plate, joined to the
 Processus Azvgos  ofthe Sphenoid  Bone.
   Its upper Edge joined to the Nasal  Process of the
 Frontal and Nnsal  Bones.
   Its anterior Edge, joined to the  middle Cartilage of
 the Nose.
   In the Foetus,  the oethmoid Bone is divided into two
 by  a Cartilaginous partition, which afterwards forms
 the Nasal Plate  and Crista Galli.
               OS SPHENOIDES.

  The Situation ofthe Solenoid, Cuneiform, or Wedge-
like Bone, in the middle ofthe Cranium.
  Its Irregular Figure, compared to that of a Bat with
extended wings.
  The Temporal Plate, hollow, for lodging a share of
the Temporal Muscle
  The Orbitar Plate, which forms aportionof the Orbit.
  The  Spinous Process, at the  under and back part of
the Temporal Process.
  The Styloid Process, at the point of the Spinous Pro-
cess.
  The Pterygoid, or Aliform Process, composed or two
Plates, which are compared to the wings, though more
properly resembling the feet of the Bat. 
                        52
  The external Plate, broad and hollow without, where
the external Pterygoid Muscle has its origin.
  The internal Plate, narrower and longer than the ex-
ternal, and, with its fellow, forming the back part ot
the Nose.                       .       , _,  .
  A Hook-like Process upon the  internal Plate, over
which the Circumflex Muscle ofthe Palate moves
  The Fossa Pterygoidea, between the Pterygoid Plates,
g-ivinjr rise to the internal Pterygoid Muscle.
  A Groove between the root  of  the  Styloid  Process,
and that of the internal Pterygoid Plate, assisting in
the formation ofthe Eustachian Tube.
  The Triangular Process, which  adheres to the body
ofthe Sphenoid, and the oethmoid Bone, and which is
considered as1 one of the Bones ofthe Face.
  The Processus Azygos, standing single and projecting
from under the middle ofthe fore part ofthe Bone.
  The Clinoid Processus, compared to the supporters of
a Bed, of which there are                     #
  Two Anterior, terminating each in a point, which ob-
tains the name of Transverse Spinous Process-   The
third is
  The Posterior Clinoid Process,  situated transversely,
someway behind the anterior Processes, and frequent-
ly ending in two knobs, which incline obliquelyforwards.
  Processus Olivaris, considered  by  some as  a fourth
Clinoid Process, lying between the posterior points of
the anterior Clinoid Processes.
  Between the  anterior Clinoid Processes,  a  small-
pointed Process frequently juts forwards, to join the Cri-
briform Plate ofthe oethmoid Bone.
  The Temporal Fossa of this  Bone, which lodges a
share ofthe lateral Lobe of the Brain.
  A Fossa  between  the  anterior Clinoid Processes,
where part of the  anterior Lobes ofthe  Brain rests.
  A Depression before  the  Processus Olivaris,  where
the conjoined Optic Nerves lie.
  The Sella Turcica, Ephippium, or  Turkish Saddle, be-
tween the Processus  Olivaris  and posterior  Clinoid
 Process, for lodging the Glandula Pituitaria.
   A Depression upon the side of  the  posterior  Clinoid
Process and Sella Turcica, formed by the internal Ca-
 rotid Artery. 
                        5 J
  The Foramen Opticum, under the anterior  Clinoid
Process, for the transmission ofthe  Optic Nerve and
Ocular Artery.
  The Foramen Lacerum Superius, or superior Orbitar
Fissure, under  the  anterior Clinoid Process, and its
transverse spinous part, for the passage  of the Third,
Fourth, first part of the  Fifth, and the Sixth Pair of
Nerves, and the Ocular Vein.
  The Foramen Rotundum, a little behind the Foramen
Lacerum, for the passage of the second part of the
Fifth Pair of Nerves.
  The Foramen Ovale, farther back, and more external
than the Rotundum, for the passage of the thirtl part
ofthe Fifth Pair of Nerves, and commonly for the pas-
sage of the Veins which accompany the principal Arte-
ry of the Dura Mater.
  The Foramen Spinale, in the point ofthe  Spinous Pro-
cess, for the transmission of the principal Artery ofthe
Dura Mater.
  The Foramen Pterygoideum, at the root of the inner
Plate ofthe Pterygoid Process, for the passage of a
reflected branch of the second part of the Fifth pair of
Nerves.
  Sometimes one or more small passages are observed
in or near the  Sella Turcica,  for the transmission of
Blood-vessels into the Sphenoid Sinus, or to the sub-
stance of the Bone.
  The Foramen Lacerum Anterius, common to the point
of the Pai s Petrosa, and to the Sphenoid and Occipital
Bones.
  In a recent Skull, this hole  is filled with a Cartila-
ginous Ligament, which drops out by maceration.
  The Sphenoid Sinus, in the body  of the  Bone, at the
under and fore-part ofthe Sella Turcica.
  A complete Partition between the right and left Sphe-
noid Sinuses.
  The Passage from  the upper and fore-part of the
Sphenoid  Sinus, into the upper and back-part of the
Nose.
  The Substance of the Bone, the most  unequal of any
in the B.)dy,  some parts being extremely thin,  while
udiers are thicker than most parts ofthe Cranium. 
54
  The Connection of the Bone to all the other Bones of
the Cranium, by the Sphenoid Suture.
  In the  Foetus, the Temporal VV ings  are  separated  \
from the  Body of the Bone by Maceration, and there
are no Sphenoid Sinuses.
          THE BONES  OF  THE  FACE.

  They are divided into the Upper and Under Jaws.
  The Upper Ja*/ is composed  of seven Pairs of Bones,
and one without a fellow, viz.
  Two Ossa Nasi ; Two Ossa Unguis ;  Two Ossa Mal-
arum ; Two Ossa Maxillaria Superiora ; Two Ossa Pa-
tau ;  Two Ossa  Spungtosa  Inferior a;  Two Triangular  "
Bo:.es, placed  at the  sides of the Sphenoid  Sinuses ;
and tlie Vomer.                                        [
  The Lower Jaw consists of a single Bone.

                  The Os Nasi.
  Its Situation in the  upper and fore-part of the Nose.   I
  Its Oblong Form.                                     j
  The thick, ragged, upper end.
  The thin inferior extremity.
  Its external Convexity.
  Its internal Concavity, where it forms part ofthe  Ca-
vity ofthe  Nose.
  The Spinous Process, which  forms part of the Parti-
tion ofthe  Nose.
  One or more Holes externally, for  transmitting Ves-
sels into the Bone.
  Its Connection to the Frontal Bone by the Transverse
Suture.
  Connection to its fellow by the anterior Nasal Suture.

            Os Unguis, or Lacrymale.
  Its Situation at the  inner and fore-part of the Orbit,
  The Division, exiernally, into  two  depressed Surfaces
and a muddle Rid^e.                                    1
  The posterior Depression, forming part of the Orbit.
  The anterior Depression, lodging part of the Lacrv-
mal  Sac- and  Duct, and  perforated by small  Holes, 
55
through which Fibres pass, to make a firm connection
between the Bone and its investing Membrane.
  The inner Surface, composed of a Furrow and twoirre->
gular convex Surfaces, corresponding with the anterior
Ethmoid Cells.
  The Substance of the bone is the thinnest and mart brit-
tle of any in the body.
 , It is connected to the Frontal Bone, by the Transversa
Suture, and to the Os Planum by the Ethmoid Suture.
  Internally, it is connected with the Ethmoid Cells,

                    Os  Mala;
  Its Situation in the outer part ofthe Cheek.
  The external, convex, smooth Surface.
  The posterior hollow Surface,  for lodging part of the
Temporal Muscle.
  The superior Orbitar Process, forming part of the out.
side ofthe Orbit
  The inferior Orbitar Process, forming part ofthe lower
Edge  ofthe Orbit
  The Maxillary Process, forming the under part ofthe
Prominence ofthe Cheek.
  The Arch between the Orbitar Processes, which forms
near a third part, of the anterior circumference of the
Orbit.
  The Zygomatic Process, forming part of the Arch over
the Temporal Muscle.
  The Internal Orbitar Plate, forming the outer and fore-
part of the Orbit.
  A Passage through the Bone, for the transmission of
small  Vessels or Nerves from the Orbit to the Face.
  The Connection of the superior Orbitar Process and
internal Orbitar Plate,to the frontal and Sphenoid Bones,
by the transverse Suture.
  The Connection of the Zygomatic Process to the Ten»<
poral Bone, by the Zygomatic Suture.

            Os Maxillare St'PERIU9,
  The Situation in the fore-part ofthe Upper Jaw, and
side ofthe Nose.
  Its Size, the largest of the Bones ofthe Upper Jaw,
  The Nasal, or  angular Process, forming part of tf<5
*!•.!« ofthe Nose, and o'.'the inner part of the 0.rtbl;.

     v 
56
  A  Ridge at the under and inner part ofthe Nasal Pro-
cess, for supporting part of the Os Spongiosum iiiferiws.
  The Orbitar Plate, forming a large share of the under .
side  ofthe Orbit.
  The Malar Process, unequal  and ragged, where it con-
tributes, with the Oo Mal.c,to form the Prominence of
the Cheek.
  The Tuberosity, or bulge at the back part of the Bone.
  The Alveoior Arch, of a spongy  ;.nurc, where the
Sockets ofthe Teeth are placed.
  The Palate Process, forming part  of  the Roof of the.
Mouth, -nd ofthe hittJtn ofthe Nose.
  The Nasal Spine, contributing, in a small degree, to
the formation ofthe Septum ofthe  Nose.
  A Depression behind the Malar Process,  where the
under end ofthe Tcrnporal Muscle  plays.
  A Depression at the under and fore-part ofthe Malar
Process, where the Muscles which  raise the upper lip,
and  corner of the mouth, originate.
  A Ca~ity formed by the Palate Plate.
  A Notch forming the under and fore-part of the Nos-
tril.
  The Alveoli, or  Sockets for the teeth, the number of
Sockets conrspunding to the Fangs of the Teeth.
  The Lacrymal  Groove, which, with that of the Os
Unguis,  forms a passage  for the Lacrymal Duck into
the  Nose.
   A Canal in the Orbitar Plate, terminating anteriorly
bjf the Foramen I-fra Orbitarium, ihrou;.»h wh'uh the
 Infra-Orbitar branch of ue second part ftii„ Fifth Pair
 of Nerves, with a branch ofthe internal Maxillary Ar-
 tery, pass to the Face.
   The Foramen Incisivum, or Palatinum Anterius, behind
 the fore-teeth, comn,-.,n to both bones below, but proper
 to each above, and filled with a Process ofthe soft Pa-
 late, and with small Vessels  and Nerves, which run be-
 tween the Membranes ofthe Mouth and Nose.
   In some Subjects, there is a ttis-'tinct Ductus Ir.cisivus
 leading from one or from, each Nostril into the cavity
 oi the M.mth, similar to that which is alwavs found-in
 the large Quad.uivis.         •;                ■ :
   A small  Hole commonly found in the Nasal Prowls,
 aiul sunie minute' I\iucges at the  b.ivk-patt of the Tu- 
57
berosity,  for the  transmission  of Blood-vessels  and
Nerves into the Substance of the Bone, or Antrum Max-
illare.
  Sinus Maxillaris,  Antrum Maxillare, or Highmoria-
num., situated under the Orbitar Plate,  and above  the
large Dentes Molares,  for the same purposes  as the o-
ther Sinuses of th* head.
  The Opening of the Sinus, large in the separate Max-
illary Bone, but, in the connected state, so covered by
the inferior  spongy and Palate-Bones and membranes,
as to leave only a small Aperture between  the Ossa
Spongiosa superius and inierius, into the Cavity of the
 Nose.
   The Connection of the Os Maxillare superius, to the
 Frontal Bone, by the transverse Suture ;—to the Os Un-
 guis, by the  Lacn .'.ial  Suture ;—*■> the Os Nasi, by the
 lateral Nasal Suture ;—to the Cheek bone by the exter-
 nal Orbitar Suture ; to  the Os Planum, by the Ethmoid
 Suture;—to its fellow, by  the  longitudinal Palate Su-
 ture.
   Anteriorly, between  the Mouth and Nose, the Bones
 are joined together by  the Mystachial Suture.
   In the Foetus,  there  are Si.*:  Sockets  for the Teeth.
 There is no  Tuberosity, and the Maxillary Sinus is on-
 ly beginning to form.

                    Os Paeati.
   Its  Situation in the back-part ofthe Palate.
    The Oblong form of the Palate-Plate, which forms'
 the back part ofthe Os:;eous Palate.
  •  Us posterior curved Edge, where it is co.mectcd with
 the Velum Palati  ; also the Point at the inner  extremity
 ofthe curve, for the origin ofthe Muscle ofthe Uvula.
    Its thick, strong subsln.ee, where it joins its  fellow. .
    Its Spinous Process at. the inner  Edge of the Palate-
  Plate, joining the undei hd"x ofthe Vomer.
   •The Pterygoid Process of a Triangular jot m, with Fos-
 tte corresponding to the Pterygoid Plates uf  the Sphe-
  noid Bone.
    The Nasal Plate, forming a portion ofthe side ofthe
  Nose, and Antrum Maxillare.
    A Ridge on the inside of this Plate,  upon  which the
  back-part of the inferior ,sjongy Bone rests. 
58
   The Orbitar Processes at the upper and back-part of
 ofthe Nasal  Plate, contributing a little in the formation
 ofthe Orbit, and of the Ethmoid and Sphenoid Sinuses.
   A Notch between the Orbitar Processes, forming part
 of the Foramen Palatinum posterius, for the passage of
 the lateral Nasal Vessels and Nerve.
   Foramen Palatinum posterius, at the outer end ofthe
 Palate-Plate of this  Bone, but common to  it and the
 Maxillary Bone,  for the transmission ofthe Palatine
 Vessels anel Nerves.
   A small Hole frequently observed behind the former,
 and communicating with it, for the passage of a branch
 ofthe Palatine Nerve.
   Foramen Spheno-Maxillare, Lacerum Inferius, or Infe-
 rior Orbitar Fissure, at the under  and outer part ofthe
 Orbit, and common to the Cuneiform, Maxillare, Malar,
 and Palace Bones, for lodging fat, and transmitting small
 twigs of Vessels and Nerves into  the Orbit.
   The Connexion ofthe Os Palati to the Palate-Plate of
 the Maxillary Bone, by the transverse of the Palate Su-
 tnre ;—to the  Maxillary Bone, at the side of the Nose
 and bottom of the Orbit, by the  Palato-Maxillary Su-
 ture ;—to the Pterygoid Process of the Sphenoid Bone,
 by the Sphenoid Suture;—to the  Os Planum and Eth-
 moid Cells, by the Ethmoid Suture;—to its fellow, by
 the longitudinal Palate Suture.

    OS SPONGIOSUM, Or TuRBINATUM InFERIUS.
  Its Situation in the under part ofthe side of the Nose-
  Its  Triangular form and spongy  appearance.
  Its Convexity towards the Septum Nasi, and Concavity
 outwards.
  The two processes at the  upper part of  the  Bone, the
 anterior forming part ofthe Lacrymal Groove, and the
posterior part ofthe Wall ofthe Maxillary  Sinus.
  This bone  is connected to the Os Maxillare, Os Palati,
 and Os Unguis, by a distinct Suture in a young subject,
but in an old person,  it grows firmly to these Bone by
 an union of substance-                            "

    Sphenoidal Cornu, or Os Triangular*.
  The Situation ofthe triangular Bone between the bo-
 dy ofthe Sphenoid Bone and  root of its internal Ptery- 
                        59
goid Process, covering the under part ofthe Sphenoid
Sinus
  The Connection to the back part of the Ethmoid Bone.
—In an old person this Bone grows so firmly to the Sphe-
noid Bone, as to be considered by some authors as one
of its Processes.
                     Vomer.
  Its Situation in the under part of the Septum Nasi,
where it separates the Nostrils from each other.
  It is  frequently bent to one side, in which case the
one Nostril is rendered larger than the other.
  Its Form, compared to that of the Plough-share.
  The Superior and Posterior part, thick and strong, with
a Furrow to receive the Processus Azygos of the Sphe-
noid Bone.
  The Superior Part, with a Furrow to receive the Na-
sal-Plate of the Ethmoid Bone and Cartilage ofthe Nose.
  The Inferior Edge connected with the spinous Proces-
ses ofthe Palate and Maxillary  Bone's.
  The Posterior Edge, unconnected with any other Bone,
and turned  to the Cavity ofthe Fauces.
            MAXILLA INFERIOR,

  THE  Figure of the Maxilla Inferior, or Lower Jaw,
compared to that of the Greek v.
  Its Division into Chin, Sides, and Processes.
  The Chin, extending between the Mental Foramina.
  The Side reaching from the Mental Foramen to the
back-part of the Bone.
  A transverse Ridge on the fore-part ofthe Chin, with
depressions on each side,  for the origin ofthe Muscles
ofthe Under Lip.
  Small Prominences and  Depressions on the under and
back-part of the Chin, for the attachment of the Frae-
num Lingua, and several Muscles which belong to the
Throat.
  The Base, or lowest Part, forming under boundary of
the Face.
  The Angle of the Jaw at the back-part of the Base. 
  Impressions made by the Mass,eter Muscle, upon th<»
Plate which arises from the  angle ofthe Jaw.
  The Condyloid or Articular Process, with  an oblong
smooth cartilaginous Surface, placed upon a Cervix at
the upper and back-part ofthe Bone.
  The Coronoid Process, situated a little before the Con-
dyloid, for the insertion ofthe Temporal Muscle.
  The Situation of the Coronoid Process behind the Zy-
goma.
  A Semilunar Notch between the Processes..
  The Alveolar Process,  at the upper ccic ofthe  Bone,
and the Alveoli similar to those ofthe Ujver Jaw.
  The Sockets worn down by old age, in consequence
of which the Jaw  becomes narrower  and more promi-
nent.
  The posterior Maxillary Foramen at the root of the
Condyloid and Coronoid Processes, upon the  inner side
ofthe Jaw, for the passage ofthe third, or inferior Max-
illary Branch ofthe Fifth Pair of Nerves, with corres-
ponding Blood-vessels.
  A small pointed Process at tbeinner edge of  this  Hole,
where a Ligament goes off to be fixed to the  Temporal
Bone.
  Above the Hole, the Bone is marked by the passage
of the Nerve and vessels, and below it, there is common-
ly a small Furrow  pointing out the course of a Nerve
which  goes to  a Muscle and Gland under the Tongue.
  Betweeti the posterior Maxillary Foramen  and the
angle, the Bone is  marked by the insertion ofthe Inter-
nal  Pterygoid  Muscle.
' The Anterior Maxillary Foramen, or Mental Hole,  at
the side ofthe Chin, where the remains ofthe Inferior
Maxillary Nerve and Vessels come out.
  Beetwen the Posterior and Anterior Foramina, the
Inferior Maxillary Canal runs in the  substance of the
Bone, a little below the roots ofthe Teeth, and has ma-
ny preforations, for the  passage of small branches  of
Vessels and Nerves which supply the Jaw and Teeth.
  The Surface ofthe Jaw is remarkably hard, and with-
in it has numerous Cells,  which surround the  Maxillary
Canals, and communicate with each other at the forc-
partof the Bone.
  The Articulation ofthe Jaw by its Condyloid Proces- 
                        61
ses, with the Glenoid Cavity of the Temporal Bone, and
also with the Tubercle at the root of its Zygomatic Pro-
cess.
 _ An intermediate moveable Cartilage, placed in the Ar-
ticulation of the Lower Jaw, allowing the Condvle to
remain in the Glenoid Cavity, in the gentler motions of
the Jaw, but admitting  it to advance upon the Tuber-
cle, or root  ofthe Zygoma, when the mouth is widely
opened.
  In a Foetus, the Lower Jaw is  composed of two pie-
ces joined together  in the middle of the Chin, by the
intervention  of a Cartilage, which  gradually ossifies,
and leaves no mark of division—The Cavities for the
Teeth are the same as in the Upper  Jaw.
                  THE TEETH.

  THE Situation ofthe Teeth in the Alveoli ofthe Jaws.
  The Number ofthe Teeth, Sixteen in each Jaw.
  The Base, or Body of each Tooth, which appears with-
out the Sockets.
  The Roots or Fangs, placed in the Sockets, and of a
Conical form.
  The Neck or Collar ofthe Teeth.
  The Sockets are lined with a  Vascular Membrane,
which serves as a Periostium to the Teeth.
  The Cortex or Enamel, which covers the base of each
Tooth, and becomes gradually thinner towards the Cer-
vix.
  The Fibres of the Enamel are placed perpendicular
to the  Osseous Substance, to diminish the effects of
Friction.
  The Fibres of the Osseous  Part of the Teeth form
Lamellse,  which run  in the direction of the surface of
the Teeth.
  A Foramen in the point of the root of each Tooth, and
a passage leading from it  into a common Cavity in the
Base ofthe Tooth, for  lodging the Vascular anel Ner-
vous Pulp of the Teeth.
  The Division ofthe Teeth into  Three Classes, viz. 
62
           —On each side of each Jaw,—
  Two Incisores, or cutting Teeth; One Caninus, Cus-
pidatus, or Dog's Tooth ; Two Bicuspides, or small An-
terior Molares, or Grinding Teeth ; a.id Three large
Posterior Mojares, or principal Grinders.
  The Incisores, having their Bases formed into Wedg-
es, which are sloped out behind.
  The Caninus, having its Base'in form of a Wedge poin-
ted in the -middle
  The small Molares, each with double points, which,
in the Upper Jaw, are nearly upon a level,  but, in the
Under Jaw, highest on the outside ofthe Teeth.
  The Incisores, Caninus, and small Molares, with ji'n-
gle roots, excepting the small Molaris ofthe Upper Jos,
which has frequently  two roots-
  Ofthe three posterior, or lower Molares of the Un-
der yaw ; the first has Jive points, and each ofthe other
two has fiur points.
  Each of these three Teeth, has two, three, or some-
times/bar roots.
  In the  Upper  yaw, the first large Molaris has  only
four points, and each ofthe  other two only three points.
  In each of these three Teeth, tin re is generally one
root more in those cf  the Upper, than in the correspon-
ding Teeth ofthe Under yaw
  The last, or backmost Molaris, called Sapiens,  from
its appearing much later than  the rest, is smaller and
has  generally fewer roots.
  The Teeth are  connected  to the Sockets  by Gompho-
ses,  (like a nail fixed in aboard) and by a firm adhesion
to the Gums.
  In the Foetus, the  outer Shell only of five deciduous
Teeth, anel of one permanent Tcoth,  in each side  of
each Jaw, is found.
  These Teeth are situated in Capsuls ,within the Jaw,
and  underits surface. Atthisperiod there are no  roots
formed.
  Between the inner side of the deciduous Teeth and
the  Alveoli, in the Fecttis, little Capsuls are placed, and
connected by Processes with the Gums, in which, the
Incisores ai.-l Cauina are afterwards l\>, met! ; but atthis
time there is no appearance ofthe rudi.-.i-.mts of anv of
tLe Tceili.   See Dr.  Bl-ikes Thetis, 17'Jo. 
63>
                  OS HYOIDES.
  THE Situation of the Os Hyoides, at the root ofthe
Tongue and top ofthe Larynx, where it  serves as aLe-
ver, allowing several Muscles, moving  these  parts, to
be fixed to it.                      or.
  The Shape, compared to that ofthe Greek letter v.
  I he Body of the bone, convex before, and concave be-
hind.
  Several impressions are seen on its Body, occasioned
bj the numerous Muscles fixed to it.
  The Cornua, extending backwards and upwards from
each side ofthe Body.
  The Appendices, placed at the upper part of the Ar-
ticulation between the Body and Cornua.
  From each Appendix a Ligament sent up to the Sty-
loid Process ofthe Temporal Bone.
  The Os Hyoides is not immediately connected to a-
ny other Bone, but is kept in its place by numerous Mus-
cles and Ligamenis.to be afterwards mentioned
  At birth, the greater part of the Bone  is in a Cartila-
ginous state, and the Appendices continue so for many
years  after the other parts  are completely ossified.
                THE TRUNK.

  THE Trunk, composed of the Spine, Pelvis, and Tho-
  x.
  The Spine, reaching from the Condyles of the Occi-
pital Bone, to the lower end of the Os Coccygis.
  The Spine appearing straight, when viewed anterior-
ly or posteriorly.
  The several Curvatures of the Spine, when viewed in
a lateral tlirection.
  The Spine, composed of a long tipper, and a short un-
der Pyramid, joined together by.their Bases.
  The upper  Pyramid, composed  of true Vertebrx, or
Bones winch turn upon each other. *•-
  The under  I'waniid,  formed of false  Vertebrx,  or
Bones v\ hich at an curly period of life, resemble the
rax. 
64
true Vertebrs.but afterwards grow together, so as no*
to contribute to the motions ofthe Trunk of the Bod>.
            THE  TRUE VERTEBRA,
            Are Twenty-four in Number.
   Each of the true Vertebrje composed of a Body and

  The Body of a true Vertebra of a spongy nature, with
upper and under Surfaces placed horizontally.
  The anterior convexity of the Body,  and posterior
concavitv-                             .      , .  .   .
  Numerous small Holes on the anterior  and lateral;
parts of the body, for the  passage of Blood-vessels into
the Substance ofthe Bone, or for the attachment of Li-
gamentous Fibres.
  A Ring of Bone, at the  upper and under edges of the
Body, of a'firmer texture than the rest of its Substance,,
and thereby adding to the general strength of the Bone.
  The Ring of Bone formin. a superficial Cavity, which
receives the Intervertebral Cartilage.
  The Intervertebral Cartilages, or Cartilago-ligamentous
Substances, placed between the Bodies of the Vertebrae,
for fixing them together, and allowing the  Spine to be
moved in all directions.
  The Intervertebral Substances are composed of Con-
centric Lamellx, with their edges fixed to the bodies of
the Vertebrae.
  The Lamellae of these substances  are formed of Ob-
li.itte Fibres, which decussate each other, and are very
compressible.
  The Centre of these substances changes from Lamel-
lx, and puts  on  the appearance of  a Mucus  or  Pulp,
which has little compressibility, and serves asajbi'vct
upon which the other parts move.
  The Intervertebral Subtances,  like the Vertebrae them-
selves, larger and thicker as they tlescend, to give great-
er security to the  parts they support.
   An Arch sent  out from the  back-part of the Body,
which, together with the Body,  form3 a large  Hole for
the  passage of the Spinal Marrow. 
                         65
  A Notch at the upper and under edge of each side of
the Arch, for the passage of the Spinal Nerves.
  The two Superior Oblique, or Articulating Processes,
covered with Cartilage, placed upon  the upper part of
the sides ofthe Arcb.
  The f.;o Inferior  Oblique, or Articulating Processes,
also covered with Cartilage, and placed upon  the un-
der part of the sides of the Arch.
  The two Superior Oblique Processes  of one Vertebra,
articulated with the two Inferior Oblique of the Verte-
bra immediately above it.
  The two Transverse Processes projecting from the sides
ofthe Arch, and between the Oblique Processes.
  The Spinous Process, sent out from the  back part of
the Arch, which being sharp and pointed,  gives name
to the whole chain of Bones.
  The Edges ofthe Processes, as well as of the Body,
arc rough, v, here Ligaments come  off which fix them
to each other.
  The Vertebra; divided into seven Cervical, Twelve Dor-
sal, ar.el fije Lumbar.
  Tile Cervical Vertebrx, or  Vertebroe  of the Neck, hav-
ing their  Botlies smaller,  more flattened, before and be-
hind, anel  more hollowed above and below, than  those of
the other Vertebrae.
  The Articulating  Processes, more  Oblique than  any
others.
  The Transverse Processes, perforated for the  passage
of the Vertebral Blood-vessels,  and hollowed above for
the transmission ofthe Spinal Nerves.
  The Spinal Processes, strait out  from the bodies of
the Vertebrae, shorter than any other, and forked for the
attachment of the Muscles.
   The Cervical Vertebra: admit of free motion, in con-
sequence of  the thickness of their Cartilages,  and the
r.ature of their, Processes.
   The first Vertebra, called Atlas from its supporting
the Globe ofthe Head, having only  a  small  Arch in-
stead of a Body.
   '1 he Upper and Under Surfaces ofthe Arch, marked
by  the Ligaments which  fix it to  the Head and'second
Vei;; bra.
   '1 he Luc!»-i);;rt ofthe  Arch, lull-su. and covered by a 
6G
 smooth Cartilage, where it  turns  upon the Processus
 Dentatus.
   The inner parts ofthe sides ofthe Vertebra, between
 the Superior and Inferior Oblique Processes,  marked
 by the Lateral Ligaments which go to the Processus
 Dentatus, and by the Transverse Ligament which pas-
 ses behind that Process.
   An Arch upon the back part of the Atlas, instead of
 a Spinous Process,  marked by Muscles and Ligaments.
   The Superior Oblique Processes,  oval and hollow,  for
 receiving the  Contlyles ofthe Occipital Bone.
   A Fossa under the outer and back-part  of each Ob-
 lique Process, for the  circular passage of the Verte-
 bral Arteries  into the Head, and Tenth pair of  Nerves
 out of it.
   The Transverse Processes,  longer  than any other Cer-
 vical Vertebra, for the origin of several Muscles.
   Upon the Atlas the head has its flexion and extension,
 but little other motion.
   The second Vertebra, called Dentata, from the Tooth-
 like Process on the upper part of its Body.
   The Body of this Vertebra, larger than  the rest, and
 of a Conical figure.
   The fore-part of the Processus Dentatus, covered witk
 Cartilage where it turns upon  the Atlas.
   The Sides of this Process, marked by the insertion of
 the Lateral Ligaments, and its  Point  by  the insertion
 ofthe Perpendicular Ligament which is fixed to the
 Edge ofthe Foramen Magnum of the Occipital Bone.;
   The Superior  Oblique Processes placed  horizontally,
 and elevated in the  middle, to be received into the hol-
 low Inferior Oblique Processes of the Atlas, where the
 Head has its principal rotary motion.
  The Spinous Process, thick and strong, to give origin
 to the Muscles which assist  in the  extension and rela-
 tion ofthe  Head, and turned  down to  allow these mo-
 tions to be readily performed.
  The seventh Cervical Vertebra,  approaching to  the
 form ofthe Dorsal  Vertebra:.   The Spinal and Trans-
 verse Processes have no bifurcation.
  The Dorsal Vertebrx, or Vertebrx of the  Back, having
 their bodies larger, sharper  before, flatter at the sides,
 and more hollow bjhind, thr.n  those  of  the Cervical
Vertebrx.              , 
  A fit, lined with Cartilage at each side of their up-
per anel untler Edges, near the 'Iransverse Processes,
for the articulation ofthe Heads ofthe Ribs.
  The Intervcrteoral Cartilages, th'.-i,  to  admit of little
motion only, and thinnest anteriorly, to enlarge the Cur-
vature of the  Spine, and increase the  Cavity of the
Thorax.
  The Oblique Processes, having nearly a perpendicular
direction, tho upper cues  slanting forwards,  and Ue
under ones backwards.                            • .
  The  Trarxverse  Processes,  long,  turned  ob,'l"e>y
backward-,, enlarped at th-ir outer extremi*- '"here
they are faced with  Cartilage, to  be artic'':itc'' wn?
the'Tubercles of the Ribs.              ,
  The Spinous Processes, long, thick at;.he 10° «'  T
slender near the extremities,  and rf]^'  ob-'quely
downwards over each other,  by wty* tl,e bI5,nal Mai'"
row in this part is well protected   .                 „
  _.         L- 1    ~i   ,.\, „f t**  Spinous Processes of
  The upper tdsic ot .acn o\yr. . '    . ...
.1    xt  \  i    r     1 •„t../Ri'tee, which, in certain
these Vertebrae, formed into/  ,  f     ^       •  Vi
  \-     r.i  c, „    o  ,. ^ived  by a  Groove  in the
motions of the Spine, is  ie        J
Vertebra immediately ak.ve ' '      ...  ..  -fi,„„„ „i
  „„   ,   .     r   ■.  , Structure, with the others al-
  The last peculiarity. '    .   V,    i -.r „. i___f-  m
    ,      .'   i     vent the  Dorsal \ erte.bra t.om
ready mentioned,  pr'*■'"•
having-much mot i/-1-       ,     ,    ,  ,  «.. e  ..
  ti„. *...> n ,  •'  Vertebra has the whole Pit for the
   i lie nrst x/'-'v'  ., ,.     ,  •  -..
u„„a „<•»!.«. «^t Rib formed  in it.
  lkS^«' ^"'^ receives the whole Head
oftheW*i,,< uncl has  n° Carlils*'",ous Su,,f*ce  on
its Tra-K^:''st-" Process.                   .
■  Tilr Lumbar Vertebrx, or those ofthe Loins, having
thex bodies larger and broader than those ot the other
two classes.                       , . .     _       ,
  The Intervertebral Cartilages, the thickest of any, and
most so at their  fore-part, by which the Spine is ren-
dered convex there, for the support of  the Abdominal
Bowels.                       .  ,,  ,         .  ,    ,
  The Oblique Processes, remarkably deep, and placed
upright, the Superior Oblique Process ot one Vertebra
facing inwards, and receiving the Inferior Oblique Pro-
cess of the Vertebra  below, it, v.lnch is turned in the
opposite direction.
•  The Transverse Processes,  long,  slender, and almost 
                        68
erect, to give  origin to large Muscles, and admit of
free motion.
  The Spinous  Processes, short, large, and strong, and
placed horizontally, with narrow Edges above and be-
low, and broad flat Sides, giving origin to Muscles of
great strength.
  The Spinal Canal, larger  than  in  the Back,  for the
passage ofthe  Cords ofthe Spinal Marrow which form
th«- Oauda Equina
  ^consequence ofthe thickness ofthe intervertebral
Car  UreS) and the situation of the Processes of the
Lumbar Vertebrae, the motion of this part ofthe Spine
is extensn^ though not so much so as in the Neck.
            THE  ia^lsE VERTEBRAE.
  The False Verte.RjE composed of the Os Sacrum
and Os Coccygis.
                  The OsSacrum>
  Supposed to be named rath v from its slze than from
its having been ottered in sacnue
  The triangular Form of the Bi,   with its pointed
under extremity
  The fat concave anterior Surface, W enlareine the
cavity ofthe Pelvis.                        b  6
  The under and fote-part, forming a tut.„ called by
some. Lesser Angle of this Bone.
  The convex irregular Surface behind, whetv  strong
Muscles arise.
  Four transverse prominent Lines seen anteriorly, port-
ing out the situation of the Cartilages  which originally
di« ided the Bone into five pieces.
  The Spinal Canal,  of a triangular form, becoming
gradually smaller  in its  descent ; corresponding with
the C:>  c!a Equina which goes through it.
  The Arch  at the sides  and back-part of the. Spinal
Canal, much thicker  and stronger than in the True
Vertebrx.
  Only two Oblique Processes belonging to this  Bone,
and these facing backwards, to correspond  with the
two inferior of the  last Lumbar  Vertebra. 
OH
  A l<";t?e  6iiung  Process on  each side of the Bone,
formed by all the Original transverse  Processes grown
together.
  The upper lateral Parts of the Bone, which corres-
pond with the three superior transverse  Processes, tli-
vided into two irregular Cavities on each side, by a per-
pendicular Ridge.   The anterior of the  two Cavities is
lined with Cartilage, which glues this Bone to the Os
Ilium, and does not allow any motion.   The posterior
Cavity is rough and irregular, and in the recent  Subject
is full of  Ligamentous  Fibres  and Cellular Substance,
which are included in the general  Capsular Ligament,
and also assist in fixing the two Bones to each e>ther.
  The  Spinous Processes ; the  three  uppermost com-
monly distinct, but remarkably short .- There is a great
variety, however,  in the  appearances of the  Spinous
Processes in different Bones.
   Four Pairs of large Holes on the anterior Surface of
the Bone, at  the  end  of the  lines alreadv described,
and Grooves running out from the  Holes, for the  pas-
sage ofthe Sacral Nerves.
   Four  Pair* of Holes on the posterior Surface, not much
smaller than those seen  anteriorly ;  but so filled with
Cellular Substance,  and covered  with  Membranes in
the Recent Body,  as to admit small Nerves only to pass
out to the Muscles on the back-part ofthe Pelvis.
   A Notch at the  under end of each side of the Bone,
or a Hole common to it  and the Os  Coccygis, for the
 passage ofthe last Spinal Nerve.
   The  Substance ofthe Os Sacrum, like that of the oth-
 er Vertebra, is very spongy, and is covered only  by a
 thin external Plate, which,  however,  is rendered con-
 siderably stronger by a Ligamentous Membrane which
 adheres to it.
   The  Connection  of this Bone above to the last Lumbar
 Vertebra, in the way the other Vertebra are connected
 to each other, and  the same motions  allowed as to
 these Vertebra.  The projection formed between these
 two Bones anteriorly, obtains the name of Promontory,
  or Greater Angles of the Os Sacrum.
    In the Foetus, the Os  Sacrum is composed of five dis-
 tinct Vertebrae which have  Intervertebral Cartilages
 similar to those of the True Vertebra. 
  Atthis time, eachof the Vertetir«.0f the Os Sacrum,
as well as ofthe True Vertebrae, consists of a Body and.
two lateral  parts,  which are joined together by Carti.
lages.
                The Os  Coccygis.
  The Os Coccygis, or Rump-Bone, compared in shape
to the Beak of a Cuckoo.
  The Situation of this Bone at the end of the Os Sa-
crum.
  The Bone, broad and flat above, and tapering below.
  The Bone, convex behind,  and  forming a curve for-
wards, which supports the  end ofthe  Rectum.
  The four pieces  of which it is composed in  Young
Subjects.
  This Bone is considered by  some authors as being-
formed  of  three  pieces ; and then the Os Sacrutn is
said to have six.
  The^m or uppermost piece the largest, with  Shoul-
ders reaching farther than the  end  of the Os Sacrum,
which is considereel  by  some  as  a proper distinction
between the Os Coccygis and Os Sacrum.
  From tue back-part of the Shoulders, two Cornua fre-
quently ascend to  join  the  forked Spinous Process at
the end ofthe Os Sacrum, for the passage ofthe last'
pair of Spinal Nerves, which goes through a hole com-
mon to this Bone and the Os Sacrum on each side.
   The three lower Bones of the Os Coccygis becoming
gradually smaller, the fourth terminating  in a rough
point.
  A Cartilage is interposed between  the  different pie-
ces of this  Bone in Young Subjects,  joining them to-
gether,  as in the case ofthe  Vertebra, allowing motion
upon each otln r forwards  and backwards,  but chiefly
between the first and second pieces, and a greater de-
gre&of motion there  in the Female than in the  vlale.
  In advanced life, but earlier in Men than  in Women,
the pieces'grow together so  as to admit of no motion ;
but this ciici> instance is m;;ch longer of happening be-
tween toe  first aijd  second, than  between  the  other
pieces.
  The Substance, like that ofthe Os 6acrum, is spongy,
hut it d.jfierb from U, in having no passage for Spinal
Marrow, nor Holes for Spinal Nerves. 
                        71
  The Connection of this  Bone,  in Young Subjects, to
the Os Sacrum, by Cartilage.—In  Old People  by an
union of Substance.
  The Surf-ce ofthe Bone is covered by a strong Lig-
ament, which adds to its strength : Its sides give rise
to iiumerous Muscular Fib.es, which, while they ori-
ginate from it, serve to protect  it.
   In the Fcetus,  the  Os Coccygis is almost entirely
composed of Cartilage.
                  THE PELVIS.

   The Pelvis, or Bones compared to a Bason, situated
 at the lower part of the Trunk,  and fbrmed by the Os
 Sacrum, Os Coccygis, and two Ossa Innominata.

              OS INNOMINATUM.

   The Situation  ofthe Os Innominatum, or nameless
 Bone, in the fore-part and side of the Pelvis, and under
 the lateral parts ofthe Abdomen.
   The Division ofthe Bone, in Children, into Os Ilium,
 Os Ischium, and Os Pubis.
   In the Adult,  the  three Bones are ossified together,
 but retain their  original names.
                  The Os Ilium.
   The Os Ilium, or  Haunch-Bone,  forming the upper
. part ofthe Os Innominatum, and spreading out to assist
 in supporting the contents ofthe Abdomen.
   The Dorsum, or outer  Convex Surface  of the Bone,
 raised in  some  parts  and depressed in others, where
 the Glutei Muscles have their origin.
   The Spine, or upper semi-circular edge ofthe Bone,
 for the attachment of the oblique  and transverse Ab-
 dominal Muscles.
   The anterior superior Spinous Process, or anterior ex-
 tremity ofthe Spine, for the attachment  of the Sarto-
 nons Muscle  anel Poupart's Ligament.
   T'le anterior  inferior Spinous  Process,  a little below
 the former, for the attachment of the Rectus Fenunii
 Muscle. 
72
   The two posterior Spinous Processes at the back-part
 of the Spine, less considerable than the two anterior;
 partly for the origin of Muscles, but chiefly for the at-
 tachment of Ligaments which belong to the Joint be-
 tween this Bone and the Os Sacrum.
   The Niche of the  Os Ilium under the posterior infe-
 rior Spinous Process, for the passage of the Pyriform
 Muscle, the Sciatic Nerve, and Blood-vessels.
   The Venter, or inner concave Surface ofthe Bone, for
 the attachment of the internal Iliac  Muscle, and the
 support of a portion ofthe Intestinum Ilium and Colon.  I
   A  Passage in the Venter for the Medullary Vessels
 of the Bone.
   A Depression at the inside of  the  anterior inferior  j
 Spinous Process, where the Flexor  Muscles  of the
 Thigh,  and the anterior Crural  Vessels and Nerves  i
 pass.                                                |
   The Linea Innominata at the under part of the Ven-  J
 ter of the Bone, forming the lateral part of the  Brim  ,
 ofthe Pelvis, and the line of division between the Pel-  j
 vis and Abdomen.                                   J
   The inner and back-part of the Bone  is very irregu- 1
 lar, for the origin of some ofthe large  Muscles of the |
 Back, for the attachment of Ligaments  which go to the
 Os Sacrum, and for the firm connection which subsists  >
 between this Bone and the Os Sacrum.
   The under, fore, and outer part of the Bone, forming
 the upper and  back-part of the Acetabulum.

           The Os Ischium, or  Hip-Bone.

   The Situation of the Os  Ischium in the lowest part
 ofthe Pelvis; its figure irregular,  its size next to that
 ofthe Os Ilium.
   The upper thick part of the Bone, forming the under
 part of the Acetabulum.
   The Spinous Process sent back from the upper part of
the Bone, for the attachment of Muscles and the  supe-
 rior Sacro-Sciatic Ligament.
   The Cervix placed  under tlie Spinous  Process, and  :
 covered with Cartilage where the tendon of the Obtu-  ,
rator Interims,  Muscle plays.
   The Tubero;itj or Tuber  Ischii, forming the part on
 which the Bo»ly rests in sji-.ii-.g, and {living attachment  ) 
                        73
to the inferior Sacro-Sciatic Ligament, and the greater
part of the Flexor Muscles ofthe Leg.
  The Crua which goes obliquely upwards and forwards,
and gives attachment to the Cms Penis and its Erector,
and to part ofthe Adductor Muscles of the Thigh.
           The Os Pubis or Sahre-Bone.
  -The Situation ofthe Bone attiie upper and fore-part
ofthe Pelvis.
  Its size, the least ofthe three parts of the Os Inno-
minatum.
  The thick and strongest  part of the Bone, forming the
upper and Fore-part ofthe Acetabulum.
  The smaller and hollow part of the Bone, rendered
smooth  by  the passage of the Flexor Muscles of the
Thigh, with the anterior  Crural Vessels and Nerves.
  The rough  Crest, or Angle of the upper and fore-part
ofthe OsPubis, where the Rectus and Pyramidalis Mus-
cles, and the  inner end of Poupart's Ligament, are at-
tached.
  A Ridge  extendeel from the Crest along the upper in-
ner edge ofthe Bone,  to form, with a similar Ridge of
the Os Ilium, the Brim ofthe Pelvis.
  Another Ridge below  the former, extending down-
wards and  out\s ards towards the Acetabulum.
  A Cavity below these Ridges, for the origin ofthe
 Pectineus Muscle.
  A Nitch  at the upper and inner part of the great Fo-
 ramen,  formed into a  Hole in the Subject, for the pas-
 sage ofthe Obturator Vessels and  Nerves.
  The inner end ofthe Bone, rough and unequal, but co-
 vered with a  Ligamentous Cartilage, with fresh Bones,
joins the two Ossa Pubis so firmly  together, as to pre-
 vent them from moving upon each other.
  The Crus ofthe Bone which goes downwards to join
 tlie Cms of the Os Ischjum, and form, along with that
 Cruss the  Arch ofthe Pubis.
  The Foramen Thyroidcum, or Shu ld-like-Hole, form-
 ed  In the  Os Pubis and Os Ischium, and in the Sub-
 ject," filled by a Membranous Ligament, excepting at
 tiu- Nitch abov e mentioned, which gives origin to a large
 share ofthe  Obturator Muscles.
  The Acetabulum  or Cavity (compared to a vinegar-
 measure used by the Antients) placed further outth.v.
      vol. 
                          74.
  the Foramen Thyroideum, and formed by the three pie.
  ces which compose the Os Innominatum, in such a man-
  ncr that the Os Ilium forms near two-fifths  the Os Ischi-
  urn more than two-fifths, and the Os Pubis one-fifth.
    The Brim ofthe Acetabulum is very deep, especial-
  ly behind, and made still deeper in the Subject by be-
(  ing tipped with a Cartilaginous Ligament.
    Rouiid the Base of the Brim, the Bone rough, where
  the Ci-.psular Ligament of the joint is fixed.
    A Breach in the inner and fore-part of the Acetabu-
  luui,  which, in the  Subject,  has a strong Ligament
  stretched from one end  to the other, but leaving a Hole
  behind for containing part of the Substance called Gland
  ofthe yoint.
    The Cavity ofthe Acetabulum lined with Cartilage,
  excepting at its under, inner, and fore-part, where there
  is a rough Surface for containing the Fatty Substance
  within the Joint.
    The Brim ofthe Pelvis, or its Upper Opening.
    Tlie Inferior Opening is large in  liie skeleton, hut, in
  the Subject, filled up, in a gi-eai measure, by Ligaments
  and Muscles which support and protect the contained
  parts, and leave  only the passage  from the Bladder of
  Urine and Rectum in  the Male, and together with these,
  the passage from the Uterus in the female.
    The Ossa Innominata, joined behind to the Os Sacrum
  by a thin Cfrti!,-;(;e and by strong Ligament,  so as to have
  no motion;  the joint  obtaining the name  of posterior
  Sj mpfiy-tis.
   Before, these Bones connected to each other by a Lisr-
  ameiitous Cartilage and Ligaments, which also "prevent
 motion here, and has the name of Symphysis, or Ante-
 rior Symphysis ofthe Pubis.
   In the  Fatus,  the  Spine of the  Os Ilium, and that
 part of the Bone which belongs to the Acetabulum, are
 Cartilaginous.—The Spinous Process, the  Tuberosity,
 and Crus of  the O., Ischium ;—the Cms ofthe  Os I'u-
 t is, and th.-t portion of it which forms the Acetabulum,
 arc also, at this period,  in a Cartilaginous  state.
          THE THORAX, OR CHEST,
  The Thorax, formed by the Sternum before, ofthe
Rio* on ci:.-h !,«■  aiW oi'the Dorsal Vcittbr* behind. 
                        75
  The general /Vj.-of the Thorax approaching that
of a Cone, but left open above  for the passages to the
Lungs and Stomach, and for the great Blood-vessels.
  The Lower Part of the Thorn.', slanting, the fore-part
being considerably shorter than it is behind.
  The Under Margin on  each side, forming a curved
Line, the convex side of which is turned downwards.
  The under end of the Thorax, in the subject filled
by the Diaphragm,  which forms a  Partition between
it ami the Abdomen.

              The Ribs, or Cost.€.
    Considered as Guards to the Heart and Lungs.
  The whole ofthe Ribs slanting downwards with res-
pect to Spine.
  Th\"r Number, commonly twelve on ear.') si-.le, though
som  times thirteen,  and at other times only eleven,
have been found.—In such eases the Vertebrx are one
m.i e  jr [t-.is than the common  number.
  The Ribs  convex externally,  by which theu  strength
is inevi- tfed-
  Tli,. Ribs concave and smooth  internally, wit'  their
Rat sides turned tow:-i ip. the Lungs to protect tb.-'in.
  The Head c" each i<ib formed into a Ridge vv.d,  two
holloa Surf ices covered with Carti'age, to be  »rt;c.ula-
tcd .vith the- bodies of two Vertebrae and their ir.te.r-
med;ate Ca'-tiiag.-.
  Ri.-untf the Head, the Bone is spongy, for the attach-
ment ofthe Cnjisulai Ligament of t'ne Joint.
  The Tubercle of the Rib,  at  a little distance from its
Heed, with  a  tiat Surface and irregular  lidge, to be
articulated to the transverse Process ofthe undermost
of the >v. o Vertebr.e, to which the Head ofthe Rib is
joined.
  The Cer jix ofthe Rib, bet.een its Heael and Tuber-
cle, ot a reiinder form than the Bone, is farther out.
  Another smalt Tuyirclc s^en in most of the R;Ls, at
tin outer side <>f the- former one, for the attachment of
Ligaments   .hici. fix the Ribs tn each'other and to  the
transverse Pi ; es->i s, a.id for ,tie iiiseitica of the outer
Slips of the  Lcngibsiinus lj; rsi .vluscl■.-,
  Betoud < he Tubercle:,, the Rib rendered fiat by the
Sacro-Lumbahs Muscle. 
7b
   The Angle of the Ribs to which  the  Sacro-Lumba '.;<
 Muscle  is fixed, where the Bones  are about to bend, to
 form the lateral part ofthe Thorax.
   The Rib^af where  it forms the lateral part of the
 Thorax, and the flat Surface opposed to the Lungs.
   The Upper E Ige of the Rib, round where the inter.
 costal Muscles are fixetl.
   The Under Edge,  sharp where the external intercos-
 tal Muscles are fixed.
   A Fossa at the inside ofthe under Edge, for lodging
 the intercostal Vessels anel  Nerve.
   The Fossa a wanting towards the extremities of the
 Ribs ; for behind, the  Vessels have not reached them ;
 and before, they are too small to impress them.
   An Oval Pit in the anterior extremity ofthe Rib, for
 receiving the Cartilage which runs from it to the Ster-
 num.
   1 be- Cartilage of the Ribs,  placed  between the  Rib
 and Sternum.
•  The Cartilages, like the Ribs, fiat on their outer and
 inner Surfaces, and smooth where  they are opposed to
 the Lungs.
   The Cartilage of each Rib,  forming with the Rib it-
 self, a Curve with the concave  part upwards.
   And with the Sternum, an obtuse Angle above, and an
 acute one bele>w.
   The Ribs articulate behind to the Vertebrae, by a dou-
ble articulation, and before  to the Sternum by the Car-
tilages, or by the  Cartilages to each other,  in such a
manner as to allow  motion  upwards and downwards,
though only a small degree in  any  single  Rib, and that
towards its middle ;  but no motion in any other direc-
tion.

            Peculiarities ofthe Ribs.

  The first Rib the most crooked:—From this doiro-
wards they become gratlually straightcr.
  The  uppermost Ribs approaching nearer to the hori-
zontal s.tuation. As they descend,  their obliquity with
respect to the Spine  increases, and  their anterior ex-
tremities become more distant from each other.
  The  Cartilages ofthe Ribs, like the Ribs themselves,
becoming gradually longer, but, contrary to what hap- 
                        77
bens in the Ribs, they approach nearer to each other
in their descent.
   The length ofthe rib, increasing from the first to the
seventh, and then decreasing to the twelfth Rib.
   The Distance between the  Heads  of the  Ribs  and
their Angles, increasing to the ninth Rib, correspond-
ing with the  breadth  of the  Sacro-Lumbalis Muscle
which covers it.
    The Division ofthe Ribs into  True and False-
   The True Ribs,—the seven uppermost,—having their
Cartilages joined to the Sternum,  and opposed to the
Heart  and Lungs, from which  they are termed  the
True Custodes, or Guards of Life.
   The False, or Bastard Ribs ;—the five inferior, which
do not reach  the Sternum.
   The Cartilages of the False Ribs shorter as  they des-
cend.
   The posterior Extremity of the first Rib, articulated
only with the first  Vertebra.
   A. fiat Surface upon  the  upper part  of the  first Rib,
where the Subclavian Vessels pass over it to the arm.
  There is no Fossa at the edge of the Rib for the In-
tercostal Vessels.
  The Cartilages of the two under True Ribs, and three
upper False Ribs, joined to each other by an union of
Substance.
  The Head of the eleventh Rib ka» no Tubercle for ar-
ticulation behind, being only loosely joined to the trans-
verse  Process.
  The  twelfth Rib, much shorter  than  the rest;—its
Head  is only joined to the twelfth  Vertebra of  the
Back, and it has no Tubercle, nor articulation with  the
transverse Process :  Neither has  it  any Fossa at its
under edge, because the Vessels run below it.
  The anterior Extremities ofthe eleventh and twelfth
Ribs not joined to each other, nor  to  any other Rib,
but lying loose among  the Muscles ;—hence sometimes
lamed Floating Ribs.

        The Sternum, or Breast-Bone.

  The Situation of tlie Sternum in the ibre-part of the
Thorax.
e  2 
78
  Three pieces composing the  Sternum, in a person of
middle age, and these joined togct!r-r by  Cartilage.
  The different pieces  of this  Bone are  frequently
found ossified together in old people.
  The Sternum thick and broad above, and thin and nar-
row below.
  The outer Surface fiat.
  The inner Surface  is slightly hollowed to enlarge  the
Cavity of the Thorax.
  Pits upon the eelge9 of the Sternum, to receive  the
Cartilaginous ends of the seven True Ribs.
  The Pits at a considerable  elistance from  each other
above, but  becoming gratlually nearer as they descend.
  The Cancellx ofthe Sternum, covered only by a thin
external plate ; but this rendered stronger  by a Ten-
dlnous Membrane which covers  it in the recent state.
  The upper Piece ofthe Sternum, of a  somewhat  tri-
angular figure,  compared to that of a heart as painted
on playing-cards, only appearing to be cut across below.
  The upper and back-part hollowed,  to make way for
the Trachea.
  The upper Corners thicker and stronger than the rest
of the Bone, with  a  Cavity in each, for  receiving the
ends ofthe Collar Bones
  Under these Cavities, the Bone becoming thinner,  and
having a Pit upon each side, for  receiving the Carti.
lage ofthe first Rib.
  Part of a Pit in the under Corner of the first piece, for
the Cartilage of the  second Rib.
  The second Piece ofthe  Sternum, of an oblong form,
but a little broader below th.n above, and considerably
longer than the former.
  Complete  Pits upon the edge of this piece, for the
Cartilages  of the  third, fourth, fifth, and  sixth Ribs,
ane! part of the Pits for those ofthe second and seventh.
  Lines extending between the  Pits, pointing out  the
original marks of division of this piece.
  The Connection of the second piece of  the Sternum
to the first by Cartilage, which, in  the earlier  period
of life, allows some yielding,  but  this becomes  graelu-
ally less as the person advances in life.
  The third Piece of the Sternum, cartilaginous  in a
Vlung Subject, and pointed Jika a broad-sword,  hence
.erm.-d  Cartilago 7-:,;. f.-nu'-,. 
79
  In the  Adult, it  is commonly ossified in the middle*
and cartilaginous at the edges.
  The Size of this piece much less than that ofthe o-
ther two.
  Only one half of the Pit, for the  Cartilage of the se-
venth Rib, formed in the side of this piece.
  The Variations of the Cartilago-Ensifbrmis are con-
siderable in different Subjects ; for, instead of the com-
mon form, it is sometimes narrow like the  point of a
small-sword, or turned obliquely  to one  side, or for-
wards, or backwards ; or forked at the point, or per-
forated jn the mieldle.
  These  Variations may happen without any inconveni-
ence ; but where it projects much in any direction dif-
ferent from the  common one, it is attended' with bad
consecpienees.
  The Sternum joined by Cartilage to the seven upper
or l'rue Ribs, and by an interarticular Cartilage to the
anterior ends ofthe clavicles.
  In the  Foetus, the Bone is composed of seven or eight
ricces, but the number of these varies in different Subi
jecU.
  TIIE  SUPERIOR EXTREMITIES.

   THE Superior, Extremities are  composed  of the
Emus ofthe Shoulders, Arms, and Hands.
  The Shoulder consists ofthe Clavicle and Scapula.

          The Clavicle, or Collar-Bone.
  The Situation ofthe Clavicle, between the upper part
ofthe St« mum and top of the Scapula, where it acts
as a beam  supporting the Shoulder, and  bearing  it off
the Trui k ofthe Body.
  The  Sternal, or internal Extremity, triangular and
larger th.iii the l'< <iy, with one of the angles elongated,
where it gives origin to a Ligament exteneled between
the two CI: vicles.
  The Sin fa.-e next to the Sternum irregularly holloved,
to corre,  md with the interarticular Cartilage, which
                       K  3 
80
with  the  Capsular Ligament of this  Joint, allows a,
small degree of motion in all  directions.
  The body of the Bone next the Sternum bent for-
wards, anel that next the Shoulder turned baci, in form
of an Italic/, or like a key used by the ancients ; from
which, or the support it gives the  Shoulder, its name
is derived.
  The upper part  of the Clavicle  next the  Sternum,
rounded, and that next the  Scapula fiat, where, it lies
over the Joint ofthe Humerus.—Over the  Bone in ge-
neral, rough marks are observed for the attachment of
Muscles and Ligaments.
  The under Surface hollow, for lodging a portion of
the Subclavian Muscle.
  The Ex'er.tal or Scapulary Extremity,  tipped with
Cartilage, to be articulated with the Acromion of the
Scapula.
          The Scapula, or Shoulder-Blade.

  The Situation of the Scapula, upon the upper  and
back-part  of the Thorax,  at some distance from  the
Ribs, the interval being filled up by a cushion of Flesh.
  The shape of the Scapula triangular, and one of the
angles placed downwards.
  The Venter, or inner Surface,  or that next the Ribs,
concave and marked with Ridges and Depressions by the
Subscapulars TvTuscle.
  Th : Dorsum, or outer Surface of the Scapula, ren-
dered convex in some parts,  anel concave  in others, by
the action of the Muscles which cover it.
  The body of the  Scapula is remarkably thin, and in an
Old person, transparent.
  The edges of the Bone are think and strong, and are
termed Costx.
  The superior Costa the shortest ofthe three, and pia-
ced nearly opnosi  e to the second rib.
  A semilunar Notch near the fore-part of the supe-
rior Costa, for tin-  passi-.ge of the superior Scapulary
Vessels and Nerv :s.
  The ir.frior or  anterior  Costa, extending obliquely
downua.ds and backwards, between  the third  and
eighth Ribs.
  The posterior Costa, or Base ofthe Bone, placed cb- 
                        81
liquely with respect to the Spine, the upper end being
considerably nearer to it than the under.
  The upper part ofthe Base, above the Spine, running
obliquely forwards to the upper angle,  and giving at-
tachment to the Levator Scapula: Muscle.
  The inferior Angle very acute, and marked by the pas-
sage of the Latissimus Dorsi, and the origin of the
Teres Major.
  The superior Angle approaching a right one.
  The anterior  Angle, forming the Cervix  which sup-
ports the head ofthe Bone.
  The Glenoid Cavity, placed on  the  fore-part of the
head of the Bone, and lined with Cartilage  for the ar-
ticulation ofthe Os-Humeri.
  The shape of that Cavity, resembling that of an Egg
cut longitudinally, with the large end undermost, but
so shallow as to receive only a small portion ofthe Ball
pf tke Os Humeri, the rest ofthe Ball being contained
»n the Capsular  Ligament.
  The Spine, running across the Bone, and dividing it
into a small upper, and large under Surface.
  The Spine, small at its beginning, and becoming high-
tr and broader in its course forwards.
  A triangular Space, between the root of the Spine and
Base ot the Bone, where part ofthe Trapezius Muscle
i-> fixed.
  The Fossa Supra Spinata, or  space  above the Spine,
for the origin ofthe Supra-Spinatus Muscle.
  The Fossa Infra-Spir.uta, for the origin ofthe Infra-
spinatus Muscle.
  The Spine becoming broad anel flat at  its  anterior
extremity, where it is termed Acromion, or  Top of the
Shoulder.
  The Under Surface of the  Acromion  hollow for the
passage ofthe Spinati Muscles.
  The Situation ofthe  Aciomion over the  Joint of the
Humerus, which it assists in protecting.
  '1 he anterior  Edge ofthe  Acromion tipped with Car-
tilage for its articulation with the outer end ofthe Cla-
vicle, where very little motion is allowed.
  The Coracoid, or Crow's beae like Process, arising from
the neck of the  Bone, and making a curvature forwards,
bo as to leave a hollow  at  its rout tor the passage of
the Sub$c»'>ularis Muscle 
82
   The Point of this Process gives  origin to Muscles,
 and from its side a strong Ligament goes across to be
 fixed to the  Acromion for the protection ofthe Joint.
   The Scapula is articulated with the Trunk ofthe Bo-
 dy, by means ofthe Clavicle, which allows it to play in
 all directions'.

           The Os Humeri, or Arm Bone-
   The Situation of the Os  Humeri  at the side ofthe
 Thorax, and under the Scapula.
   The Ball,  or Head of the Os Humeri, forming a small
 Segment of a large Sphere, and this covered with Car-
 tilage, and placed at  the  upper, posterior,  and inner
 part of the Boely of the Bone,  to correspond with the
 Glenoiel Cavity on the Scapula.
   The Cervix, or Neck surrounding the edge of the
 Ball, and forming  a  superficial Fossa where the Cap-
 sular Ligament is fixed, which  allows the Bone an ex-
 tensive motion in all directions.
   Numerous  Holes round  the upper entl of the Bone,
 for the insertion of the Fibres  of the Capsular Li; ;-
 incut, and for the passage of  Blood-vessels u.io  i..u
 Bone.
   A Groove,  or long Fossa, in the  upper and fore-p-irt
 of the Bone, for lodging  the Tendon of the long head
 ofthe Biceps Muscle.
   The smaller Tubercle, placed  at the upper and inner
 side of the  above-mentioned Groove, for the  attach-
 ment ofthe Subscapulars Muscle.
   The larger 'Tubercle, opposite to  the former, and on
 the outer aide ofthe Groove, far the attachment ofthe
 Muscles which cover the Dorsum ofthe Scapula.
   A Ridge continued down from each Tubercle along
 the sides of the  long Fossa,  for the insertion of Mus-
 cles corning from the Trunk  of the Boely, or from the
 Scapula.
   i\ Sausage  slanting downwards in the fore and inner
part of the Bone, near  its middle,  for the Medullary
Vessels.
   At the under End of the Graome for lodging the long
head ofthe Biceps Muscle, the Bone marked bv the at-
tachment ofthe Deltoid and c.her Muscles
  The Body ofthe Bone round near its upper end ; bu>, 
P3
 as it descends, it appears twisted, then flat, and increa-
 ses in breadth at tlie lower extremity-
  From the Muscular Prints on the fore-part of the bo-
 dy ofthe Bone,  a  blunt Rid^e  continued  to  the upper
 part ofthe Trochlea.
  The under and back-part ofthe Bone, fiat and smooth,
 by the motion of tin-Triceps Extensor ofthe Feire-Arm.
  A large Ridge at the under  and outer, and a small
 Ridge at the under and inner edge ofthe Bone, for the
 attachment of strong Tcn<iiuoiis Fasciae, which give ori-
 gin to part ofthe Muscles ofthe Fore-Arm.
  The Rielges end in the two Contlyles.
  The external Condyle  placed  at  the under and outer
 part ofthe Bone, for  the origin ofthe Extensor Mus-
 cles ofthe Hanel anel Fingers.
  The internal Condyle, at the  under and inner part of
 the Bone, more prominent than the former, for the ori-
 gin of the strong Flexor Muscles ofthe Hand and  Fin-
 gers.
  The articulating Surface at the under end ofthe Bone,
 covered with  Cartilage for the  articulation with the
 Boms ofthe Fore-Arm.
  The inner Part ofthe articulating Surface, consisting
 of a large internal,  and  small external eminence, \wth
 a middle Cavity, or a  Trochlea upon which the Ulna
 moves.
  The oblique Situation ofthe articulating Surface, the
 inner end being lower than the  outer, by  which  the
 hand turns more  readily to the upper parts ofthe Body.
  The outer Port of the  articular  Surface upon which
 the  head ofthe Radius moves, of a round  form, and
 considered by some authors as  the smooth part of the
 outer Condyle.
  Round the edge  of the  articular  Cavity,  the Bone
 marked by tlie insertion  of the Capsular Ligament of
the Joint.
  A Cavity at the under  and fore-part of the Bone, a-
 bove the Trochlea,  for receiving the Coronoid Process
ofthe Ulna in the Flexion ofthe  Fore-Arm.
  A  Ci.vitj at the  back-part of the  Bone, above the
Trochlea, the M'.der part of it for receiving the Ole-
rn.uon ofthe Uuia in the extension  of the Fore-Arm,
i».;-.l  ti.i upper L art  for containing C;v ir'at of thv  Joint. 
                        84
  Between these Cavities, the Bone is pressed so thin
as to become transparent, especially in an Old Person.
                THE  FORE-ARM.

    It consists of two Bonevs, the Ulna and Radiue.

                The Ulna, or Cubit.
  The Situation of the  Ulna at the inner part of the
Fore-arm, the Arm being supposed to hang by the side
ofthe Body,  with  the  Palm of the Hand turned for-
wards.
  The Olecranon, Processus Anconeus, or top ofthe Cubit,
placed at the upper end of the Bone.
  The upper end ofthe Process, rough where the Tri-
ceps Extensor Cnbiti Muscle is fixed.
  The Coronoid, or sharp Process, at the upper and fore.
part ofthe Bone, but considerably lower than the Ole-
cranon,  for forming a part of the hinge ofthe Joint of
the Elbow.
  The great Sigvioid, or Semilunar Cavity, between the
Olecranon and Coronoid Process, lined with Cartilage,"
and  divided  into two  slanting  Surfaces by a middle
Ridge, the whole  adapted to the Trochlea of the Os
Humeri, and with  it forming  a complete hinge, which
allows an extensive degree of flexion,  and as much  ex-
tension  as to approach  a straight line with the Uppef
Arm, but little or  no rotation.   .
  Across the midd.  of the great Sigmoid Cavity, there
is a  Pit for lodging part ofthe Fat ofthe Joint."
  The small Sigmoid,  or semilunar Cavity,  lined with
Cartilage at  the outer side of the Coronoid Process,
where the round head  ofthe Radius plays.
  The Tubercle of the  Ulna,  or small reftigh Spot for
the  insertion ofthe Brachialis Internus Muscle.
  The Body ofthe Ulna, of a triangular form, and be-
coming gradually  smaller in Ks descent.
  The sharpest Ang'e opposed to the  Radius, for the
attachment of tlie  Interosseous Ligament.
  The sides forming this Angle, fiat,  and markedly
the  Muscles which originate from them. 
85
  A Passage slanting upwards, about a  hand-breadth
below the upper end ofthe Medullary Vessels.
  The under end  of the Bone, forming a small round
Head, which is covered with Cartilage  on that side
where the Radius moves  upon it, and also on its ex-
tremity, where it is opposed to the moveable Cartilage
placed between it and the Carpus.
  The Styloid Process, from  which a strong Ligament
goes off to be fixed  to the Bones of the Wrist.

                   The Radius.

  The Situation of the Radius at the outer part of the
Fore-Arm.
  The upj\-r End ofthe Radius, covered with Cartilage,
formed into a circular heael, and hollowed above for re-
ceiving the  outer part ofthe Articular Cavity ofthe
Os Humeri, whe:v it bends, and extends upon the Bone,
along with tlie  Ulna.
  The inr.'r Side of the Head smotith, and also covered
v. ith  Cr.rtilkge, where it plays upon its own axis in the
small semilunar Cavity,  at the outer side ofthe Ulna.
  The Cervix of tlie Radius, smaller than the head, sur-
rounded, in the  Subject, by a circular Ligament which
keeps the Bone in its  place, and allows it to roll upon
the Ulna.
  The Tidier.:le of the Radius, at  the under and inner
part of the Cervix, for the insertion ofthe Biceps Flex-
or ofthe Arm.
  The Body ofthe Bone, convex on its outer and back-
part, r.nd rounded by the Muscles which cover  it.
  The Surfaces next the Ulna, fiat, where Muscles of
the Hand take their origin.
  The anterior and  posterior Surfaces terminating in a
sharp Ridge, to which the Interosseous Ligament ofthe
Fore-Arm is fixed.
  A P,issage slanting upwards, for the Medullary Ves-
sels,  on the fore-part of the Bone, anel about  a hand-
breadth below  its  upper end.
  A rough Surface is found at the outer and middle part
ofthe hone, h»r,the insertion of the Pronator radii teres.
  The lower end  of the Radius, bi coming  gradually
larger, anil  flat on  its fore-part, where it !■> covered by
the Pronator radii quadratus A.uae'le 
                        86
  A Ridge upon the under and back-part of the Radi-
us, with a Fossa upon each side of it, where the Ten-
dons ofthe Extensor Muscles ofthe fingers pass.
  The otite-r side of this extremity ofthe Bone, holloa-
ed bv the Extensors ofthe Thumb.
  A semilunar Cavity at 'he inner side of the under end
ofthe Radius, lined with Cartilage, for receiving the
corresponding extremity of the Ulna upon which the
Radius rolls,'carrying the Hand with it.
  The lower End of the Bone  formed into a Cavity of an
oval form, and lined with Cartilage for reccivingthe
two first Bones ofthe Carpus.
  The under and outer Part  <f the  Radius, forming a
Process somewhat similar to the Stfloid Process ofthe
Ulna.—From this  Process a  Ligament is sent to the
Wrist.
                  THE HAND,

Composed ofthe Bones ofthe Carpus, Metacarpus, and
                     Fingers-
  The outer Surface ofthe Hand convex, which gives it
a greater degree of strength.
  The inner Surface of the Hand concave, for grasping
and holding Substances.
              The Corpus, or Wrist,
    Composed of eight Bones, which form two Rows.
                In the first Row are,
  The Ot Scaphoides, Lunare, Cuneiforme, Pisiforme.
                In the second Row.
The Os  Trapezium, Trapezoides, Magnum,  Uncifortne.
  The posterior Surface of  the Carpus is convex, and
marked by the numerovis Ligaments attached to it The
anterior Surface is hollow,  and also  marked by Liga-
ments.
  The Surfaces ofthe Bones ofthe Carpus, which are
articulated with each other, or with ihe neighbouring
Bones, and covered with  Cartilage, to facilitate the mo-
tion of the Joints. 
                        87
  The Os  Scaphoides, or Boat-like Bone, placed at
the outer ami upper part ofthe Carpus.
  Tlie upper Surface convex, and articulated with the
Radius.
  The under and outer Surface, also convex, to be ar-
ticulated with the Os Trapezium, and Trapezoides.
  Between the upper and under Cartilaginous Surfaces,
a rough Fossa for the insertion of the Capsular Liga-
ment.
  The anterior and inner surface, having an oval Cavity
which gives name to the Bone, where it is articulated
with the-Os Magnum.
  A Process upon the outer end of the Bone, for the at-
tachment of part ofthe anterior Transverse Ligament
ofthe Wrist.
  The Os  Luna re, situated upon the inner side ofthe
former Bone.
  The  upper Surface convex, for its articulation with
the Radius.
  The outer Edge in form of a Crescent, from which the
Bone is named, articulated with the Os Scaphoides.
  The under Surface hollow, for its articulation with the
Os Magnum.
  The inner Surface of the Bone, articulated with the
Os Cuneiforme.
  The Os  Scaphoides and Os Lunare, forming an oval
head, which is received in the Socket of the Radius,
where extensive motion is allowed forwards, backwards,
and to either side.

  The  Os  Cuneiforme, or wedge-like Bone, situated
on the inner side ofthe former one.
  The anterior Edge is thin, in form  of a wedge.
  The upper and outer Surface articulated with the Os
Lunare.
  The under and outer Surface articulated with the Os
Unciforme.
  The anterior anel inner Surface, forming a slight con-
vexity for its articulation with the Os Pisiforme.
  Between the upper  part of this Bone and the Ulna,
the moveable Cartilage formerly mentioned is interposed.
  The  Os  Pisiforme, or Pea-shaped Bone, placed up-
on the anterior and inner Surface ofthe Os Cuneiforme, 
                       88
snd forming a Prominence which is readily felt in the
Wrist, anel v\hich  gives attachment to  strong Tendi-
nous and Ligamentous Substances, particularly to part
ofthe Ligamentum carpi annulate.

  The Os Trapezium, named from the four unequal
Edges of its posterior Surface.
  The Situation of this Bone, at the root of the Meta-
carpal Bone ofthe Thumb.
  The upper part ofthe  Bone forming a smooth Pit, to
be articulated with tjie Os Scaphoides.
  The inner side hollow, and articulated with the Os
Trapezoides.
  The tinier Surface  forming  a Pulley, on which the
Metacarpal Bone ofthe  rhumb moves.
  The anterior Surface sending out a Process, which is
prominent in the P:vlm, and m-irked by  the transversa
Ligament of the Wrist, by the Flrttbr carpi radialis, and
and Flexors ofthe  Thumb.

  The Os  Trapezoides, so  named from its  being
somewhat like the former Bone ; but it  is considerably
smaller.
  The Situation of the Os Trapezoides, at the  inner
side ofthe Os Trapezium.
  The upper surface hollow, where it joins the Os Sca-
phoides.
  The outer Surface convex, and articulate dwith the
Trapezium.
  Tlie inner Surface, articulated with the Os Magnum.
  The under Surface, formed into a sort  of Pulley, to be
articulated with  the Metacarpal Bone ofthe Fore Fin-
ger.

  The Os Magnum,  or Capitatum,  or largest Bone
ofthe Carpus, placed at the inner side ofthe former
Bone, and consisting of four oblong sides, with a round
head, and tib \>"ihr under end.
  The head or ball of the Bone, received into the hollow
Surfaces of the Os Scaphoides and Lunare;  like ball
and S >cket.
  The under part ofthe outer side joined to the Os Tra-
pezoides. 
                        89
  The inner side to the Os Unciforme.
  'The under end opposed to the Metacarpal Bone ofthe
Mieldle- Finger.
  The Os Unciforme, or hook-like bone, placed in the
under and inner part of the Wrist.
  The upper and inner Sufuce articulated with the Os
Cuneiforme.
  The outer Surface, articulated with the Os Magnum.
  The inferior Suifuce, opposed tothe Metacarpal Bones
ofthe Ring and Little Fingers.
  The anterior Surface, sending out the Unciforme Pro-
cess, which gives name to the Bone.
  i he Unciforme Process curved, for the passage of the
Flexor ATiscltsof the Fingers.
  The articulation between the first anel second  Row
of Carpal Bones, allows motion to each side, but chief-
ly forwards anel backwards, though the motion is less
extensive than between the Fore-Arm and  Wrist.
  In a Fcetus, the Bones of* the Carpus are in a Carti-
laginous state.
   The  Metacarpus, or Part annexed to the Carpus,
  Consisting  of fur Bones for supporting the Fingers,
 and one for the thumb.

            The Metacarpal Bones ofthe
                    —Fingers.—
  Their bodies long anel round.
  The extremi-ies of  these Bones, considerably larger
 than their bodies.
  The upper  ends or ba,sesfiat, where they are articula-
 ted with the  Bones of the Carpus.
   The flatness of this end of the Metacarpal Bones, and
 their strong connecting Ligaments render the Motions
 here inconsiderable.
   Round the Edges  of the Cartilaginous Surfaces, at
 the upper end, the Depressions where the Capsular  Li-
 gaments are fixed.
   The sides  ofthe upper ends fiat, where they are ar-
 ticulated with each otlier.
   A Ridge at the upper  and back-part of their bodies,
 with a depression on each side of it, formed by thc'ln-
 tcrossei M uj.c1«"s> 
                       90
  The under  and back-part of their bodies, made fiat
by the motion ofthe Tenelons of the Extensors of the
Fingers.                                     ,
  The anterior Surface of the bodies concave, and ren-
dered fiat at the sides by the Interossei Muscles.
  The lower ends,or heads, formed into Balls, which are
flattened upon their sides by their motions upon each
other.
  At the fore-part of each side ofthe heads, a little pro-.
minence, for the attachment ofthe Ligaments which fix
these Bones to each other.
  Round the  heads, a depression, for the insertion of the
Capsular Ligaments.

    Peculiarities Ofthe Metacarpal Bones
                 ofthe Fingers.
  The Base of the Metacarpal Bones of the Fore-Finger,
opposed to, and corresponding with, the Os Trapezoi-
des, and partly with the Trapezium.
  The inner part of the Base,  forming a  Ridge, which
is articulated with the Os Magnum, and with the next
Metacarpal Bone.
  The connection of the base is so  firm, that it has lit*
tie or no motion.
  The Metarcarpal Bone of the Mid-Finger, commonly
the second in length.
   The Base  ofthe Bone  commonly slants inwards and
downward.,  opposed to the Os Magnum.
   The outer and back-part ofthe Base, projecting, and
forming s sort of Process, the external Surface of which
 is connectetl with the Ritlge ofthe former Bone.
   The  motion of this Bone is little more than that ofthe
 former one.
   The  Metacarpal Bone ofthe Ring.Finger, shorter than
 the former one.
   Its Base semi-circular where it is opposed to the Os
 Unciforme
   The  motion is something greater  than that of the
 former Bone.
   The  Metacarpal Bone ofthe Little-Finger the smallest
 of t.e_  four.
    The  Base, which slants downwards and outwards op-
 posed to the under and inner part ofthe Os Unciforme. 
                          91
    The inner part ofthe Base has no smooth Surface, not
  being contiguous to any other Bone.
    From the nature of "the  Joint, the looseness ofthe
  Ligaments, and from there being a proper Muscle here,
  this Bone possesses a larger share of motion than any
  ofthe rest.
    The Metacarpal Bone of the Thumb, having the gen-
  eral resemblance of those of the fingers ;  but it differs
  from them in being placed oblique with respect to the
  Metacarpal Bones of the Fingers, and in some measure
  opposing them.
    It is thicker and stronger, but shorter than those of
  the Fingers.
    The Base of this Bone articulated with  the Pulley
  formed by the Trapezium. It appears to admit of flex-
  ion and extension only, but,  from the looseness of the
  Ligaments,  it enjoys  the same kind of  motion with
  Joints formed after the manner of Ball and Socket
    The inferior extremity ofthe Bone, considerably fat-
  ter than those ofthe other Metacarpal Bones      '
    The Fingers, composed can-U of three Bones,  and the
  three  Kows of Bemes termed Phalanges-
    The different Phalanges, tapering a little as they des-
  cend, and their Bases larger than their ieferior extrem-
  ities
    The posterior Surfaces convex, and covereel chiefly by
  the tendinous expansions of the extensors of tlie Finders.
    Their anterior  Surfaces, fiat, and in some parts  con-
  cave, for lodging the Tendons ofthe  Flexor  Muscles,
    Ridges at the sitles of their anterior Surfaces, for the
,  attachment of the retaining Ligaments ofthe Tendons
  of the Flexor Muscles.
    The first Phalanx longer than the second, and the se-
  cond than the third.
    The Bases ofthe first Phalanx, formed into Sockets to
  receive the Balls of the Metacarpal Bones, and to allow
  motion to all sides.
    The lower ends of this Phalanx, consisting of lateral
  Prominences, and middle Cavities or Pulleys, the Carti-
  laginous S.irfaces of which reach  consielerably farther
  up in the fore than in the back-part.
    The Bases of the second Phalanx, with  lateral Cavi-
  t'res and middle Ridges, corresponding with  the Pulley
         vol.  I.             *' 
92
of the"first Phalanx, anel admitting of flexion and exten-
sion only.
  The lower ends of this Phalanx similar to that of the
first.
  The Base ofthe third Phalanx, like that ofthe second,
and the motions also similar.
  The under ends of the  third Phalanx, rough where    |
the Pulpy, Vascular,  anel Nervous  Substance of the
points ofthe Fingers are situated.
  The Peculiarities ofthe Bones of the Fingers consist
only in their size.
  The Bones ofthe Mid-finger the largest andlongest-
  Those ofthe Ring-Finger the next in length.
  The Bones of the Fore-Finger, next to the Ring-Fin-  ,
ger in length, anel to the Mid-Finger in thickness.
  Those ofthe Fourth-Finger the smallest.
  The Thumb, consisting only of two Bones.
  The first Bone, like  those of the first Phalanx ofthe
Fingers, but thicker ami shorter.
  The Cavity at the Base ofthe Bone, longer from one
side to the other, and shallower than those ofthe Fin-    |
gers, but,  like them, forming a Socket for the Metacar-
pal Bone.  From the flatness ofthe Joint, however, and
strength of the lateral Ligaments, the motions here are    "*'
confined to flexion and extension.
  The lower end of the first Bone ofthe  Thumb,  like
that of the first of the  Fingers.
  The second Bone of the  Thumb, like the third of the    "
Fingers, but broader.
  The Base of this Bone, like that of the second  and
third Bones ofthe Fingers, and like their joints also,
admitting  of flexion and extension only.
   THE INFERIOR EXTREMITIES.
The Inferior Extremities are composed ofthe Thighs,
                  Legs, and Feet.
      The Thigh consists of a single Bone, viz.
        The Os Femoris, or Thigh-Bone
  The Os Femoris is the longest nf the  Body, and thick-
est and strongest of the Cyliiuh ical Bones. 
                        93

parthoefufeT'elv',is0f ^ ^ "  ^ Under *nd °Ut"
A^hefbf9-Ue Situation ofthe body of tlie Bone, theun-
derend beu.g considerably nearer its fellow on the o-
iner side, than the upper one is, which is favourable for
the passages at the bottom ofthe  Pelvis, for the origin
Of Muscles, and for walking.
  ,Ttlf B«U> or Heal of the Thigh-Bone, smooth cover-
ed with Cartilage, and forming almost  two-thirds  of a
Sphere, which is  received into  a deep-  Socket  fbrmed
by the Acetabulum ofthe  Os  Innominatum.
  A rough Pit at the under anel  inner part of the Ball,
for the attachment  of the Ligamentum  Rotundum,
which is fixed by  its outer end to the bottom of the A-
cetabuhim.
  The Cervix, or Neck, much longer than that  of any
other Bone, passing obliquely downwards and outwards
from the Ball, to  allow the free motion ofthe body of
the Bone, in different directions. It is restrained, how-
ever in its motion outwards, by the Ligamentum Rotun-
dum,and by the  high Brim of the Acetabulum.
  Numerous Holes in the  Cervix, for the  insertion of
the Fibres ofthe  Ligament reflected from the Capsu-
lar one.
  The Trochanter major, placed at the outer part of the
Neck, and upper  end of the body of the Bone, for the
insertion ofthe Extensor, Abductor, and Rotator Mus-
cles ofthe Thigh.
   T%vo rough Surfaces upon the upper and fore-part of
the large  Trochanter, for the insertion ofthe two small
Glutei Muscles.
  A Cavitj is placed at the inner side of the root ofthe
large Trochanter, for the insertion of the Rotator Mus-
cles ofthe Thigh.
  The Trochanter minor, at the under and inner part of
the Cervix for the insertion of  the Flexor  Muscles of
the Thigh.
  A rough Line on the fore-part ofthe  Bone, between
the two Trochanters, for the insertion of the Capsular
Ligament.
  A rough line between the Trochanters," on the back- 
94
 part ofthe Bone, for the insertion ofthe Capsular Lig-
 ament, and the Qu'drat us 1 cmoris Muscle.
   The Body ofthe Thigh-bone, bent forwards, and of a
 roundish form above,  but somewhat triangular about its
 middle.
   The fore-part ofthe Bone flat, where it is covered by
 the Crureus Muscle.
   The Sides of the Bone are flattened at its middle and
 lower part, by the two Vasti Muscles.
   The Linea Aspera,  or ragged Ridge on the back-part
 ofthe Bone, extending from the Trochanters, but chief-
 ly from the large one, to the lower part ofthe Bone, and
 giving attachment to numerous  Muscles  which  pass
 from the  Pelvis to the Thigh, or  form the Thigh to
 the  Leg.
   The lower  End of  the Linea Aspera, dividing into
 two Lines, which terminate in the Condyles.
   The Canal for the  Medullary  Vessels, slanting up-
 wards, a  little below  the middle .of the posterior part
 ofthe Bone.
   The under anel back-part ofthe Bone, flat where the
 Popliteal  Vessels and Nerves are placed.
   The lower End of the Bone,  much larger than  its bo-
 dy, and perforated by many Holes,  for the insertion of
 the Capsular Ligament ofthe Knee, and passage ofthe
 Nutritious Vessels of the Bone—It is also marked by
 the insertion of several  Muscles
  The Cartilaginous Trochlea at the under and fore part
 ofthe Bone,  placed obhq iely,  with its outer Surface
 higher than its inner one, to be adapted to the Patella,
 which moves upon it.
  The external and internal Condyles,  continued back
 from the Trochlea, and  covered with Cartilage for the
 motion of  the Tibia
  Th- internal Condyle, larger and deeper than the ex-
 ternal to  compensate  for the  obliquity ofthe Thigh,
 and give less obliquity to the Leg.
  A  Notch between the  back-part  of the Condyles, for
lodging the Popliteal Vessels and  Nerves.
  A semilunar rough Notch,  deeper and lower than the
former one, tor the attae hnient of  the Crucial or  inter-
nal Ligaments ofthe Knee. 
                       (THE  LEG.

  • Qtmpoted of the two  Hones  —the Tibia and Fibula, to
             which may be added the Patella.
r
                       The Tibia,
     Situated at the inner part ofthe  Leg.
     The upper End of the  Tibia, forming a large Head,
   and that divided on its upper Surface into two superfi-
   cial Cavities, for receiving the Cartilaginous part of the
   Condyles ofthe Thigh Bone.
     A rough Protuberance between the articulating Cavi-
   ties, pitted on its fore and back-part, for the insertion
   of the anterior and  posterior Crucial Ligaments.
     The articulating  Surfaces at the upper end of the Ti-
   bia, are rendered deeper in the Subject by the addition
   of two semilunar Cartilage placed upon their Edges.
     The Circumference of  the Head of the Bone, rough
\  and porous, for the  insertion ofthe Capsular Ligament.
'     The articulation  ofthe upper end of  the Tibia with
   the Os Femoris, is  of such a nature as to allow flexion
   and extension, but  no lateral nor rotary motion in the
   extended state, though a small degree of  both when
•■  the Knee is bended.
     A Tubercle at the  upper and fore-part ofthe Bone,
[  for the insertion of the lower Tendon or Ligament of
   the Patella.
     A Cartilaginous Surface under the outer Edge of the
   Head of the Bone, for the articulation  with the upper
>.  end ofthe  Fibula.
     The Body of the Bone triangular, with the sharpest
   Angle placed anteriorly.
     The anterior Angle called Spine or Shin, a little wav-
   ed, anel extending from the Tubercle to the inner Ankle.
,     The anterior and inner Surface  of the-Bone, smooth,
i.  being covered with skin only.
     The anterior and outer Surface, hollowed  above  and
   below  by the Extensor muscles ofthe Toes.
     'The middle of the posterior Surface, hollowedhy mus-
b  cles which assist in extending  the  Foot, and bending
   the Toes.
     A Ridge extending obliquely downwards from the up-
   per and outer part  of the Bone, posteriorly, to its inner
 
96
Angle, and giving origin to part ofthe Muscles which
extend the Foot and bend the Toes.
  A fiat Surface above the Ridge, pointing out the si-
tuation of the Popliteous Muscle.
  The Canal for the Medullary  Vessels, slanting down-
wards at the inner and back-part of the  Bone, a little
above its middle.
  The under end ofthe Tibia, smaller than the upper
one, and its  inferior Surface covered with Cartilage,
for the articulation with the Astragalus.
  The Malleolus Internus, or inner Angle, produced from
the inner part ofthe untler end, and covered with Car-
tilage where the Astragalus plays.
  A Pit in the point ofthe Malleolus Internus, for the
attachment  of the internal  lateral  Ligament, and a
Groove behind, where the Tendons of the  Tibialis Pos-
ticus M-iscle is placed.
  The semilunar Caiity, at the under  and outer side of
the  Tibia, for receiving the under end ofthe Fibula.
  Round the edge ofthe articulating Cavity, the Bone
is marked by the insertion of the Capsular  Ligament.

                    The  Fibula,
  Placed at the outer side of the  Tibia, and by much
the smaller ofthe two Bones.
  Tlie upper end of the  Fibula, formed  ir.to  a  large
Hew, with a superficial smooth Cavity towards its inner
side, to be articulated with the  Tibia, where it is tied
by Ligaments of such strength as to  allow  very  little
motiqn.
  The Head of the Fibula,  irregular and rough exter-
nally, for the insertion ofthe  Biceps Flexor Cruris, and
the external lateral Ligament ofthe  Knee.
  The Body ofthe Bone bent a little inwards and back-
wauls, anel unequally triangular, with the Surfaces be- .
tween the Angles, marked by the Muscles which arise
from, it; or are placed upon it.
  A Ridge at #ie inner s\le  of  the  Fibula, opposed to
one at the outer part of the Tibia, for the insertion of
the Interosseous Ligament.
  A Canal on the back-part  of the Bone, slanting ob-
liquely downwards, for the passage of the  Medullary
Vessels.                                           ' 
                       97
  The under End of the Fibula, broad 2nd flat, to be re-
ceived by the semilunar cavity  of the  Tibia, where it
is fixed so firmly by strong Ligaments, as to have no
sensible motion.
  The Malleolus-externus of the Bone, or outer Ankle,
lower and farthe back than the inner Ankle.
  A convex smooth  Surface on  the  inner side of the
Malleolus externus, opposed to the  outer  side of th«
Astragalus, which  moves upon it.
  The Coronoid Process, sent down from the Malleolus
externus, from which  Ligaments go to the Bones at
the outer side of the Foot.
  There is a  Furrow upon  the back-part ofthe Malleo-
lus externus, for lodging the Tendons of the Peronei
Muscles.

      The Patella, Rotula, or  Knee-Pan,

  Placed at the fore-part of the Joint ofthe Knee, and
compared by some authors to the Olecranon of the Ulna.
  The shape of the  Patella, triangular and fiat, or ofthe
figure of a Heart, as painted upon playing cards.
  The anterior Surface of the Bone, convex,  and perfo-
rated by numerous  Holes  for the insertion  of Tendons
and Ligaments which  cover it.
  The posterior Surface, which corresponds with the
Trochlea ofthe Os  Femoris, smooth, covered with Car-
tilage, and divided by a longitudinal prominent Ridge
into two unequal Cavities.
  The circumference of the articular Surface, marked
by a rough Line,  into  which the Capsular Ligament of
the Joint is fixed.
  The Base,  or upper part ofthe Bone, horizontal, and
marked by the insertion of the Tendons of the Exten-
sors ofthe Leg.
  The back-part of the Apex, rough and depressed, for
the attachment of  the Ligament passing from the Pa-
tella to the Tubercle ofthe Tibia.
  The Ligaments of the Patella allow it to be moved
upwards and  downwards ; and when the Leg is extend-
ed, they atlmit of its motion to either side, or to be rolled.
   When the  Leg is extended, the Patella  is lodged in
the Trochlea of the  Os Femoris ;  when the  Limb k
                       f 3 
                        96
fcent, it is.palled down by the Tibia, anfl l«dg<ed  ftr a
hollow at tlie fore-part ofthe Knee.
  The Patella allows the Mu&cles fixed to it to act  witfc
greater advantage in extending the Leg.
  It.i* efttk-isly Cjtrtdagiuous at birth.
                   THE FOOT,

      Composed of Tareus, Metatarsus aiftd Tort.
               The Tarsis, or Instep.
   Composed of seven Bones, viz.  The Astragahtt,  Or
 Calcis, Naviculare, Cuboiles. Cuneiforme externum, Cu-
 neiforme medium, and Cuneiforme internutn-
   The upper part o,f the Tarsus is convex, the under
 part concave.
   In the Concavity are  lodged numerous Muscles, Ves-
 sels, anel Norves, belonging to the Sole.
   The different Bones of the Tarsus hare their rough
 Surfaces joined together by strong Ligaments, anduheir
 parts of artioulation covered with Cartilage,  m such a
 manner as 'to form a strong and relastic arch, for sup-
 porting the weight ofthe 'Body, and lessening the shock
 k would'Otherwise undergo in the different  motions it
 has to sustain.
   The Astragalus, or Ankle-Bone, placed under tha
 Bones ofthe Leg.
   The upper part ofthe Astragalus, formed into a large
 Head which is smooth on  its  upper  part and sides, t0
 be articulated with the under end ofthe Leg-bones.
   Each ofthe  Cartilaginous  Surfaces of the Head of
 this Bone is depressed in its middle, to correspond with
the parts ofthe Leg-bones with which they are articu-
 lated.
   Round the edge of the articulating Surfaces, a rough
 Fossa for the insertion ofthe Capsular Ligament; an,I
 at the sides of this  Surface, the Bone marlted by the
lateral Ligaments.
  The Joint between  the Astragalus and Leg-Bones,
forming a complete Hinge, which together, with  the
afeove-mentioned  Ligaments, aHows the Foot to bend 
                        §9
and extend upon the Leg,  but admits of no lateral or
rotatory  motion,  except in the extended state, when
there is a little of each.
  The under part ofthe Bone, consisting of a deep Fos-
oa, which divides it into an anterior and  posterior ar-
ticulating Surface.
  The Fossa in the under Surface, narrower at the in-
ner part ofthe Bone, and becoming gradually wider as
it goes outwards and forwards.
  The posterior articulating Surface, large and concave,
for its arttctilation with the upper and middle part of
the Os Calcis.
  The anterior ai ticulating Surface, irregular and convex,
where it plays upon two smooth Cavities  at the inner
and fore-part ofthe Os Calcis,  and upon a Cartilagin-
ous Ligament extended between the Os Calcis ami Os
Naviculare.
  A  large oblong smooth Head,  at the fore-part of the
Bone, for its articulation with the Os Naviculare.
  The Os Calcis or Heel-Bone, the largest ofthe Tar-
sal Tones, situated  under the  Astragalus, and in the
back-part of the Feiot.
  A  large Knob, projecting  behind, to form the  Heel.
  A  superficial Cavity in the upper and back-part of this
Knob, for the insertion of the Tendo-Achiltis.
  A  smooth Convexity  on the upper part of the Bone,
for its articulation with the under aad back-part ofthe
Astragalus.
  A  Fossa at the fore-part of this articulating Surface,
running forwards  and  outwards, and giving origin  to
strong Ligaments which are inserted in  the  correspon-
ding Fossa of the  Astragalus.
  Two Prominences  at  the  inner  and fore-part of tie
Bone, concave and  smooth above,  w'nh a pit between
them, for the articulation with the  under and fore-
part  ofthe Astragalus.
  From the  posterior Prominence the Cartilaginous Li-
gament arises, which is fixed to the Os Naviculare.
  A  large Cavity at  the inner side ofthe Bone, between
the posterior oi the two last mentionctl Processes and
projection ofthe Heel, for lodging the Tendons of the
long Flexors of the Toes, together with the Vcs&cis
and N 
100
   The external Surface of the Bone, deprested near its
 forepart, where the Tentlon ofthe long Peronous Mus-
 cle runs in its way to the Sole.
   The under and back-part of the Bone, forming two
 Prominences, where  it gives origin to the Aponeurosis
 and several Muscles  of  tlie sole ; and before the Pro-
 minences, the  Bone  concave,  where it lodges part of
 these Muscles.
   The anterior Surface concave, and somewhat in form
 of a Pulley placed obliquely,  for its articulation with
 the Os Cuboides.
   The Os Calcis is articulated with the Astragalus by
 Ligaments of such strength, that this part ofthe Foot,
 upon which the Body rests, is rendered firm and se-
 cure, but enjoys very little motion.
   The Os Naviculare, or Boat-Like Bone, situated
 at the fore-part of the  Astragalus, and  inner part of-
 the Foot.
   The posterior Surface, forming a  Cavity  somewhat
 like that of  a Boat,  for  receiving the head ofthe As-
 tragalus in the  manner of Ball and Socket.
   A Prominence at the inner side of the  Bone, for the
 insertion of Tendons, Muscles, and strong Ligaments,
 particularly for the Ligament stretched  between this
 Bone and the Qs Calcis,  for the support ofthe Astra*
 gal us.
   The fore-part  of the Bone,  convex,  and tlividetl into
 three articular Surfaces,  for the articulation  with thA
 Ossa Cuneiformia-
   Between the Os Naviculare and Aitragaltis, the Foot
 has its principal lateral and rotatory  motions, though:
 each ofthe other Joints of the Tarsus contributes a
 little.

  The Os Cuboides, or Bone  of  a Cubic form, placed
at the fore and outer part of the Tarsus.
  The posterior Surface of this  Bone, smooth,  convex at
its inner, and concave  at  its outer part, corresponding
with the  anterior extremity ofthe Os Calcis.
  The inner side, articulated with the Os Naviculare
and external Cuneiforme Bone.
  Its under Surface irregular, where it gives attachment
to strung Ligaments, and to the Aelductor Pollicis Mus- 
                        101
   A deep Fossa in the outer and tinder pm* ofthe Bone,
for lodging the Tenelon ofthe Peroncus longus, where
it crosses the Sole.
   The anterior  extremity, divided into a  small inner,
»nd large outer plain  Surface, to be articulated  with
die fourth and fifth Metatarsal Bones.
  The  three  Ossa CuNEirotiMiA,  or wedge-shaped
Bones, situated at the fore-part of the Tarsus, and in-
ner side ofthe  Cuboid Bone.
   The upper part of these Bones, flat, where the)' are
covered with Ligaments.
  The under part, irregular, for the attachment of Mus-
cles and strong Ligaments lying in the Sole.
  The posterior Surface, flat, and  covered  with  Carti-
lage, to be articulated with the Os Naviculare.
  The anterior  Surface, also flat, for the  articulatibn
with the Metatarsal Bones.
  The Os Cuneiforme externum, or medium, of a middle
size between the next two Bones, and opposed to the
Metatarsal Bone ofthe Third Toe—The outer side of
this Bone is articulated with the Os Cuboides.
  The Os  Cuneiforme medium,  or  minimum, tlie least
of the three, and articulated at its outside with the
former Bone, and anteriorly with  the second Metatar-
sal Bone.
  The Os Cuneiforme internum, or  maximum, the laTg.
est of the Cuneiforme Bones, and placed obliquely, with
its anterior Surface opposed to the Metatarsal Bone of
the great Toe.
  The sharp Edge of this Bone  is turned upwards,
while that ofthe other two is in the opposite direction.
  The Navicular, Cuboid, and Cuneiforme Bones, are al-
most Cartilaginous at  birth.
  The Metatarsus, or Bones placed upon the Tarsus,
  Composed of five Bones,  which answer to the general
•haracurs given to the Metacarpal Bones.
  Their bodies  are long, arched upwards, and  tapering
towards their anterior extremities.      ,.„_,.
  The extremities large in  proportion to their Bodies,
and the posterior much larger than the anterior.
  The  Bases fiat, or a very little hollowed, to be articu-
lated with th« fore-part of the Tarsal Bonea. 
                       102
  From the flatness of their Bases, and the strength of
the Ligaments which fix  these Bones to those of the
Tarsus, very little motion is allowed to this part of the
Foot.
  Round the Bases rough Surfaces for the attachment of
Ligaments.
  The Sides ofthe Bases, fiat, where they are articula-
ted with each  other.
  A Ridge above, and 3. flat Surface at each side of their
bodies, tor the origin ofthe Interosseous Muscles.
  The flat Surfaces turned obliquely outwards, and the
obliquity increasing  the more externally the Bones are
placed.
  The anterior Extremities forming Balls, to be articu-
lated with the Toes ;—the  Balls much  longer from a-
Bove downwards, than they are  from one side to the
other.
  Round  the  Heads, a distinct impression, where the
Capsular Ligaments are fixed.

       Peculiarities  of the  Metatarsal Bones.
  The Metatarsal Bone of the Great Toe, by much the
thickest and strongest, but shortest of the  Metatarsus.
  The articulating Cavity of its Base, deeper than the rest.
  The anterior Extremity bears a greater proportion to
the Base than the rest, having a much larger share of
the weight of the Body to sustain here,  and is formed
into a middle  Prominence, with two lateral Depression**
 where the Ossa  Sesamoidea move.
   The Metatarsal Bone of the setond  Toe, the longest of
 the five.
 . The Metatarsal Bone of the Middle Toe, the second
 in  length  with a Base like that of the former Bone.tri-
 angular, but  a little larger, to be articulated with the
 Os Cuneiforme externum.
   The Metatarsal Bone of the fourth  Toe, nearly ofthe
 same length  as the former, but distinguished  from  it
 by its Base being thicker below, and its Cartilaginous
 Surface  being more of  a square form,  corresponding
 with  the anterior and inner part of  the Os Cuboides,
 With which it is  articulated.
    The Metatarsal Bone of the little  Toe,  the shortest,
*ith fiat surfaces facuig upwards and downwards. 
103
   The Base which rests on the Os Cuboides  projecting
 outwardly into a large Tuberosity, which gives origin
 to Muscles, and  forms one of the points on which the
 Body rests in standing.
   The Bones ofthe Toes, the same in number with those
 ofthe Fingers, viz. two to the Great Toe, and three to
 each ofthe smaller Toes, and the different Bones here,
 as in the Fingers  elisposed in Ranks or Phalanges.
   Th'-' two Bones of the great Toe, like those of the Thumb
 but stronger, anel pia ced in the same Row with the Bones
 ofthe  Toes, for the purpose of walking, and assisting
 in siippnrting the  Body.
   The Bones of the smaller Toes, every way less than
 those of the Fingers-
   Their under Surface, depressed, where the Tendons of
 their Flccor Muscles are lodged
   The Bases of the first Phalanx, as in the  Fingers,
 forming Sockets to receive the  Balls, or Heads ofthe
i Metatarsal Bones.
Y  The Joints between the  first and Second Plvihviv,
 and also between the second and  third, as in the fingci -*,
 forming Hinges, and the motions similar, but more con-
 fined .
   Ofthe sm.ll Tors, the first, or that next the Great
 Toe, the; largest, the rest  becoming smaller the more
 externally the} are placed.
   The second and third Bones,  especially of the little
' Toe, are frequently joiued by an union of Substance.

               OSSA SESAMOIDEA.

   The Ossa Sesamoidea are the only Bones ofthe Skeleton
             which remain to be described.
  ■ THEYare small Bones, compared in shape to the seeds
 ofthe Sesamum,  or oily grain.
   Their size, situation, and number, vary in different
 persons.                       ,        „ ,   _.
   Thev are sometimes found at  the roots of the Fingers
 and small Toes ; at the second joint ofthe Thumb  and
 that  of the Great Toe ; between the Com; vies ofthe
 Os Femoris and Gastrocnemius Muscle;  between the
 Tendons ofthe Peron.us Longus and Os Cuboides, &c.
    Those commonly observed are placed in pairs at the 
104
 roots of theThumb and Great Toe.between the tendons
 of their Flexor Muscles and Joints.
   Thev are convex on their outer Surface, where they
 are inclosed by the Tendons and Ligaments fixed to
 them :
   And concave, and lined with Cartilage next the Joints,
 where thev play upon the Bones  with which  they are
 articulated.
   They are considered  by  Anatomists as serving the
 same general purpose with the Patella.

          PRINCIPAL DIFFERENCES

   BFTWEEN THE MALE AND FEMALB SKELETON.

 m The Female  Skeleton is  observed, in  general, to be
 smaller and slenderer throughout than that of the Male.
   A Ripe Female  Bone, ofthe same size  with a male
 Bone, is usually extinguished b\  the Ridges, Depres-
 sions, rough Surfaces, and other inequalities, being Jess
 conspicuous in the former.
   The circumference of the Female Skull is said by a
 late Author to be larger.
   1 lu  Os Frontis has been  fonnel to be more frequent-
 ly divided by a continuation ofthe Sagittal Suture.
   The Frontal Sinuses are observeel to be narrower.
   All the Bones ofthe Face more delicate.
   Tfie Bodies ofthe Vertebra: longer.
   The Intervertebral Substances  deeper or thicker.
   The upper part  ofthe Thorax in proportion  wider.
   The under part  narrower, or the whole  Thorax less
 conical
   'i lie Cartilages ofthe True Ribs longer in proportion
to the Osseous part and broader  and flatter to support
the Breasts
   The sternum more  raised, and the  whole thorax
more distant from the Pelvis
  The length ofthe Sternum less, and terminating be-
low m a line nearly opposite to the plane ofthe  fourth
pair of Ribs, b.u in the  .\eale Skeleton terminating op-
posite to tue fifth Rib.                         6  *
  The length ofthe Loins greater.
   All the diameters of the Pelvis larger 
                          105
    The Spines and Processes of the Ossa  Innominata
  farther distant from each other.
    The Os Sacrum broader, and turned more backwards
  for enlarging the Cavity ofthe Pelvis.
    The Os Coccygis  more slender,  and turned more
  backwards, and having a greater degree of motion.
    The Ossa Ilia flatter, and more reflected outwards, by
  which the under part of the Abdomen is rendered more
•> capacious.
f   The Notches ofthe Ossa Ilia wider, and the conjoin-
  ed Surfaces of the Ossa  Innominata and Os Sacrum less.
    The space between the-Ossa Pubis larger ; of course
J the  Ligamentous Cartilage of the  Symphysis broader,
i  thourh shorter.
    The Angle  formed by the  Crura of the Ossa Pubis
  with the  Symphysis larger ; that ofthe Male being a-*
} cute, while in the  Female the Angle extends to 80 or
  90 degrees.
    The Tuberosities ofthe Ossa Ischia flatter, and at a
■  greater distance from each other.
    The Brim ofthe Pelvis wider, and of an oval form,cor-
  respontling with the head of a child, and the longest di-
[  ameter extentling between the Ossa Ilia.
,    In the Male the Brim of the Peh is has more of a cir-
>  cular appearance, and lus the greatest extent between
  the Ossa Pubis and Sacrum
    The opening at the uneler part ofthe Pelvis in the  fe-
\ male is much  wider, and of an oval form, but the oval
  tlie reverse of that at the Brim.
    The Foramina O^alia  wider.
i    All the openings at the uneler part ofthe Pelvis, be-
1  ing witler, leave a large passage for the birth ofthe child.
    In consequence of the Pelvis  being wider,  tlie Ace-
  tabula are farther distant from each other, which obli-
  ges women who are very broad at this part of the Body
  to waggle when they walk.
   The  Ossa Femorumare more curved, the neck ofthe
  Thighbone forms a greater Angle with the Body, and
  the Internal Condyle is larger.
   The  feet are smaller.
   The Clavicles less crooked. 
106
  The Scapulae are smaller,  and their Angles more a-
cute.
  The Superior Extremities  shorter.
  The Ossa Carpi narrower,  and
  The Fingers more tapering towards their extremities.
End ofthe First Part. 
PART  II.
OF THE MUSCLES.
OF  THE
MUSCLES IN  GENERAL.
   THE Muscles serve for the motions ofthe different
parts of the Body,  and derive their general name from
their power of contracting.
  The following parts to be observed of Muscles in gen-

  The Cellular Substance, which surrounds the Muscles,
and allows them to move upon each other, and upon the
adjacent parts.        •                 .        .
  The  Cellular Substance,  condensed in certain parts ot
the Body, and giving an appearance of Membrane, for-
merly called Tunica Propria Musculorum.
  Tlie division of a Muscle into
  Origin or Head;—or that which arises from the most
stable or fixed part, and towards which the contraction

" Betty, or thickest part, which swells when the Muscle
is in action : 
108
   Insertion, or termination, which is implanted into the
part to be moved, and which is commonly smaller than
the Origin.

Tlie division of a Muscle into Fleshy and Tendinous parts.  '
   The Fleshy part distinguished by being soft, sensible,  '
generally of a red colour,—from  the  great quantity of
blood in it,— and possessing contractility.               '
   The Fleshy part having numerous Blood-vessels, Lynx-  i
phatics, and  Nerves                                     I
   Division of Muscles into Rectilineal,—as in the Sar-  ]
torius ;—Simpie Penniform, as in the Peroneus Longus ;
—Complete Penniform, as in the Rectus Femoris ;—Com,'
pound Penniform, as in the fore-part ofthe Soleus ,-—and  -J
Radiated, as in the Pectoralis Major ,-—Hollow, as in the
Heart, Intestines, BI udder of Urine, iSfc
   The particular names of Muscles, taken from their
shape, size, situation, direction, composition, use, and at-
tachment.                                              ,
   Tendon, extinguished from the Fleshy part, by  being  .
generally smaller, firmer, stronger;—of a white glisten.
ing colour, having no contractility, and little or no sensibi-  <
lit) in the sound state.
   Tendons having very few Blood-vessels, and no evident  ■
Nerves.
   The use of Tenelons,  to  connect Muscles  to Bones,
and take up less room,  &.c.
   The Appendages ot Muscles, viz.
   Aponeuroses, or Fascix,   (the  former  name derived
from the parts having been mistaken for nerves) are the
Tendons  expantled  upon a wide Surface, and serving
to give insertion to  Muscular Fibres,  to  keep them '"
their proper situation, and  brace tJiein in their action.
   Annular Ligaments, to keep Tendons from starting.
   Trochlex, or Pulleys, to alter the direction of Tendons.
   Bursx Mucosa:, placed uhere Tenelons plav  over hard
Substances,  and serving to contain Synovia, and prevent
Abrasion.
t 
109
  Muscles ofthe iNTEGUMenfs ofthe Craswm,
               and ofthe Ete-lius.

               Occipito-Frontalis,
     Or Occipitalis and F.-mtalis, or Epicranius, (Jfc.
 '  Origin -. Fleshy from near the middle of the upper ar-
 ched Ridge ofthe Occipital Bone, Tendinous from the
 extremity of that Ridge, where it joins the Temporal
 Bone ; it arises after the same manner on the other side.
 Trom the Fleshy origins, and also from between them,
 a Tentlinous expansion is  continued along the upper
 part of the  Cranium, adhering firmly to the skin, and
 but loosely to  the Pericranium.—At the upper part of
 the Fore-head it becomes Fleshy, and, descending with
 straight Fibres, has its
   Insertion in the  Skin and  parts untler it belonging to
 the Eye-brows.
   From the under and middle part ofthe Muscle, a Slip
 is continued down upon the  root ofthe  Nose, to be con-
 nected with  the Compressor Naris, and Levator Labii
 Superioris, et Alac Nasi.
  Action of the Muscle ? To move  all that part of the
 Skin which covers it, and particularly the Skin of the
 Brow and Eye brows.
  The Slip upon the Nose may either assist the Nasal
 Muscles connected with it,  or antagonize the Occipilo-
 rrontalis.'
              Corrugator  Su/iercilii.
  Oiigin :  From the internal angular Process ofthe Os
 Frontis, above the joining of that Bone with the O* Nasi,
  From that it  runs upwards  and outwards, in the di-
rection ofthe Superciliary Ridge, and behind the infe-
rior part ofthe  Frontal Muscle.
  Insertion:  Intothe inner part of the Occipito-Fronta-
lis and Orbicularis Palpebrarum, where these tuo Mu-
cles join each other.
  Action ■ 'To assist its fellow in draw ing the Lye-brows
downwards and inwards, and corrugating or wrinkling
the Skin between them into longitudinal folds.
       VOL.  I.            G 
110
        Orbicularis  Oculi, or Palpebrarum.
  Origin: From the  Orbitar Process of the superior
Maxillary Bine ; from the internal Angular Process of
the Frontal Bone ;  and, by a small round Tendon, from
the Nasal Process  of the  superior Maxillary  Bone.
  From these origins the Muscle passes outv aids,  un-
der the  Skin  of the  Eyt-lids,  surrounding  the Orbit
in a circular direction, extending somewhat  beyond it,
and covering the upper part ofthe Cheek.
  Tlv  outer Surface of the Muscle adheres to the Skin
ofthe Eye-lids;  its upper and inner Edge is  intimately
connected with the Frontal and Corrugator Muscles.
  Action: To close the  Eye by bringing the Eye-lids
tot;e'i. r, to press the Ball ofthe Eye inwards, and  act
upon the Lacrymal Organs, so as to assist them in  the
proeluction nr.d direction  ofthe Tears.
  Musculus Ciliaris of some Authors,—nameel from its
situation near the Cilia or Eye-lashes,—is that part of
the O; biculars Ocuh which covers  the Cartilages of
the Eje-lids, anel is ren arkably thin.
   A Fleshy Slip frequently fusses down from the under
and outer part of  the Orbicularis, to join the Levator
Labii Inferior!s et  Alac Nasi.  When  present it may
draw the parts to which it is attached a little towards
each other.
           Levator Palpebral Sufierioris.
  Origin: From the margin of the  Foramen Opticum
ofthe Sphenoid Bone.
  It runs forvv.irds within the  Orbit, over the Levator
Qcuii, where it bee*.ornes  gradually broader,  its ; rtc.-rior
extrem ty passing  under the Orbicularis Palpebrarum.
  Iisertion : By  a  broad  thin Tendon into  nearh the
wh le l-ngih ofthe Cartilage ofthe  upper Eve-lid.
  Action.- To open the Eye by raising the upper Eye-
lscles common to the  Head and External Ear.
     MtolleuH Jurem, or Su/icrior -Juris.
Origin: By a broad Tendinous expansion, iVom  the
"dun of  Uc  0,eipit.. Frontalis.  It goes down over
i  Aponeurosis of the Temporal Muscle 
                        Ill
  In its passage  it forms a thin fleshy Slip, which be-
comes gradually narrower, and has its
  Insertion in the upper part of the root of the Carti-
lage ofthe Ear.
  Action .-  To give tension to the part into which it is
inserted, and, in some persons, to raise the Ear.
                  interior Quit's.
  Origin:  Thin and  Membranous, near the posterior
part ofthe Zygoma.
  The middle part is mixed with Fleshy Fibres.
  Insertion:  By a narrow Tendon into the  back-part of
the beginning of the  Helix
  Action :  To stretch that part ofthe Ear to which it is
fixed.
      Letrahcntes jiuriv, or Posterior Auris.
  Origin .•  By two, and sometimes  by three  distinct
Mi.icles, from the upper  anel outer  part  of the Mas-
toid  Process : Passing forwards, they have their
  Insertion, by  small Tendons in the  back-part e>f  the
Concha.
  Action :  To stretch the Concha, and, in some persons,
to draw the Ear back.
       Muscles ofthe Nose and Mouth.

                 Compressor JYaris.
  Origin :  By a narrow beginn'ug  from the Ala Nasi,
where it is connected with the Levator Labii superio-
ris et Alse Nasi ;  it spreads into a number of thin sc;it-
leiv.l F:bre-, which cross the Wing, and run tow.-rds
the Dorsum of the Nose, whei" it joins its fe'.'.ou .
  Insertion'. Into the anterior extremitv of  the:  Nasal
Bones, ami to the Slip which descends irom the Frontal
Muscle.
  Action:  To pros the Ala towarels the Septum, as in
imellmg ;  or if the Fibres in the frontal Muscle which
are connected to it act, thev  pull the Alu outwards.—
It also corrugates the Skin of the  Nose, and assists in
expressing certain passion*. 
112
        Levator Labii Su/ierioria et Al<c Kasi.
   Origin :■ By two thin Fleshy Slips j the first from the
 external part ofthe  Orbitar Process, and the second'
 from the upper part ofthe Nasal Process ofthe bupe-
 rior Maxillarv Bone.
   Insertion of the first part ofthe Muscle into the Up.
 per Lip, and of  the  second  into the Upper Lip and
 Wing ofthe Nose.
   Action :  To raise the  Upper  Lip, in opening the.
 Mouth, and to dilate  the Nostril.

      Depressor Labii Sufierioris et Ala JXasi.
   Origin: Thin  and Fleshy,  from the Alveoli of the
 Dentes Incisivi and Caninus of the Upper Jaw, and run-
 ning upwards, at the side of the furrow  of the Lip, it
 has its
   Insertion in the Upper Lip, and root ofthe Ala Nasi.
   Action : To draw  the Upper Lip and Ala Nasi down-
 wards.

 Levator Anguli  Oris, or Levator Labiorum Com-
                munis, or Caninus.
   Origin.- Thin and Fleshy, from the superior Maxil-
 lary Bone, immediately under the Foramen Infra-Or-
 bitarium, and running down  deeper and farther out
 than the Levator Labii Supeiioris ; it has its
  Insertion into the angle of the Mouth, where it joins
 with its antagonist.
   Action : To raise  the corner of the Mouth,—as in
 expressing the cheerful passions.

 Depressor Labii Inferioris, or Quadratua Gena.
  Origin : Broad and  Fleshy, from the  under part of
the Lower Javv, at the side ofthe Chin :—from thence
it runs obliquely  upwards and inwards, till it becomes
contiguous to its fellow in the middle ofthe Lip.
  Insertion:  Into one  half of the edge of the Under
 Lip.
  Action:  To assist  in opening the Mouth, by depres-
sing the Under Lip, and pulling it a little outwards. 
113
   Levator Labii Inferioris, or Levator Menti.
  Origin:  From the roots ofthe Alveoli ofthe Dentes
Incisures and Caninus ofthe Lower Jaw
  Insertion :  Into the Under Lip, and Skin ofthe Chin.
  Action : To raise the parts into which it is inserted.

De/iressor Anguli Oris,  or Musculus Triangularis.
  Origin: Broad and Fleshy, from the under edge of
die Lower Jaw, at the sitle ofthe Chin.—It runs over
the origin of the  Depressor Labii  Inferioris ; and be-
coming gradually  narrower, has its
  Insertion into the angle of the Mouth, anel intermixes
with the Levator  Anguli Oris.
  Action :  To depress the corner of the Mouth,—as in
expressing the angry passions.
               Zygomaticus Major.
   Origin : Fleshy, from the Os Mala?,  near the Zygo-
matic Suture ;  and descending obliquely  forward,  it
has  its
   Insertion into the angle of the Mouth, its Fibres in-
termixing with those of the Depressor  Anguli Oris, and
 Orbicularis Oris.
               Zygomaticus Minor.
   Origin: Higher on  the Os Maize than  the former
 Mitscle.  It takes the same  course, but is much more
 slender, and lies before it.
   Insertion t Into the Upper Lip, along with the Leva-
 tor Anguli Oris.
   Action : To  raise the corner of the Mouth, and draw
 it obliquely outwards.
   'This Muscle is often a wanting.
   By the  frequent action ofthe  Zygomatic  Muscles,
 that Furrow is formed which extends between the out-
 er corners of  the Nose  and Mouth,  and which  is so
 conspicuous in the Face of a person advanced in life.

   Buccinator, or Trumpeter, or Retractor Anguli
                        Oris.
   Origin : From  a Ridge of the Lower Jaw, extending
 between  the last Dens Molaris and Coronoid Process oi
                        G  2 
114
 the Lower Jaw;—also from the Upper Jaw, between the
 last Dens Molaris and Pterygoid Process ofthe Sphe-
 noid Bone.  From thence going feirwards with straight
 Fibres, and adhering closely  to  the  Membrane which  .
 lines the Mouth, it has its
   Insertion into the corner of the Mouth, with the Or-
 bicularis Oris.
   Action .- To draw the angle of the Mouth backwards
 and outwards, and to contract its  Cavity by pressing  ]
 the Cheek inwards, by which the food is thrust between
 the Teeth in the Time of manducation.—It is likewise
 active in blowing wind-instruments—as a Trumpet—  ]
 from which it has obtained its name.
     Orbicularis Oris, or Sphincter Labiorum,
   Is a complete Sphincter surrounding the Mouth, and   I
 composing the principal part of the Lips,  and in a
 great measure formed by the  Muscles which terminate   i
 in it.— At the corners ofthe Mouth, the  Fibres decus-   „
 sate each other,  so as to make  it resemble two semi-
 circular Muscles, from  which it has been named by t^
 some, Semi-Orbicularis Superior, and Semi-Orbicularis
 Inferior.                                              '
  Action:  To shut the Mouth, and to counteract the
 different Muscles inserted  into it.
  Nasalis Labii Superioris, of Albinus, may be consi-   '
 dered as part of  the  former  Muscle, running up to be
 connected to the Septum Nasi, and serving as a Leva-
tor ofthe Upper Lip, or a Depressor ofthe under part
ofthe Nose.
        MUSCLES of the LOWER  JAW.
             Aponeurosis Temporalis.
  Previous to the description ofthe Temporal Muscle,
it is necessary  to take  notice of a strong Tendinous
Membrane, which arises from the Bones which give
origin to the upper semi-circular part of the Muscle,
and descending over it, is fixed to the Zygoma.—It gives
origin to part of the Temporal Muscle," and braces it in
its action. 
115
                    Temporalis,
  Origin; In a semi-circular manner, Fleshv, from the
lower half of the Parietal and Temporal Fossa of the
Frontal Bones ; from the Squamous part of the Tem-
poral, and Temporal Plate of  the Sphenoid Bones—It
arises likewise from the Aponeurosis which  covers it :
From these different origins the Fibres descendTike Ra-
dii ,and the Muscle changes into a strong Tendon, which
passes under the Jugtim, to have  its
  Insertion into the whole of the Coronoid  Process of
the Lower Jaw, which  it incloses as in a sheath.
  Action: To pull the Lower Jaw  upwards and back-
wards  against the Upper Jaw,—and thereby it becomes
useful in biting, chewing, &c.

                    Masseter.
  Origin: By strong Tendinous and Fleshy Fibres from
the superior Maxillary Bone, where it joins the Os Ma-
la, and from the whole  length of the under and inner
edge of the Zygoma, —the outer  part of the Muscle
slanting  backwards, the inner part forwards, and  in
some measure decussating the other.  In its descent,
it covers and conceals the Coronoid Process and under
end ofthe Temporal Muscle, and has its
  Insertion into the angle of  the Lower Jaw, and  from
that upwards, to the outside  of the Coronoid Process.
  Action: To raise the  Lower Jaw.

         Pterygoideus Interr.us, or Major.
  Origin ■■ From  the Fossa Pterygoidea of the Sphe-
noiel and Palate Bones : It passes downwards and out-
wards, and has its
  Insertion into the  Cervix and Capsular Ligament of
the  Lower  Jaw, and  it is  continued   as far as the
Groove for the inferior Maxillar) Nerve.
  Action: To raise the Jaw,  and draw  it obliquely to-
wards the opposite side.
        Pterygoideus Externusx or Minor.
  Origin  ■■ From the outer side of the  Pterygoid Pro-
cess of the  Sphenoid  Bone ; from the  Tuberosity  of
the superior Maxillary Bone, and from  the root of the 
                       116
Temporal Process ofthe Sphenoid Bone.   From these
origins it pas.es, almost horizontally, outwards and a
little backwards.
  Insertion;  Intothe Cervix and  Capsular Ligament
of the Lower Jaw.
  Action :  To pull the Lower Jaw to the opposite  side,
and, if both Muscles act, to bring it forwards, so as to
make the Fore Te-cth project beyond those ofthe Up-
per Jaw.  Th»* Muscle, in its different motions, acts al-
so upon the Interarticular Cartilage.
  Muscles on the  Fore and Lateral Part of .
                    the Neck.
                Platysma Myoides.
   Origin: By a number of separate Fleshy Slips, from
 the Cellular Substance, which covers the upper parts  j
 ofthe Pectoral and Deltoid Muscles—In their ascent,   ;
 they unite to form a thin Muscul.tr expansion, similar   ,.
 to the Cutaneous Muscle of Quadrupeds,  which runs
 obliquely upwards along the side of the Neck, adhe-   t
 ring to the Skin.
   Insertion : Into the side ofthe  Lower Jaw,—the De-
 pressor  Anguli Oris,—and into the Skin which covers   1
 the untler part of the  Masseter Muscle and Parotid   ',
 Gland.
   Action: To assist in depressing the Skin of the Cheek,
 the corner of the Mouth, and the Lower Jaw, and,
 when the Jaws are shut, to raise all that part of the
 Skin connected with it under the  Lower  Jaw.

  Sterno-Cleide-Mastoidcus, or  Sterno-Mastoideu*.
   Origin : From the top of the Sternum, and from the
 anterior end ofthe Clavicle, by two elistinct heads.   A
 little above the Clavicle, these unite to  form,a strong
 Muscle, which runs obliquely upwards and outwards,
 tlie greater part of it being covered by the Ciitaneus
 Muscle.
  Intey'ton :  By a thick strong  Tendon,  into the  Mas- ' }A
toid i'n.cess, which it surrounds; and becoming thin-i{H
 ner, the insert ion extendi  as fa-  as the Lambdoid Su- .  J
lure.                                                 \ 
                        \\7
  Action :  To turn the head to one side, and  assist  in
rolling it.  When both Muscles act, they bow the Head.
 Muscles situated between the  Os Hyoides and
                      Trunk.
                  Sterno-Hyoidru*.
   Origin -. From the upper and inner-part of the Ster-
 num, and from the aeljaccnt parts of the Clavicle and
 Cartilage of thefir.st Rib ; it ascends upon the fore-part
 ofthe Trachea and following Muscle, to have its
   Irsertion into the  Base of the OS Hyoides.
   Action : To depress the  Os Hyoides.
                Sterno- Thyroideus,
   Origin: From the upper and inner part of the Ster-
 num, and pai-th from the Cartilage ofthe first Rib ;—
 it runs along the fi>re-part  and side ofthe Trachea and
 Tlivroid Gland, and h.-s its  •
   Insertion into the under  and lateral part of the Thy-
 roid Cartilage
   Action : To draw the Larvnx downwards.
        Thyro-ffyo'drus, or Hyi-Thyroideus.
   Origin : Where the  former Muscle terminates, hav-
 ing the -.ppearance of being continued from it.
   Insertion : Into part of the Base,  and almost all the
 Count ofthe Os Hwiides.
   Action: To depress the  Os Hyoides, or to raise the
 Thyroid Cartilage.
                  Gmo-ffyoid/us.
   Origin : From the superior Costa ofthe Scapula, rear
 lh; semilunar Notch ; it goes obliquely upwards and
 forwards, anel  is of a  very slender  form.  Under the
 Sterno Mastoidens, it becomes Tendinous, and again
growing  Fleshy, has its
  Insertion into the Base ofthe Os Hyoides, at the side
ofthe Sterno-Hyoideus.
  Aci:i/i: i o depress ihe  Os Hoicks, and  pull it to
^ue side ; or when both aet, to dv.uv it iO.icctly down. 
H8
Muscles situated between the Lower  Jaw and
                  Os Hyoidfs.

    DiCASTRitus, or Biventer Maxillx Inferioris.
  Origin : By its posterior Belly,  from the  Groove at
the root ofthe Mastoid Process of the Temporal Bone,
it  runs downwards and forwards,  and forms a  strong
round Tendon, which  passes through the Stylo-Hyoi-
deus  Muscle ; it is then fixed by a Ligament  to the
Os Hyoides, and, having received an addition of Ten-
dinous and the Muscular Fibres, runs obliquely up-
wards  and forwards,  forming another Fleshy Belly,
which has its
   Insertion into a rough sinuosity at the under part of
the Symphysis ofthe Lower Jaw.
   Action  : To  open the Mouth by pulling the Lower
Jaw downwards and backwards ;  and,  when the Jaws
are shut, to raise the Os Hyoides, and of consequence
the Throat,—as in swallowing.

                  Mylo- Hyoideus.
   Origin : Fleshy, broad,  and thin  from the inside of
the Lower Jaw, between the last Dens Molaris and the
middle ofthe Chin, where it joints its fellow.  It runs
down behind the digastricus, and has its
   Insertion into the Body of the Os Hvoides, and joined
to its fellow by the intervention of a white  Tendinous
line.
   Action .■ To pull the Os  Hyoides forwards, upwards,
 and to a side.

                  Genio-Hyoidcit3.
   Origin : From  a Tubercle on  the  under and inner
 part of the Symphisis ofthe Lower Jaw, bv a slender
 beginning, which  by  degrees  becomes broader, and
 running down, has its

 fonneT Muscle*.1116 ^ °f '^ °% "y°tt«, under the
   Action : To draw the Os Hyoides towards the Chin
 when the Jaws  are shut ; or the Chin towards the S 
119
                Genio-Hyo-Glossusf
  Origin : From the  same Tubercle  with the former
Muscle : Its Fibres, spread out like a  Fan,  and have
their
  Insertion into the  whole  length of the Tongue, anel
Base ofthe Os Hyoides.
  Action : According to the direction of  its  Fibres,—.
to draw the  Tongue forwards, backwards, and down-
wards, and to  make the Os Hyoides advance towartls
the Chin.
                   Hyo-Glossus.
  Origin .- From the whole length of one half of the Os
Hyoides : Ii runs upwards, and has i's
  Insertion into the side of the Tongue, near  the Stylo
Glossus.
  Action : To  depress  the edges  of the Tongue, and
thereby to render its upper Surface convex.
                    Lingualis.
  Origin .■ From the root  of the Tongue laterally ; it
advances  between the Cenoi-Hyo-Glossus, and  H)0-
Glossus, and has its
  Ihsertion'wto the Tip ofthe Tongue.
  Action .■ To  raise the point of the Tongue ;  to con-
tract its substance,  and bring it backwards.
                 Crico- Thyroideus.
  Origin : From the side and fore-part of  the Cricoid
Cartilage it runs obliquely  upw ards, and has  its
  Insertion by  two  portions ; the  one  intothe  under
part of the Thyroid Cartilage, the  other into its infe-
rior Cornu.
  Action : To depress and pull  forwards the Thyroid
Cartilage, or to raise and draw backwards the Cricoid
Cartilage.
                 Stylo- Glossus.
  Origin : From the Styloid Process of the Temporal
Bone, and from a Ligament which connects that pro-
cess to the angle-fif the Lower Jaw ;—govs downwards
and foru ards,—of a slender form,—to have its
  inset tion into the loot of the Tongue, near the H\o- 
120
Glossus : It runs  along its side, and is insensibly lost
near its tip.
  Action :  To draw the Tongue backwards and to one
side.
                  Stylo Hyoidcua.

  Origin :  From the under half of the Styloid Process;
it  goes downwards and  forwards, and, after splitting
for the  Passage ofthe  Digastric Muscle, has its
  Insertion into the  Os Hyoides,  at the junction of the
Base and Cornu.
  Action : To  pull the Os Hyoides to  one side,  and a
little upwards.
               Stylo-Hyoidcua Alter.
  When present, it is a more slender Muscle than the
former, but, like it,  has the same Origin, Insertion,
and Action.
                 Stylo-Pharyngeua.
   Origin :  From the  root  of the Styloid Process ; it
goes rlownwards and forwards, to have its
   Insertion into the side of the Pharynx, along which it
expands.   It is  also fixed to the back-part ofthe Thy-
roid Cartilage.
   Action :  To dilate and raise the Pharynx, and there-
by prepare it  to receive the morsel from the Mouth.—
 It  at the same time lifts the Thyroid Cartilage.

          Circumfiexus, or Tenaor Palati.
   Origin :  From Spinous Process of the Sphenoid Bone,
 and from the osseous part ofthe Eustachian Tube.  It
 runs along the Pterygoieleiis Internus, passes over the
 Hook of the Internal Plate  ofthe Pterygoid  Process,
 and plays  on it by a round Tendon, as on a  Pulley, and,
 spreading out into  a broad Membrane, has its
    Insertion into the Velum  Palati, and semilunar edge
 of the Os Palati, exteneling as far as the Suture which
 joins the two Bones : Generally some of  its  posterior
 Fibres ;oin the  Constrictor  Piiaryngis  Superior,  and
 Palato-Pharyngeus.
    Action .-To Stretch the Velum, to draw it downwards
 and to a side towards the IT,■■■». 
121
       Levator Palati,  or Levator Palati Mollis.
    Origin : From the point of the Pars  Petrosa of the
  Temporal Bone, and also from the Eustachian Tube ;
  from these parts it descends, and has its
    Insertion, by a broad expansion,  into the Velum Pa-
  lati,  extending as far as the root ofthe Uvula, and uni-
  ting  with its fellow.
    Action :  To raise the Velum in the time of swallow-
  ing,  and press it  against the Nose, so as to prevent
  the food or drink from  passing there.

             Constrictor Isthmi Faucium.
    Origin :  From the side of the root of the Tongue ;
  It runs in the doubling of the Skin, which forms the an-
  terior Arch of the Palate.
    Insertion : Into the middle of the  Velum Palati, at
  the root of the Uvula,  where it is connected with its
  fellow.
    Action :  It draws the  Palate and Root ofthe Tongue
  towards each  other,  and thereby shuts the opening in-
  to  the Fauces.
                Palato-Vharyngeus.
    Origin : From the  middle of the  Velum Palati, at
  the root  of the  Uvula,  anel from the  insertion of the
  Constrictor Isthmi Faucium and Circumflexus Palati.
  The Fibres proceed  within the posterior Arch of the
  Palate, and run to the  upper and lateral part of the
  Pliannx, where they spread, and  mix with  those of
  the s'tylo-Phai-yngeus.
   Insertion  : Into the  edge ofthe  upper and back part
  ofthe Thyroid Cartilage, some of its Fibres being lost
  between  the Membrane and inferior  Constrictors  of
  the Pharynx.
   Action : It draws the  Velum and Uvula  downwards,
  tlie Larynx and Pharynx being at the same time raised.
  Along with the Constrictor  Superior and Tciigue,  it
  Sssista in shutting the passage into the Nostrils, and, in
  shallowing, it conveys the  food from the Fauces into
*the Pharynx.
          Salpingo-Pharyngeua of Albinus.

   Is composed of a small portion of the former Muscle, 
                       122
which arises from the Eustachian  Tube, and which,
when acting, may affect it.

                 Azugos Uvulx.
  Origin : From the  posterior extremity of the longi-
tudinal Palate Suture :  It runs  in the midelle of the
Velum Palati,  and goes through the whole length of
the Uvula, atlhering  in  its passage to the Circumflex!  j'
Muscles                                            ' |
  Insertion : Into the point ofthe Uvula.
  Action : To shorten the Uvula.
Muscles situated upon the Back-Part of the
                 Pharynx.
          Constrictor Pharyngis Inferior.            .
  Origin :■ From the sides of the Thyroid and Cricoid  ;r
Cartilages: The superior Fibres, running obliquely i-m
upwards, cover the under part ofthe following  Muscle, " ^
and terminate in  a  point,  the inferior Fibres run'more   *•_
transversely, and cover the beginning of the  Esopha-

  Insertion:  Into its fellow, by the medium of a longi-   1
tiidinal Tendinous line in the middle of the back-part   >
of the Pharynx.                                      [
  Action -. To compress the lower part ofthe Pharynx.   V

          Conetrictor Pharyngis Medina.
  Oriein  : From  the Appendix and  Cornu of the Os
Hvoides,  and also  from the Ligament which  connects
the Cornu to the Thyroid Cartilage.  The Muscle, in
its passage, spreads out, and terminates in a point a-
bove and below,  the upper part covering the following
 Muscle.
   Insertion: Into the Cuneiform Process of  the Occi--
pital Bone, before the Foramen Magnum, and to its
fellow on the opposite side by a Tendinous line, simi-
lar to the former Muscle.
   Action : To compress the middle and upper part of
the Pharynx,                           rr   * 
123
          Conatrictor Pharyngia Superior.

  Origin :  From the Cuneiform  Process ofthe Occipi-
tal  Bone, before  the'Foramen  Magnum; from  the
Pterygoid Process ofthe Sphenoid Bone, and from both
Jaws, near the last Dentes Molares :  It  is likewise
connected with  the  Buccinator Muscle, and with the
root of the Tongue and Palate.—From these Origins,
it runs almost horizontally, and  has its
  Insertion into its fellow, by the intervention of a Ten-
dinous line, as in the case ofthe  former Muscle.
  Action :  To compress the upper part ofthe Pharynx,
and, with the assistance  of the other Constrictors, to
thrust the Food down to the Esophagus.
           Muscles ofthe Glottis.

        Crico-Arytenoideus Posticus.
  Origin : Broad and  Fleshy, from  the back-part  of
the Cricoid Cartilage.
  Insertion :  By a narrow extremity into the back-part
ofthe Base ofthe Arytenoid Cartilage.
  Action: To pull back  the Arytenoid Cartilage, by
which the Ligament ofthe Glottis is made tense, and
the Glottis itself longer.
          Crico-Arytenoideus Lateralia.
  Origin :  From the  side  of the Cricoid  Cartilage,
where it is covered by the Thyroid.                ..
  Insertion :  Into the side of the Base of the Arytenoid
Cartilage.                              .   .,   A
  Action :  To ooen the Glottis, by separating the Ary-
tenoid Cartilages, and, with  them,  the Ligaments ot
the Glottis.
               Thyro-Arytenoideu8.

  Origin :  From the under and back-part of the middle
ofthe Thyroid Cartilage, from which it runs backwards
and a little upwards, upon the side  of die Glottis and
Ventricle of the Larynx. 
124
  Insertion : Into the fore-part of the Arytenoid Car-
tilage.
  Action :  It pulls the  Arytenoid  Cartilage  outwards
and forwards,  and so widens the  Glott'iB, and relaxes
its Ligaments.—It may also affect the Ventricle ofthe
Larynx.
        Arytenoideua  Obliquus,  or Minor.
  Origin :  From the root of one of the Arytenoid Car-
tilages ; crossing its fellow obliquely, it has its
  Insertion near the point ofthe other Arytenoid Carti-
lage.
  Action :   To  draw  the Arytenoid Cartilages towards
each other, and assist in  closing the Aperture of the
Glottis.
  N.  B. Frequently one ofthe oblique Arytenoid Mus-
cles is a wanting.
       Arytenoideus Transversus, or  Major.
  ^Origin :  From almost the whole length of the back.
part of one ofthe Arytenoid Cartilages : It goes across
to have its
  Insertion in a similar manner, in the other Arytenoid
Cartilage.
  Action :  To close the  Glottis,  by drawing the  Ary-
tenoid Cartilages and  Ligaments of the  Glottis  to-
gether.
                Thyro-Epiglottideua.
  Origin :  By  a few  scattered Fibres, from the Thyroid
Cartilage.
  Insertion : Into the side ofthe Epiglottis.
  Actim :  To assist its fellow in drawing the Epiglottis
towards the Glottis.
              Aryteno-Epiglottideus.
  Origin :  By a number of small Fibres, from the Ary-
tenoid Cartilage : It runs along  the outer side of  the
external opening of the Glottis.
  Insertion : Into the Epiglottis, along with the former
Muscle.
  Action :  To assist its fellow in drawing the Epiglottis
immediately down  upon the Glottis.
   It is counteracted by the elas icity of the Epiglottis.
   N.  B.  The two last mentioned Muscles are obscurely
 teen, excepting in robust Bodies. 
125
MCscles situated on the Anterior and Lateral
             Parts ofthe Abdomkn,
       Obliqjjus  Descendens Externus,
        Or Obliquus Externus Abdominis.
  Origin :  In a serrated manner, from the lower edge
ofthe eight inferior Ribs, near their Cartilages.  The
Serrx intermix with  the  indentations of the Serratus
Major Amicus, and it is commonly connected with the
Pectornlis Major. Intercostales, and Latissimus Dorsi,
the last of which covers the edge of a  portion of it, ex-
tending from the  twelfth  Rib to the Spine of the Os
 Ilium—From  these  Origins  the  Fibres run obliquely
 downwards and forwards, and teiminate  in an  Apo-
 neurosis,  which, near its margin, is firmly  connected
 with the Aponeurosis of the following Muscle, where
 it forms a curved line, called Lined Semilunaris From
 this the  Fibres are continued in  the same direction
 with the Fleshy Fibres, to the mieldleofthe Abdomen.
   Insertion : Into its fellow ofthe opposite side, by the
 medium  of the Linea Alba,  which extends from  the
 Cartilugo-Ensiformis to the  Ptibes, is  formed by the
 meeting ofthe Tendons  of the oblique and transverse
 Muscles ofthe Abdomen, and is perforated in the mid-
 dle by the Umbilicus,—originally a passage for  the Um-
 bilical Cord, now formed into a Cicatrix.
    The under part  of the Tendon divides into two co-
  lumns, which leave  an oval space between them, culled
  Ri,g of the External oblique Muscle, for the passage
  ofthe Spermatic  Cord in the Male, in whom it is lar-
  ger than in the Female, where it gives passage to the
  round Ligament of the Uterus.            .
    The Muscle is  also inserted into the anterior half of
  the Spine ofthe Os Ilium,  from  the superior anterior
  Spinous  Process of which it is stretched.  Tendinous,
  to the Crest ofthe  Os P..!..s.  Tins part of the T endon,
  which P^ses  over the  Flexor Muscles and the great-
  IW-vcssels ofthe Thigh,  is termed Poupart s or Ful-
  topiuis Ligament,  or The Inguinal Ligament.
     Y, om the under part of thh- Tendon a th.n expansion
  is ,«nt downwards, and is lost in the  Aponeurosis oi the
  Thigh. 
126
   Action : To support and com press the Abdominal Vis-
 cera, assist the Evacuations, draw  down the Ribs, and
 bend the Trunk forwards, or obliquely to one side.

 Obliqitus Ascendcns Internus, or Obliquua Internus
                     Abdominia,
   Origin:  From  the. back-part of  the Os Sacrum ;—
 from the Spinous Processes  of the three lowest Lum-
 bar Vertebra:, by a Tendon common to it and the Ser-
 ratus Posticus Inferior ;—from the  whole length ofthe
 Spine of the Os Ilium ;—and from the inside of Pou-
 part's Ligament,  at the middle of which  it sends off
 the Cremaster Muscle.—From these  Origins the Fi-
 bres are disposed in a  radiated manner ;  but the great-
 er part of them run in a slanting tlirection upwards.—
 At the Linea Semilunaris, the Muscle becomes Tendi-
 nous, and adheres, firmly to  the  Tendon of the Obli-
 quus Externus : Here its Tendon divides into two Lay-
 er?.  The anterior Layer, with the greater part ofthe
 inferior portion of the  posterior Layer, joins tlie Ten-
 don of the external Oblique,  and goes over the Rectus
 Muscle, to be inserted into the whole length ofthe Li-
 nea Alba.  The posterior Layer joins the Tendon of
 the Transversalis, and goes  behind the  Rectus ; and
 this union is  continued down, till it  reaches about half
 way between the Umbilicus anel Os Pubis.   Lower than
 this, only a few'scattered Fibres ofthe posterior Layer
 are to be found behind the Rectus, the principal part
 of it passing  before the Muscle, to be inserted into the
 Linea Alba.
  Insertion ofthe Muscle in general: Into the Cartila-
 ges of all the False Ribs, the'Cartilago-Ensiformis, and
 whole length ofthe Linea Alba.
  Action: To assist the former Muscle.  But it bends
the Body in the same direction with the Obliqitus Ex-
ternus ofthe  opposite side.

      Transversalis, or Transversus Abdominis.
  Origin: Fleshy,  from the inner Surface ofthe Carti-
lages of the six or seven lower Ribs, where it inter-.
mixes with the digitatmns ofthe Diaphragm, and with
the Intercostal Muscles ; from the transverse Processes 
127
ofthe twelfth Dorsal and four superior Lumbar Verte-
brae ;—from the  whole inner edge of the Spine of the
Os Ilium ;  and anterior to this,  it is connected t<> Xha
under Edge ofthe external oblique Muscle.  At the Li-
nea Alba,  the  Muscle  becomes Tendinous, and the
Tendon  is  continued across, adhering to the. internal
oblique Muscle, in the manner already mentioned.—In
the whole of \ti course,  it is closely connected to the
Surface of the Peritoneum.
  Insertion  ; Into the  Cartilago Ensifcwwia, and Linea
Alba.                            '
  Action: To support, and imroiJieMlfroowy ga*the
Abdominal Bowels.
                  Rectus Abdomnzm
  Origin : Tendinous from the fore ao^ttppee-part of
the Symphysis of the Ossa Pubis ;—it soon becomes
Fleshy, and runs upwards in form of a fiat band, tbe
whole length of, and parallel to, the Linea Albea.
  In its course it  is divided by three Tendinous inter-
sections, at and  above  the Umbilicus; and there is
generally a half-intersection below it.
  These seldom penetrate through the whole thickness
 Of  its substance ; they  adhere  firmly to the.anu.rior
 part  of the sheath which incloses the  Mueel'c, but
 ■lightly to  the posterior Layer.
   Insertion : Into  the Cartilages of the thxee inferior
 True Ribs  and extremity ofthe Sternum ;  it frequent-
 ly intermixes with the under edge of the large Pectoral
 Muscle.
   Action :  To compress the fore-part ofthe Abdomen^
 to draw down the Ribs in Expiration, and to bend the
 Body forwards,  or to raise the Pelvis.  By means of
 its Sheath  and  Tendinous mtei sections, it is kept in its
 place, and allowed to act more equally.
                   Pyramidalis.

   Origin :  By a broad Base, from the upper part of the-
 Syinphvsis ofthe Ossa Pubis ;-It runs upwards withm
 the same  Sheath with the Rectus,  and tapering to a
 point in its ascent, it has its
   I; tertian between  the  Pubis and Umbilicus in the
 tinea Alba, aud inner edge ofthe Rectus Muscle.
VOL  I.
W 
128
  Action : Tq assist  the  under part of the  Rectus In
draw ing"'down "tlie Ribs, or1 in compressing the under
part of the Abdomen.
  It is frequently  a  wanting in "both sides, and then
the untler end of the Rectus is larger, as if  to supply
its place.
 Muscles ofthe Male Parts c/Generation
                   and Anus.

                   Cremaster.

  Origin :  From the under edge ofthe internal oblique
Muscle ofthe Abdomen :  Passing through the Ring of
tlie External oblique, it surrounds the Spermatic Cord
as far as the Testicle ;  there the Fibres separate and
expand, and have their                        ,
  Insertion, into the Tunica Vaginalis Testis, and Cel-
lular substance of the -Scrotum.
  Action :  To  suspentl  and elevate, and to compress 1
and evacuate the Testicle.
      Erector Penia,  or Iachio-Covernbaua.
  Origin :  Tendinous, from the inner side of the Tu-
berosity of the Os Ischium ;—it runs upwards, fleshy,
increasing in breadth, and embracing the whole Crus
ofthe Penis.
  Insertion : By a thin  Tendon, into the elastic Mem-
brane which covers  the  Corpora Cavernosa Penis,  as
far up as the union ofthe Crura.
  Action : To  compress the Crus Penis, and push the
"Blood from it into the fore-part of the Corpora Caver-
nosa, in the time of its distention.  It is likewise sup-
posed by some to give a proper direction to the Penis.

     Accelerator Urinx,  or Ejaculator Seminis.
   Origin :  F!cslj>, from the Sphincter Ani, and mem-
branous part of tue Urethra, and Tendinous, from the
 Crus and  beg'.; ning of  the Corpus  Cavernosum Penis.
»~~In '«f..cou,s". «t forms a thin Fleshy Laveiyvlie/'nv'
fenor Fibres of which run more transversely than-t^e 
■I ~;7
 syjierior,  which descend  in an oblique direction, the
 Muscles on the opposite sides completely inclosing the'
 Bulb of the Urethra.
  Insertion :  Into its fellow, bv a Tendinous line run-
 mng longitudinally on the middle of the Bulb.
  Jetipn ■■ To propyl the Urine or Semen forwards ; and
 by the compressing the Bulb,  to push the  Blood int ,
 and thereby  distend the Corpus Cavernosum Urethras,
 and glans  of the Penis.

  ■Transvrrsus  Perinei,  or Transveraalia  Urethra.
  Origin: From the insitle of  the tuberosity ofthe Os
 Ischium,  close  to  the Erector Penis ; running across,
 it has its
  t Insertion into the back-part of the  Accelerator Uri-
pjsjc, and adjoining part of the Sphincter Ani.
 ';.•• Action:  To dilate the Bulb for the reception of the
 Somen  or Urine ; or it may also assit the Levator Ani"
 in retracting the  Anus,  after the discharge  of the
 Forces.
  ■There is frequently another Muscle, termed Trans-
 tjerialis Perinei  Alter,  running  along  with the former,
 mid having  the same Origin, Insertion, and Action,
 but going more obliquely upwards.

                   Spincter  Ani.
   Origin: From the extremity of the Os Coccygis.—
 It vpns forwards  within the skin and fat which  cover
 the verge of the  Anus,  and  in its passage forms a
 broad,  flat,  oval Muscle,  which surrounds the extre-
 mity ofthe Intestinum Rectum.
   Insertion.-  By a narrow point,  into the  Accelera-
 tors Urinz and Transversi Perinei.
   Att'ion : To shut the Anus, and also to pull down the
 Bulb of the Urethra,  by which it may assist in throw-
 ing'otit the Urine  anel Semen.
   The Sphincter Internus of some authors, is merely the
 circular Muscular Coat ofthe end ofthe Rectum.
                   Levator  Ani.
   Origin : By a semi-circular edge, from the Os Pubis,
 withm  the  Pelvis, at the upper'edge.of the Foitamtn
 IJiyfpideum ;  from the  Aponeurosis which covers fhe 
13©
 Obturator Internus and Coccygeiw Muscles ; and from
 the  Spinous  Process of the  Os Ischium—Its Fibres
 descend like rays from a circumference, to meet those
 of its fellow, and with it to form a kind of inverted fun-
 nel.
  Insertion: Intothe Sphincter Ani, AccelwratorUrinat,
 and under and fore-part ofthe OsCoccygis. It surrounds
 the extremity  of the Rectum, neck of the bladder,
 Prostate Gland,  and  part of the Vesiculr Seminales.
  Action: To support the contents ofthe Pelvis, to re-
tract the end ofthe Rectum, after the evacuation ofthe
 Faces, to assist in the evacuation  of the Rectum and
 Bladder,  of the Vesicular  Seminales  and Prostrate
 Gland.—It is likewise considered by some as a principal
agent in the distention of the Penis, by pressing upon
its Veins.
   Muscles ofthe Female Parts ^Generation
                    and Avus.
              Erector Clitoridis.
   The same as the Erector Penis in the  Male, but
 smaller.
   Insertion .• In the same  manner, into  the Crus and
 Body ofthe Clitoris.
               Sphincter Vagina.

   Origin :  From the Sphincter Ani, and from the pos-
 terior side ofthe Vagina, near the Perineum.—It pas-
 ses along the outer end ofthe Vagina, covers the Cor-
 pus Cavernosum Vaginae, and going behind the Nym-
 phae, it has its
  Insertion into the union ofthe Crura Clitoridis.
  Action .• To contract the external Orifice of the Vagi-
 na, by compressing its Corpus Cavernosum, from which
 tost it likewise pushes the Blood into the Nymphx and
 Clitoris.                                   r
              Transversua  Perinei.
  Origin : As in the Male.
  Insertion : Into the upp-r part ofthe Sphincter Ani,
and into a tough white substance in the Perineum.
  Asuon : Upon the Perineum and Anus, as in the Male. 
131
                 Sphincter Ani.
  Origin and course, as in the Male.
  Insertion: Into the tough white substance in the Fe-

^Action -•  To shut the Anus, anel by pulling down the
Perineum, to assist in contracting the external Orince
of the Vagina.
                  Levator Ani.

  Origin:  As in the Male.  In its descent, it emhta-
ccs the inferior part ofthe Vagina and Rectum.
  Insertion -• Into the Perineum, Sphincter Am, extre-
mity ofthe Vagina, and  Rectum.
  Action:  Upon the  Bladder and Rectum, as in the
Male.  It also assists in supporting and contracting the
Vagina, and  may,  by pressing upon the Veins, contri-
bute to the distention of the Cells of the Clitoris and
Corpus Cavernosum Vaginx.


         Muscles of the Os Coccygis.
                   COCOTGEUS.
   Orivin .- By a narrow point, from the Spinous Pro-
 cess ofthe Os Ischiura.-In its passage, it g^dually
 expands,  and covers the inside ot the posterior Sacro-

 "■SSiySTSi. whole length  of the side ofthe

 °!«SS^To move the Os Coccygis  forwards,  by
 which it must assist the Levator Ani in  supporUng or
 raisng the end of tlie Rectum.


 Muscles situated within the Cavity ofthe Ab-
                      domen.
                   DlArHRACMA.
   The Diaphragm forms a Fleshy  and Tendinous Par-
 tituSn which separates the Cavity of the Abdomen from
 !hTof t^e Thorax, andis perforated by several Holes,
                       h  a- 
                       132

for the passage of Vessels and Nerves which go into,
or Out from the Abdomen.  It is concave  below, and a'
convex above, the middle of it reaching as high with.
ip the Thorax, as the fourth pair of Ribs.  Above,  it
is covered by the Pleura ; and below, by the Peritrone-
nm ; and is commonly divided into  two portions, called
Superior and Inferior Muscles ofthe Diaphragm.

 Superior, or Greater Musclea ofthe  Diaphragm.

   Origin: By Fleshy indentations,  from the Catilago
Ensiformis, and from the Cartilages of the seventh, and
of all the inferior Ribs on both sides.  From these dif.
ferent Origins, the Fibres run in  a radiated manner,
and have their
   Insertion  into a Cordifcrm Tendon,  placed in the
middle of the Diaphragm, and in which  the Fibres
of the  opposite  sides are  interlaced-rr-Towards the
right side, the  Tendon is perforated by  a triangular
hole for the passage of the Vena  Cava Inferior ; and
to the upper convex part of it, the Pericardium and
Mediastinum are connected.

   Inferior, or Lesaer Muacle, or Afipendix of the
                    Diaphragm.
   Origin :  By four pair of Heads,  of which one paii;in
the  middle cpmmonly  .called its  Long or Tendinous
Crura, is the longest.  The  long Crura arise from the
fore-part of the fourth Lumbar  Vertebra,  and ad-
here to the bodies of all the Vertebrx of the Loins a-
bove this, by the intervention of the common Ligament
covering these Bones.  In their ascent, they  leave an
oval opening for the passage of the Aorta and Thora-
cic Duct.  The other Heads arise from the third, and
also from the second Lumbar Vertebra, and are placed
farther out.   From the different Heads the Muscular
Fibres run upwards, and form in ^ie middle, two Fleshy
Columns, or Crura, which decussate, and leave an open.
ing for the passage ofthe Esophagus.
   Insertion : By stropg Fleshy  Fibres, into the poste-
rior edge ofthe Cordiform, or middle Tendon.
   Auction : To enlarge the Cavity of the Thorax in in-
 spiration, by its Fleshy part contracting,  and bringing 
1 ".*?
its two sides down from a convex to  a plane  Surface,
the Abdominal Muscles at the same time yielding, but
the Tendinous part ofthe  Diaphragm remaining nearly
in the same situation.  In expiration, the Diaphragm is
replaced, chiefly by the action ofthe Abdominal Mus-
cle's.  It is the antagonist ofthe  Abdominal Muscles in
inspiration, but acts in  concert  with them in dejection,
and vomiting.
              Quadratua Lumborum.

  Origin :  3road,  Tendinous, and  Fleshy, from  the
posterior half of'he Spine  ofthe Os Ilium, and from a
Ligament extended between it and the transverse Pro-
cess ofthe last Lumbar Vertebra.
  Insertion :  Into the  transverse Processes of all the
Lumbar Vertebrx ; into the last Rib, near the Spine ;
and, by a small Tendon, into the side ofthe last Dor-
sal Vertebra.
  Action :  To move the Loins to one side, pull down
the last Rib, and, when both act, to bend the  Loins
forwards.
                  Psoas  Parvus.

  Origin: Fleshy, from the last  Vertebra of the back,
and one or two upper Vertebrx of the Loins   It sends
off a slender Tendon which runs down by the inner side
ofthe Psoas Magnus,  and an Aponeurosis which ex-
pands upon the neighbouring Muscles
   Insertion : Into the brim of the Pelvis, at the joining
Bi'the Os Ilium and Pubis.          #
   Action:  To assist in bending the Spine upon the Pel-
vis, or in raising the Pelvis.
   This Muscle  is frequently a wanting.
                  Psoas  Magnus.
   Origin: From the side of the Bodies, and from  the
transverse Processes ofthe last Dorsal, and all the Lum-
bar Vertebrx,  bv  an   equal  number of Fleshy Slips,
Which, uniting,  form  a tluek slrong Muscle, bounding
the upper  part  of the side of  the Pelvis, and passing
down over the Os  Pubis, behind Potiparts Ligament.
   Insertion ■  Tendinous and Fleshy,  into the  i rochan-
Ur Minor, and part ofthe Body ofthe Os Femoris.
                    H .1 
134
  Action :  To bend the Thigh,  and turn it a little out-
wards, or, when the Inferior Extremity is fixed, to as-
sist in bending the Body.

                 Iliacus Internus.

  Origin:  Fleshy, from the  transverse Process of the
last Lumbar Vertebra ; from all the inner edge ofthe.
Spine ofthe Os Ilium ; from the  edge of that Bone,
between its anterior superior Spinous Process and the
Acetabulum ; and from most of the hollow part of the
Os Ilium.—It joins the Psoas Magnus, where it begins
to become Tendinous on the Os Pubis.
  Insertion : Along with the Psoas Magnus.
  Action:  To assist the Psoas in bending the Thigh.
  Muscles situated upon the Anterior Part ofthe
                    Thorax.

       Pectoralis Major, or  Pectoralis.
  Origin : From the Sternal half of the Clavicle ; from
the edge of the Sternum,  where  it is connected with
its fellow;  and from  the  Cartilages of the fifth  and
sixth Ribs, where it mixes with the  Obliquus  Exter-
nus : The Fibres from  thence converge towards the'
Axilla, where they decussate, and send off a flat twist-
ed Tendon, which  has  its
  Insertion Into the Ridge at the outer edge  of the
Groove for lodging the Tendon of the long head of the
Biceps.
  Action:  To draw the arm towards the Sternum.

  Pectoralis Minor, Or Serratus Minor Anticua.

  Origin : Tendinous and Fleshy,  from the third, fourth-f
and fifth  Ribs, near their Cartilages : Passing obliquely.
outwards, it becomes gradually narrower.
  Insertion.- Tendinous into the point of the Coracoid-
Process ofthe Scapula.
  Action:'To bring the Scapula downwards  and for-
wards, or Xo raise the Ribs. 
135
                    Subclaviua.
  Origin -.  Tendinous, from the Cartilage of the first
Rib.  It soon becomes Fleshy, and runs outwards, un-
der the Clavicle, increasing in breatlth.
  I-\crtioi. :  Into the under Surface of the  Clavicle,
from near its heatl, as far outwards  as the  Coracoid
Process of the. Scapula.
  Action :  To pull the Clavicle, and with it the Scapula,
downwards and forwards.

  Serratus Magnus, Or Srrratus Major Amicus.
  Origin :  From the  nine superior Ribs, by an  equal
number of Fleshy digitations.  It runs obliquely  up-
wards and backwards upon the side of the Thorax,  and
between it and the  Scapula.
  Insertion :  Fleshy,  into the whole length ofthe Base
ofthe Scapula, and  in  a manner  folded  round it, be-
tween the insertion ofthe Rhomboid and the Origin of
the Subscapularis Muscles.
  Action : To move the Scapula forwards or downwards
according  to the direction of its different digitations,
and, when the  Scapula is forcibly raised, to  assist in
dilating the Thorax,  by raising the Ribs.
 Muscles situated between the Ribs, and within
                 the Thorax.

            Intercostales Externi.
  Orivin: From the untler edge of each superior Rib.
Thev run obliquely downwards and forwards, from the
Spine to the joining ofthe Ribs with  their Cartilages,
from which, "to  the Sternum,  they  are discontinued,
that place being occupied by an Aponeurosis.
  IrlertiiM  : Into the- tipper edge of each, inferior Rib.
  Ponions  of the  External  Intercostals, wluch  ar<se
from the transverse Processes  of  the  Vertebrx, and
terminate in the Ribs immediately below, are termed,
by Albinus,  Levators Cost arum Breviores—Olher
gortions, which arise  in  the same  manner,  but pass 
                       150
over one Rib, and terminate in the next  below it, are
nameel, by the same author, Levatores Costarum Lon-
giores.
               Intercostales Interni.
  Origin :  The  same with  that of the External ; but
they begin  at the  Sternum, and run  downwards and
backwards, decussating the former Muscles like the
strokes of the letter X, and continuing as far  as the
angle of the Ribs,  from which to the  Spine they are a,
wanting.
  Insertion : In the same manner as the External.
  Portions ofthe Internal Intercostals, near the under
part of the Thorax, which pass over one Rib, and ter-
minate in the next below it, are called, by Douglass*
Costarum Depressores Proprii.
  Action ofthe Internal, as well as ofthe External  In*
tercostals - To enlarge the Cavity of the Thorax, by
elevating the Ribs in the Time of inspiration ; and the
obliquity ofthe one set balancing  that ofthe other, al-
lows them to be raisetl more immediately upwards.
  From the obliquity of their Fibres, they are found t»
possess a greater power to raise the Ribs, than Fibres
going in a perpendicular direction*
  The External Intercostals cease near the Sternum,
and the Internal near the Spine, to admit the ready mo-
tion ofthe Ribs ; for had the former been continued to
the Sternum, and the  latter to the Spine, the parts of
these  Muscles supposed to be thus  fixed, would of
 course have become antagonists to the rest.
   The portions called  Levatores and Depressores Casto-
rum assist in raising the Ribs,  in the same  manner as
the rest ofthe  Intercostales.

       Sterno^Coatalis, or  Triangularis Sterni.
   Origin :  From the edges ofthe  Cartilago Ensiformis,
 and lower half ofthe middle Bone ofthe Sternum, with-
 in  the Thorax.  It runs upwards  and  outwards, behind
 the Cartilages of the Ribs.
   Insertion: Generally by three  angular terminations,
 into the Cartilages ofthe third, fourth, and fifth Ribs,
 and sometimes, also, by  a fourth termination into the
 Cartilage ofthe second or sixth Rib, near where they
join the Osseous part of the Ribs. 
                       1'37
  Action: Tb depress the Ribs into which they are fix-
ed, and,, of consequence, assist in contracting the Cavi-«
ty of the Thorax during Expiration.
MCscles aittihted on the  Anterior Part ofthe
            Vertebra ofthe Neck.

                  Longus Colli.
  Origin: From the side ofthe Bodies ofthe three su-( -
perior Vertebrx of the Back, and from the transverse
Processes of the four inferior Vertebrx of the Neck,
  Insertion .- Into the  fore-part of the  Bodies of all the
Vertebrx of the Neck,  by as many  small Tendons,
which are covered with Flesh.
  Action: It bends the Neck forwards and to one side,
or when both Muscles act, they immediately bend tlie
Neck.
     Rectus Capitis Anterior Major, or Rectus
                Anterior Longua.
  Origin-- From the transverse Processes of the third,
fourth, fifth, and sixth Vertebrx ofthe Neck.  It runs
upwards, and a little inwards, covering the outer edge
ofthe Longus Colli.
  Insertion-• Into the Cuneiform Process of the Occi-
pital Bone, near its joining with the Os Sphenoides.
  Action ;  To bend the Head forward.
     Hectua Capitia Anterior Minor, or Rectus
                Anterior Minor.
  Origin:  From the  fore-part ofthe Atlas, opposite to
its superior Oblique  Process. It runs  obliquely inwards-
behind, snd a little to the outside ofthe former Muscle.
  Insertion: Into the Cuneiform Process of the Occi-
pital Bone, immediately before the Condyles.
  Action ■■  To assist the  Rectus Major.
             Rectus Capitis Lateralis.
  Origin :  From the anterior  part of the  Transverse.
 Process of the Atlas.—It goes obliquely outwards. 
                       138
  Insertion :  Into the Occipital Bone, immediately be-
hind the Jugular Fossa.
  Action: To incline the head a little to one side.
  Muscles situated upon the Posterior Part qf
                   the Trunk.

             Trapezius,  or  Cucullaria.
   Origin: From the middle ofthe great arched Ridge
of the Occipital Bone ; from  its fellow, over the Spi-
nous  Processes of the Cervical Vertebrx, by the inter-
vention of a strong Tendon, called Ligamentum Nucfue,
or Colli; from the Spinous Processes of the two infe-
rior Vertebrx of the Neck ;  and from  all  those of the
back, adhering Tendinous  to  its  fellow the  whole
lei.gth of its Origin.
   Insertion :  Into the Scapulary half of the Clavicle,
into the Acromion, and into the Spine of the Scapula.
   Action: To move the Clavicle and Scapula, accord-
ing to the directions of its different Fibres.  The su-
perior Fibres, descending, raise the Shoulder; the mid-
dle, running transversely,  pull it backwartls ; and the
in' rior Fibres, ascending, depress it.  The whole act-
ing together, bring  it  immediately back.—When the
Scapula is fixed, the Muscle must assist in moving the'
Head backwards.
                 Lalissimus Dorsi.
   Origin: By abroad Tendinous expansion, from the
posterior part ofthe Spine of the  Os  Ilium ; from all
the spinous Processes of the  Vertebrx, extending be-
tween the bottom of the Os Sacrum and sixth Verte-
bra ofthe back; and,  by three or four Tendinous or
Flesh) Slips, from an  equal number of inferior  Ribs.
The Tendon by degrees changes into a Muscle of great
breadth, the inferior Fibres of which run upwards and
outwards, and the superior run transversely over the
inferior angle ofthe Scapula, receiving a small  Slip
from it in their  waj to the  Axilla  where they are col-
lected, twisted, and folded, like those of the Pectoral
Muscle. 
                       139
  Insertion:By. a strong thin.Tendon, into the inner
edge ofthe Groove for lodging the Tendon, of the long
head ofthe Bjceps Muscle.
  Action: To puft the Ai m downwards and backwards,
and to roll the Os Humeri inwards, by which the Palm
ofthe hand is made to face backwards.  When the lar-
gest Pectoral Muscle acts  at the same .time with this
one, the Arm is brought immediately down towards
tlie. Trunk.
  The Latissimus Dorsi and Pectoralis Major form the
Arm-Pit, in which the great Vessels and Nerves, and
likewise the Glands,"lie, whiGh belong to the Arm.

            Scrratus Posticus Inferior.
  Origin ■• By the same  common  Tendon  with the La-
tissimus Dorsi, from the two  inferior Vertebrx of the
Back, and from the three superior of the  Loins.
  Insertion: By four Fleshy Slips; into the same num-
pe&of Ribs near their Cartilages.    : •
  Action : To depress the Ribs into which it is inserted,
and thereby assist in contracting theCavity of the Tho-
rax-in the Time of Expiration.

                  Rhomboideua.
  Origin: Tendinous, from  the Spinous  Processes of
the four or five superior Vertebrx of the  Back;—from
the three inferior ofthe Neck, and from the Ligamen-
turn Nuchx.—It descends obliquely, and  has its
  Insertion into  the whole length  of the Base of. the
Scapula,-
  .Afifioji: To draw the Scapula upwards and backwards. ■
  This  Muscle is frequently divided by  an indistinct
line into two unequal portions : The part arising from .
the Vertebrx ofthe Back, and fixed to the Base ofthe *
jScapula, under the  Spine, is commonly called Rhvm- -
hides Major, and the other part ofthe Muscle, Rhom. ,-
hoides Minor.                    ,   :vii
                    Splenhia.

  Origin : Tendinous, from the four superior Spinous
Processes of the Vertebrx of the Back  ;—Tendinous
and Fleshy, from the,five inferior ofthe  Neck: It ad-
heres firmly to  the Ligamentum  Nuchx.  At the third 
140
Vertebra ofthe Neck,  it recede* from  its fellow, so
that that part ofthe Complexos Muscle  is seen.
  Insertion :  By as many Tendons, into the five superi-
or transverse Processes of the Vertebrx  of the Neck t
and Tendinous and Fleshy,  into the  posterior part of
the Mastoid Process, and into the Os Occipitis, where
it joins with that Process.
  Action: To antagonize the  Sterno-Mastoidens, by
bringing the Head, and upper Vertebrx  of the Neck,
obliquely backwards and to one side.  When the Sple-
mi  act together,  they draw the Heatl  directly back-
wards.
  This  Muscle is divided by  Albinus into Spleniua
Capitis, or that which arises from  the  Neck, anel goes
to the Head ; and Splenitis  Colli, or that which arises
from the Back, and is fixed to the  Neck.

            Serratus Posticua Superior.
  Origin ; By a broad thin Tendon, from  the Ligamen-
tum Nuchx, over  the Spinous Processes of the three
last Vertebrx of the Neck,  and  from the two upper-
most ofthe Back.  It goes obliquely downwards.
  Insertion .-  By four Fh-shy Slips into the second, third,
shorth, and fifth Ribs, under the  tipper  and back-part
ofthe Scapula.
  Action : To elevate the Ribs, and  dilate the Thorax
in inspiration.

                 Sacro-Lumbalia.

  Origin : In common with  the  Longissimus Dorsi,
Tendinous without, and Fleshy within, from the side,
and all the Spinous Processes ofthe Os Sacrum ; from
the posterior part of the Spine of the Os Ilium ; from
all the Spinous Processes and Transverse Processes of
the Vertebrx ofthe Loins.   The common head fills up
the space between the  Os Ilium and Os Sacrum, and
also the hollow ofthe Loins.  At the under part ofthe
Thorax, the Muscle begins to send off Tendons, which
lie flat upon the Ribs, and become  gradually longer the
nearer they are to the Spine.
   Insertion: Intothe angles of all  the Ribs,  hy an e-
qual number of Tenelons.
   From the sixth  or eighth lower Ribs arise  an equal 
                        141
number of Fleshy Portions, which terminate in the in-
ner side of this Muscle,  and get the name of Muscull
Accessorii, or Additamentum  ad Sacra-Lumbalcm.
  Action : To assist in raising and keeping the Trunk
ofthe Body  erect.   It also assists the Serratus Inferi-
or, and Qttadratus  Ltimborum, in elepressing the Ribs.
  From the  upper part of this Muscle, a Fleshy Slip
called Cervicalis Descendens,  runs up to be fixed to the
transverse Processes ofthe fourth, fifth and sixth Ver-
tebrx of the Neck, by three distinct Tendons.  When
it acts, it turns  the Neck obliquely backwards and to
one side.
                Longissimus  Dorsi.
  Origin : In common with  the  Sacro-Lumbalis.   It
forms a large, thick, and  strong Muscle, which fills the
hollow between the Spine  and  angles of the  Ribs, and
which,  becoming gradually smaller in its ascent, has its
  Insertion into all the transverse Processes of the Ver-
tebracof  the Back, chiefly by small double Tendons ;
and, by a Tendinous  anel  Fleshy  Slip, into  the lower
edge of each of the Ribs, excepting the two inferior,
near their Tubercles.
  From the upper part of this Muscle,  a round Fleshy
Slip runs up  to join the Cervicalis Descendens.
  Action: To extend the Trunk, and keep it erect.

                   Complexus,
  Origin : By distinct Tendons,  from  the transverse
Processes of  the seven superior Vertebrx of the Back,
and four inferior of* the Neck; and by  a Fleshy Slip,
from the  Spinous Piocess  of the first Vertebra of the
Buck.  Io its passage  upwards, it is intermixed with
Tendinous and Fleshy  parts.
  Insertion;  Into a depression, under the large arched
Ridgeof the Occipital Bone.
  The long portion of  this Muscle, which lies next the
Spii.ous Processes, is  more loose than the rest, and has
a loundish Tendon in  the  middle of  it, with a Fleshy
Bellv at each end,  on which account it is called, by
Albini'S, Biventer Cervicis-
  Action: To draw the Head  backwards, and  to one
side ; and when both  act, to draw the  Head directly
backwards. 
14$'
              Trachelo-Mastoideua ;

  It is likewise called Complexus Minor, or Mastoideus-
Lateralis.
  Origin •  From the transverse Processes of the three.
uppermost Vertebrx  of the Back, and five lowest of
the, Neck, where it is  connected to the Transversalis,
Cervicis by as many thin Tendons, which  unite into a,
slender belly, and run up under the Splenius.
  Insertion : Into the posterior margin of the Mastoid;
Process by a thin Tendon.
  Action .■ To assist the Complexus ; but  it pulls the
Head more to a side.

     Levator Scapula or Levator Proprius, or
               Musculus Patientix.

  Origin: From the transverse  Processes of the five
superior Vertebrx of  the Neck, by  the same number
of distinct heads, which soon  unite to form a flat Mus-
cle, which runs downwards and outwards.
  Insertion: Into the superior angle of the Scapula.
  Action : To pull  the Scapula upwards and a little, for-
wards, as in shrugging the shoulder ; and, when the
Scapula is fixed, the Muscle may^act upon the Neck.

 Semi-Spinalis Dorsi,  or Tranaverso-Spinalis Dorsi.

   Origin: From the transverse Processes of the se-
venth, eighth, ninth, and tenth Vertebrx  of the  Back,
by as many distinct Tendons, which soon grow Fleshy,
 and then become Tendinous again.
   Insertion  : Into  the Spinous Processes  of the  six or
 seven uppermost Vertebrx of  the Back,  and two low-
 er ofthe Neck, by as many Tendons.
   Action ■■ To extend the Spine obliquely backwards.

                   Spinalis Dorsi.
   Origin: By five Tendinous Slips, from  the Spinous
 Processes ofthe two upper Vertebrx ofthe Loins, and
 the three lower ,of.the. Be.cic—In its  ascent, it is in-
 corporated with tiic Longisiimus Dorsi, and has its
   Insertion into the Spinous Processes of the eight or 
                        143
 nine uppermost  Vertebrx of the Back, excepting the
 first/by as many Tendons.
   Action : To fix the Virtcbrx,  and to assist in exten-
ding the Trunk,  and keeping it erect.

                 Mullifidu* Spin*.

 Formerly  Transverso-Spinalis Lumborum, Trans-
   veiso-Spinalis Dorsi,   and  Transverso-Spinalis
   Colli.
   Origin: From  the side,  and  Spinous  Processes of
 the Os Sacrum, and from that part of the Os Ilium
 which joins with tlie Sacrum ; from all the oblique and
 transverse Processes of the Vertebra of the Loins ;
 from  all the transverse Processes  of the  Vertebra«of
* the Back, and of the four iriferior of  the  Neck, by as
 many distinct Tendons, which soon become Fleshy, ihd
 run obliquely upwards and inwards.
   Insertion :  By dis-tinct Tendons, into all the Spinous
 Processes of the Vertebra of the Loins, Back,  and
 Neck, excepting the Atlas.
   Action:  To  extend the  Spine obliquely, and pull.it
 to a side. When both Muscles act, they draw  the Spine
^directly backwards.

 ' Semi-Spinalis Colli, or  Transverso-Spinalis Colli.
   Origin-:  From the transverse  Process of the six up-
 permost Vertebrx of the  Back, by  as  many distinct
 Tendons, which run obliquely under  the Complexus.
   Insertion:  Intothe  Spinous Process of all the Ver-
 tebrx of the Neck,  except the first and last.
   Action :  To  extend the  Neck obliquely backwards
 and to a side.

                 Transversalis  Colli.
   Origin : From the transverse Process ofthe Vertebrx
' Ofthe Back,  by the same  number of Tendinous and
 Fleshy Slips :  It runs between the  Trachelo-Mastoi-
 deus, Splenitis Colli, and Cervicalis Descendens.
   Insertion : Into the transverse Processes of all the
 Cervical Vertebrx, except the first and last.
    Action •■ To turn  the Neck obliquely backwards, and
 a little to one side. 
144
   Rectus dapitie Posticus Miho, or Rectus Minor.

   Origin .-  Tendinous,  close to its fellow, from a small
 Protuberance which is in place ofthe Spinous Process
 ofthe first Vertebra ofthe Neck.  It spreads out in its
 ascent, and has its
   Insertion, Fleshy, in a depression between the smal-
 ler Arch and Foramen Magnum ofthe Occipital Bone.
   Action :  To assist the following Muscle in drawing
 the Head backwards.

 Rectus Capitis Posticus Major, or Rectua Major.
   Origin .-  Fleshy from the external part ofthe Spinous
 Process ofthe second  Vertebra of the Neck.   It be-
 comes gradually broader, and goes obliquely upwards
 anel outwards.
   Insertion .  Tendinous and Fleshy, into the Os Oc-
 cipitis, at the outside  of the insertion of the Rectus
 Minor, part of which it conveys and conceals.
   Action : To pull the Head backwards, and to assist a
 little  in its rotation.
             Obliquua Capitis Inferior.
   Origin : Fleshy, from the Spinous Process of the se»
 cond Vertebra ofthe Neck, at the outside ofthe Rec-
 tus Major. It forms a thick belly, which runs upwards
 and outwards'.
   Insertion: Into the transverse Process of  the  first
 Vertebra ofthe  Neck.
   Action : To roll the Head.
             Obliuuus Capitis  Superior.
   Origin:  From  the transverse Process of the first Ver>
tebra  of the Neck.   It passes upwards and a little in-
 wards.

   Insertion; Into the Occipital Bone, at the outer part
ofthe insertion ofthe Rectus Major.
   Action : To assist in  drawing the head backwards.
                 Scalenus Anticua.
   Origin : Tendinous and FL-shy, from the upper part
pf the first  Rib,  near its Cartilage. 
145
  Insertion :  Into the transverse Processes ofthe fourth,
fifth, and sixth  Vertebrx of the Neck, by as many
Tendons.
                Scalenus Medius.
  Origin : From the upper and outer part of the first
Rib, from its Root to near its Cartilage.
  Insertion :  Into the transverse  Processes of all the
Vertebrx of the Neck,  by as many strong  Tendons
  The Subclavian artery, and  Nerves which form the
Blachial  Plexus, pass  between  this and  the  former
Muscle.
                Scalenus Poaticua.

  Origin: From the upper edge of the second Rib,
near the Sphine.
  Insertion :  Into the transverse Processes  ot the fifth
and sixth Vertebrx of the Neck-
  Action ofthe three Scaleni : To bend the Neck to one
side ; or, when the Neck is fixed,  to raise the Ribs,
and dilate the Thorax.
               Interapinales Colli.
  The spaces between  the Spinous  Processes  of the
Vertebrx of  the  Neck, most of which are  forked, are
occupied bv double  Fleshy Portions, which have their
  Origin from each inferior Spinous Process, and their
  Insertion into each superior.
  Action:  To  draw these  Processes  nearer to  each
Sther,and of consequence the Neck a little backwards.
           Intertransvcrsalev  Colli.
  The spaces between  all the transverse Processes of
the Vertebrx ofthe Neck, which are also forked, are
filled up in like manner with double  Fle'hy Portions.
  Action : To draw these Processes towards each other,
and turn the Neck a little to one side.
    Interspinales and  Intertransversales Dorsi,
  Are rather small Tendons than Muscles, serving to
connect the Spinal and  Transverse Processes.
            Interspinales Lumborum.
  Are ofthe  same nature with  the Interspinales and
Intertransversales Dorsi.
     Vol.  i.            i 
146
          Intertransversales  I.umborum,
  Are five distinct Muscles which occupy the space be-
tween the transverse Processes of the last Dorsal and
all the Lumbar  Vertebrx, and serve to draw them a
httW towards each other.
          MUSCLES

             OF THE

SUPERIOR EXTREMITY.
      Muscles arising from the Scapula.
                Supra-Spinatus.
  Origin:  Fleshy, from all the Fossa Supra-Spinata of
the Scapula,  and from the  Spine and superior Costa.
It  pas es under the Acromion,  adhering to the Capsu-
lar L'gamcut ofthe joint.
  Insertion :  1 endinous, into the large  Turbercle on
th.; iiead ofthe Os Humeri.
   Action:  To raise the Arm,  and  at the same time to
pull the Capsular Ligament from between the Bones,
to prevent it-from being pinched.
                 Infra - 8/tit talus.
  Origin :  Fleshy, from all that part ofthe Dorsum of
the Scapula  which is below its Spine;  anel from  the
Sp.nr itself,  as far as  the Cervix of  the Scapula  The
Fibres run obliquely towards  a Tendon in the inidelle
of U,e .*i iscle, which  runs forwards, and adheres to
tlie Capsular  Ligauict.
   Insertion : By a flat  thick Tendon, into the upper and
p'-urrio. part ei'the large Protuberance tin the head of
tiic U:i ll.l..ic.i.
   Action : *'i, roll the  Os Humeri  outwards ;  to assist 
 in raising,  and in supporting it when raised ; and to
 pull the Ligament from between the Bones.
   lhese two Muscles are covered bv an  Aponeuros'iSj
 from  which many of their  Fleshy Fibres arise.

                    Teres  Minor.
   Origin:  Fleshy, from the  inferior Costa of the Sca-
 pula   It ascends along the inferior edge ofthe L'fr*-
 Spinata, adheres to the Capsular Ligament, and lu-.s its
   Insertion,  Tendinous, into the back-part of the larje
 Protuberance on the  head  of the  Os Humeri,  a  tittle
 below the Infra-Spinatus.
    Action :  To roll the Os Humeri  outwards,  anel draw-
 it backwards,  and to prevent the Ligament from being
 pinched between the Bones.
                    Teres  Major.
   Origin:  Fleshy, from the  Dorsal side ofthe inferior
 angle of the Scapula, and from a small part of its  infe-
 rior Costa.  It is situated at the under part ofthe Teres
 Minor, and sends  off a broad fiat Tendon, which ac-
 companies the Tendon, of the Latissimus Dorsi,  ana,
 like it, his its
   Insertion intothe Ridge at the inner side ofthe  Groove
 for  lodging the Tendon of the long Head  of the Biceps
 Muscle.                                          i
   Action : To  roll the Humerus inwards, and draw it
 backwarels  and downwards.                        i
                     Delioides.
                                                  ♦
   Origin :  Fleshy, from all the outer part ofthe Clavi-
 cle, which is not occupied by the Pectoralis Major, and
 is separated from it by a small Fissure';  Tenelinous ai|d
 Fleshy from the Acromion, and lower Margin of almost
 the whole Spine of the Scapula opposite to the inser-
 tion ofthe Trapezius
   From these Origins it runs, under the appearance of
 three Muscles going in different directions, anel sepa-
 rated from each  other by  slight Fissures ; viz. tioni
 the Clavicle outwards, from the Acromion downwai els,
 and from the  Spine  of the  Scapula forwards ; aid is
 composed of a number of Fasciculi,  forming a-strong
'Fleshy  Muscle,  which covers the  Joint ofthe Os Hu-
 meri. 
                       148
   Insertion : By  a  short and strong  Tendon, into  a
rough Surface, on the outer side of  the Os Humeri,
near its middle, where the fibres of this Muscle inter-
mix with part of Brachialia Externus.
   Action; To pull the arm directly outwards  and up-
wards, and a little forwards  or backwards, according
to the different directions of its Fibres.
                Caraco Brachialis.
   Origin : Tendinous  and  Fleshy, from the fore-part
ofthe Coracoid Process of the  Scapula, in common
with the short head of the  Biceps Muscle, to which it
adheres through the greater part of its length.
   Insertion.-  Tendinous and Fleshy,  into  the  internal
part ofthe Os Humeri, near its middle, where it sends
down an  Aponeurosis to the internal Condyle ofthe Os
Humeri.
   Action : To bring the Arm  obliquely upwards  and
forwards.
                 Subscapularia.
   Origin :  Fleshy, from the three Costx, and whole in-
ner Surface ofthe Scapula.  It is composed of a num-
ber of  Tendinous and Fleshy portions,  which run in,a
radiated manner,  and  make  prints on  the  Berne.  In
its passage outwards, it adheres to the Capsular Liga-
ment of the Joint, and  has  its
  Insertion, Tendinous, into the  upper part ofthe In-
terna! Protuberance, at the head of the Os Humeri.
  Action:  To roll the Arm inwards, tlraw it to the side
of the Body, and  to prevent the Capsular  Ligament
from being pinched.
  Muscles chiefly situated on the Arm, serving
      for the Motions ofthe  Fore-Akm.

   Aponeurosis of the Superior Extremity.
  The greater part ofthe Superior Extremity is cover-
ed by a Tendinous Membrane, or  Aponeurosis, which
arises from the U ne - of, and Muscles on, the Shoulder.
On the Humerus, it incloses the Flexor and Extensor 
                        149
 Muscles  of the  Fore-Arm,  and is  connected to  the
 Ridges and  Condyles at the under end ofthe Os Hu-
 meri.
   At the  bending of the Elbow, it receives considera-
 ble additions from the Tendons ofthe Biceps and Tri-
 ceps Muscles of the Fore-Arm, where the Fibres from
 the opposite sides decussate  each other   It becomes
 thicker and stronger  «n the Fore-Arm,  and forms  a
 firm covering to the Muscles there.   In its descent, it
 gives off partitions among the Muscles, and these are
 fixed to the Radius and Ulna, the Membrane  itself be-
 ing lost insensibly upon the  Hand.  It is  thicker and
 stronger on the outer  than upon the inner  side of the
 Extremity, particularly on the Fore-Arm,  at the under
 and back-part of which it forms a thick and  strong band,
 which, running transversely, gets the name  of Liga-
 mentum Carpi Annulare Posterius.
   The use of this Aponeurosis is, like that in other
 parts  ofthe Body, it  braces the Muscles, by keeping
 them  in their proper  place while  in action, and gives
 origin to many  of the Muscular  Fibres which lie im-
 mediately under it.
          Biceps Plexor Cubiti,  or Biceps.

   Origin : By two heads ; the outer one, called  its Long
 Head begins by a slender Tenelon from the upper edge
 of the Glenoid  Cavity of the Scapula, passes  over the
 ball ofthe Os Humeri within the Joint, and, in its de-
 scent  without the Joint, is inclosed in a Groove  upon
 the upper and fore-part of the  Bone,  by  a Ligament
 which proceeds  from the Capsular one and the adja-
 cent Tendons.  The inner Head,  called the short one,
 arises, Tendinous and Fleshy, from the Coracoid Pro-
 cess of the Scapula, in common with  the  Caraco-Bra-
 chialis Muscle.   A little below the middle  of the fore-
 part ofthe Os Humeri,  the two Heads unite, and form
 a thick Fleshy Belly.
  Insertion •• By a strong roundish Tendon,  into the
Tubercle  at the  upper and inner part of the Radius,
and by a Tendinous expansion into the Aponeurosis of
the Fore-Arm,  which it likew ise assists in forming.
  Action :  To bend  the Fore-Arm, and to assist the
Supinator  Muscles in rolling the Radius outwards, and 
                        15U
of consequence turning the Palm of the Hantl upwards.

              BraeIdalis Internus.

  Origin: Fleshy,  from the middle ofthe Os Humeri
or Brachii, at each sitle of the Deltoides, covering all,
and attached to most ofthe under and fore-part ofthe
Bone : it runs over the  Joint,  adhering firmly  to  the
Capsular Ligament.
  Insertion :  By a strong short Tendon,  into the Coro-
noid Process of the Ulna.
  Action: To Bend the  Fore-Arm, and to prevent the
Ligament ofthe Joint from being pinched.

              Triceps Extensor Cubiti.

  Origin  : By three Heads ; the first, or long one, broad
anel Tendinous, from the inferior CVsta ofthe Scapula,
near its Cervix : The second, or  short one, by an acute
Tendinous,  and Fleshy beginning, from the outer  and
back-part of the Os Humeri,  a little below its  Head :
The third, called Brachialis Externus, arises, by an ac
cute beginning,  from the back-part of the Os Humeri,
near the  insertion  of the  Teres  Major.   The three
Heads unite about the middle of the  Humerus,  and
cover the whole posterior part of that Bone,  adhering
to it in their descent.
  Insertion: Into the upper and  outer part ofthe  Ole-
cranon ofthe Ulna, and partly into the Condyles of the
()•>  Humeri, adhering firmly to the  Ligament.
  Action  : To extend the Fore-Arm.

                     Anconeus.

  Origin: Tendinous, from the  posterior part of the
external  Condyle of the  Os Humeri ; it soon becomes
Fleshy, and part of its Flesh is likewise continued  from
the thirel Head of the Triceps.  It descends under a
triangular form, and has its
  Insertion,  Flesln anel thin,  into a Rie'.ges on the outer
and posterior edge of the Ulna, and a little below the
Olecranon!..
  Action  .- To assist the Triceps  in extending the Fore-
Arm. 
151
MuscLESonfAeFortE-AuM and Hkst>, Szv vis* G for the
        Mo i ions ofthe Hand and tingeus
To prevent confusion  in  the application of the  terms
  Outer and Inner,  when the Muscles are  described in
  the prone state of the Hand,—the Arm is here sup-
  posed to hang by the side of the Boely, with the Palm
  turned forwards, so  that the Radius and Thumb are
  upon the  outer, and the Ulna and little finger upon
  the inner side.
                                              «
                Palmaris Longus.

  Origin: Tendinous from the internal Condyle of the
Os Humeri.  It soon becomes Fleshy, and sends off a
long slender Tendon, which has  its
  Insertion into the Ligamentum  Carpi Annulare  An-
ti-rius.  and into the
  Aponeurosis Palmaris, which begins at the Anterior
Annular Ligament of  the Wrist ; and, after expand-
ing and covering the greater  part ofthe Palm ot the
Hand,  is fixed to "the  roots of all the Fingers  by  an
equal number of double Slips.
  Action of the Palmaris Muscle : To bend the  Hand,
and stretch the Aponeurosis Palmaris.
  This Muscle is frequently a  wanting,  but the Apo-
Bcurosis is always to be found.

                Palmaris Brevis.

  Origin :  By small bundles of Fleshy Fibres, from the
Ligamentum  Carpi Annulare, and Aponeurosis Pal-
maris.
  Insertion  .- Into the  Skin and Fat which covers the
Abductor Minimi Di,u,iti, and into the Os Pisiforme.
  Action ■■ To assist in contracting the Palm of tlie Hand.
   Il-xor Carpi Rudialts, or Radialis Internus.
  Origin :  Tendinous  and Fleshy, from the inner Con-
dyle  ot' the O-y Humeri, and from the fore and upper
part  of the Ulna, between the  Pronator  Radii  1 ert s
and Flexor Subliinis,  to  which it firmly adheres.   It
forms a ' irtt^ Tendon,  which passes down near the Ra-
dius,-goes  through  a Fossa in the Os Trapezium, and
becomes flat at its under extremity.
                       i  .1 
                       152
  Insertion : Into the fore and upper part of the Meta-
carpal Bone which sustains the Fore-Finger.
  Action ■■ To bend the Wrist, and to assist in the pro-
nation of the Hand.
     Flexor Carpi Ulnaris, or  Ulnaris Internus.
  Origin ■• Tendinous, from the  inner  Condyle of the
Os  Humeri, and by a small Fleshy beginning, from the
inner side of the Olecranon.  It passes along the  inner
side of the Ulna, and originates  from it for a considera-
ble  way down :  A number of Fleshy Fibres likewise a-
rise from the Aponeurosis ofthe Fore-Arm.
  Insertion ; By a strong Tendon, into the Os Pisifor-
me.
  Action : To assist the former  Muscle in beding the
Wrist.
  Extensor Carpi Radialis Longior, Or Radialis
                Externus Longior.
  Origin : Broad, thin,  and  Fleshy,  immediately be-
low  the Supinator Longus, from the Lower part of the
Ridge  of the Os Humeri, above its  external Condyle.
It snds e>ff a long flat Tendon, which passes down,
first upon the outer, and then upon the back-part of the
Raelius, ele-scending in a Groove there, anel going un-
der the Annular Ligament ofthe Wrist.
  Insertion : Into the upper, back, and outer part of the
Metacarpal Bone ofthe Fore-Finger.
  Action :  To extend the Wrist, and bring the Hand
backwards.
  Extensor Carpi ftadialis Brevior,  Or Radialia
                Externus Brevior.
It is similar to the former Muscle,  but its Fleshy Bel-
             ly is  placed farther down.
  Origin : Tendinous, in common  w ith the  Extensor
Longior, from  the external Condyle of tlie Os Humeri,
an \ from the Ligament which connects the Radius to
it:  Passing  down  upon the back-part ofthe Radius,
its  Tendon goes under the Annular  Ligament in the
same channel with the Tendon of the Extensor Longior.
  Insertion: Intothe upper and   back-part of the Me-
tacarpal Bone of the Middle  Finger. 
                        153
  Action: To assist  the former Muscle in  extending
the Wrist ;  or, with  it and the Flexor Carpi Riadalis,
to draw the Hand to the side next the I humb.
  Extensor Carpi Ulnaris,  or  Ulnaris Externus.
  Origin .- Tendinous, from the external Condyle  of
the Ob Humeri, and in its progress, Fleshy, from the
middle of the Ulna, where i( passes o\er it.
  Its round Tendon is enclosed  by a  Membranous
Sheath, in a Groove at the back-part of the  extremity
of the Ulna.
  Insertion  :  Into the posterior  anel upper part of the
Met:'.' arpal  Bone  ofthe Little Fii'ger.
  Action : To assist the two former Muscles in extend-
ing the Wrist ; or,  with  the  distance  ofthe  Flexor
Ulnaris, it draws  the Hand towards the side next the
Little Finger.

     Flexor Digitorum Sublimis,  or Perforatus.
  Origin : Tendinous and fleshy, from the internal Con-
dyle ofthe  Os Humeri; Tendinous, fiom the root  of
the Coronoid Process of the  Ulna ;  and Menibianous
and Fleshy  from the middle ofthe  fore-part of the Ka-
dius   Its Fleshy Belly  sends off four round Tendons
before it passes under  the  Annular Ligament  of the
Wrist.  In their course, they are  connected to those
of the following Muscle by fine Membranous Webs, and
upon the Fingers  they are inclosed in strong Tendin-
ous Sheaths
  Insertion .-  Into  the anterior and  upper  part  of the
second Phalanx, ofthe  fingers, being  near  the under m
part of the first Plialanx, split and twisted  to  form a
passage, and at  the same time a kind of Sheath for the
Tenelons of the  Flexor Profundus.
  Action : To bend the second,  and then the first Pha-
lanx ofthe Fingers.

   Plexor  Dig'-torum  Pr'fun;!us, or Pe-forans.
  Origin : Fleshy, from the external side and upper
part  of the Ulna,  for some.way  downwards;  and from
a lai"»e shaie of the  Interosseous  Ligament.   It runs
di>wirbeliind~thc  Flexor Sublimit., and, hive it, splits
into fo"i- 'Tendons, a lit Je before it p^at:* uiukr the 
                        154
 Annular Ligament, and these pass through the slits in
 the Tendons ofthe Flexor Sublimis.
   Insertion ■■ Into the  anterior and upper part of the
 third Phalanx ofthe Fingers.
   Action -. To bend the last Joint ofthe Fingers.
                    Lumbricales.
   Origin .- Thin and fleshy, from the outside ofthe Ten-
 dons ofthe  Flexor Profundus, a little above the lower
 edge of the  Annular Ligament of the  Wrist.  They
 send off long slender Tendons  at the under ends ofthe
 Metacarpal Bones, which have their
   Insertion into the outer side of the broad Tendons of
 the Interossei Muscles, about the mieldle of the first
 Phalanx.
   Action : To bend the first Phalanx, and increase the
 Flexion of the  Fingers while  the long Flexors are in
 full action.
          Extensor Digitorum Communis.
   Origin : Tendinous and fleshy, from the external Con
 dyle ofthe  Os Humeri, where it adheres to the Supi-
 nator Radii Brevis.  It  passes down upon the  back-
 part of the Fore-Arm, and before it goes under the
 posterior Annular Ligament of the  Wrist, it splits in-
 to three or four Tendons, some of which may  be divid-
 ed into smaller ones.
   Upon the back of the  Metacarpal Bones,  the Ten-
 dons become broad and flat, and near the Heads ofthe
 Metacarpal Bones send Aponeurotic expansions to e.ch
 other.
   Insertion :  Into the  posterior part of all the Bones of
 the four Fingers, by a Tendinous expansion.
   Action t To extend all the Joints ofthe Fingers.
             Supinator  Radii Longus.
   Origin: By an acute Fleshy beginning, from the Ridge
 ofthe Os Humeri, above the external' Condyle, nearly
 as high as the  middle  of the Bone.  It forms a thick
 Fleshy Belly, wiiich covers the  upper part ofthe  Ex-
 tensor Carpi Radial s Longior ; and  about the middle
 ot the  fere-Arm sends a tapering Tendon  along the
 edge or the  Kadiiii.                          *»

_R-dbT""" ''  IUt° U'C °UtCr :'a"' 'y': lhc ^d" end of the 
                        155
   Action : To roll the Radius outwards,  and of conse-
 quence to turn the Hand into a supine situation, or with
 the palm forwards.
              Supinator Radii Brevis.
   Origin : Tendinous, from the external Condyle ofthe
 Os Humeri ; Tendinous and Fleshy, from the  outer
 and upper part ofthe Ulna, and from the Interosseous
 Ligament.  It passes  over the external edge of the
 Radius, and has its
   Insertion into the upper and fore-part of the Radius.
   Action:  To assist the Supinator Longus.
               Pronator Radii Teres.
   Origin ; Fleshy, from the internal Condyle ofthe Os
 Humeri, and Tendinous from the Coronoid Process of
 the Ulna   It passes obliquely across the upper end ot
 the Flexor Muscles ofthe Wrist, and is of a tapering

   "insertion:  Thin, Tendinous, and Fleshy,  into  the
 middle ofthe posterior part of the Radius.
   Action :  To roll the Radius inwards, by  which it
 brings the Palm of the Hand backwareU, or into a state
 of Pronation.
            Pronator Radii  Quadratus.
   Origin : Broad, Tendinous, and Fleshy, from the tin-
 der and inner part  of the Ulna : The Fibres run trans-

 Ve/«eVfion :  Into the under and fore-part of the Radius.
   Action : To assist the  Pronator Teres.
     Plexor  Longus  Pollicis Manus,  Or  Plexor
                  Tertii Internodii.
   Origin;  By an acute Fleshy beginning, from the fore-
 part ofthe Radius and Interosseous Ligament, the On-
 S extending from the  i ubercle ot the Bone, as ar as
 SePronato/Qi.adratus Muscle.  It has requently an-
 other Origin, by a distinct Fleshy Slip, from the inter-

 ^S:  tlotl^l-jomtof the Thumb, after pa,
. eing Us Tendon under the anterior Annular Ligament

 9t Jri™ To bend the last Joint ofthe Thumb.
* 
                        156

     Plexor Brevis Pollicis, Or Plexor Secundi
                     Internodii.
   Origin :  From the Os Trapezoides, Magnum, and Un-
 ciforme.  It is divided into two portions, which form a
 Groove for the Tendon of the Flexor Longus Pollicis.
   Insertion : Into the Osvi Sesunoidea, anel Base of the
 first B.me ofthe Thumb.
   Action :  To bend the first Joint ofthe Thumb.

              Opponena Pollicis, Or,
 Flexor Ossis Metacarpi Pollicis, or Flexor Primi Internodii'
   Origin :  Fleshy, from the Os Trapezium and anterior
 AnnulUr Ligament of the Wrist .  It lies immediately
 under  the  Abeluctor Pollicis.
   Insertion: Tendinous and Fleshv, into the under and
 fore-part of the Metacarpal Bone of the Thumb.
   Action :  To bring the Thumb inwards, so as to make
 it  oppose the Fingers, from which circumstance it has
 derived its name.
        Extensor Ossis Metacarpi Pollicis.
   Origin;  Fleshy, from the middle of the posterior part
ofthe  Ulna, Radius, and Interosseous  Ligament.  It
 runs obliquely  over the Radius, sending one, or more,
 frequently two Tendons, through an Annular Sheath.
   Insertion: Into the  Os Trapezium,  and  upper and
back-part ofthe  Metacarpal Bone  ofthe Thumb.
   Action:  To  extend the Metacarpal  Bone of tlie
Thumb, and draw it from the Fingers.

      Extensor Primi  Internodii Pollicis, Or
                 Extensor Minor.
   Origin :  Fleshy, from the back-part ofthe Ulna, and
from tlv: Interosseous Ligament, near the former Mus-
cle^ by the side of which it runs.
  Insertion: Tendinous, into the posterior part of the
first Bone ofthe  Thumb: Part of  it may be traced as
tar as the second Bone.
   Action: To extend  the first Joint ofthe Thumb.

 Extensor Secundi Internodii, or Extensor  Major.
  Origin: By an  acute, Tendinous, aud Fleshy begin- 
                         157
  ning, from the middle ofthe back-part of the Ulna, and
  from the  Interosseous  Ligament :  Its Tendon runs
  through a  small Groove at the under, inner, and back-
 ' part of the Radius.                             '.,
    Insertion:  Into the last Bone of the Thumb.
  -Action :  To extend the last Joint ofthe Thumb.
                  Abductor Pdlicis.
    Origin: Broad, Tendinous, and  Fles'iy, from the Li.
  gamentum Carpi Annul'u?, and from the Os Trapezi-
  um.  It lies  immediately ,'i.der the Skin, and over the
  Opponens Muscle, and has a portion upon its inner side",
  which Albinos calls Abductor Brevis Alter.
    Insertion .-  Tendinous, into the outer side ofthe root
  ofthe first Bone ofthe Thumb.
    Action: To draw the Thumb from  the Fingers.
                  Adductor  Pollicis.

    Origin: Fleshy, from almost the whole length ofthe
  Metacarpal Bone of the Middle-Finder : Going across
  the Metacarpal Bone of the Fore-Finger,  its  Fibres
'  converge, and send off a short Tenelon.
'    Insertion :  Into the inner  part ofthe root ofthe first
  Bone ofthe Thumb.
    Action :  To pull the Thumb towards the Fingers.
       In Lca'-or,  or Extetis-'jr Indicts Proprius,
    Origin .■  By an acute Fleshy beginning, from the mid-
  dle of the> posterior pait of the Una, at the inner side
  of the Extensor Secundi Internodii Pollicis: Its Ten-
  don passes under the same Ligament with the Extensor
  Digitoruin Communis,  with part of which it has its
    1'.-.ivtion into the posterior part ofthe  To •e-Tinger.
    Action : To assist the comniun Extensor in extending
  all die Joints of tins Finder, particularly in pointing at
  any thing.
                   Abductor Indicia.
    Oiigin: From  the Os Trupeziuni, and from the up-
  per part a.id inner  side  uf t:.e Metacarpal Bone ofthe
  Tli tiinb
    Insertion:  Bv a  short Tendon,  into the  outer-  and
  back-part of tiu first l.one ofthe.  Fore-Finger.
    Action : To bring the Fore-Finger tow aids tie Thumb 
158
             Abductor Minimi Digiti.
  Origin : Fleshy, from the Os Pisiforme, and from that
part ofthe Ligamentum Carpi Annulare Anteriusnext
it.
  Insertion : Tendinous, into the inner side ofthe Base
ofthe first Bone ofthe Little Finger
  Action : To draw the Little Finger from the rest.

    Adductor Minimi Digiti, or Mctacarpeua.
  Origin :  Fleshy, from the hook like Process ofthe Os
Unciforme, and f om that part of the anterior Annular
Ligament of the Wrist next it : Passing obliquely over
the under end ofthe former Muscle, it has its
  Insertion : Tendinous,  into the inner side, and ante-
rior or under extremity of the Metacarpal Bone ofthe
Little Finger.
  Action : To bend the Metacarpal Bone, and bring this
Finger towards the rest
           Plexor Parvis Minimi Digiti.
  Origin : Like that of the former Muscle, but a little
farther down, the belly ofthe Muscle lying deeper.
  Insertion : By a roundish Tenelon, into the inner part
ofthe Base ofthe firs.t Bone of this Finger.
  Action : To bend the little Finger, and assist the Ad*
ductor.

                   INTEROSSEI.

  Origin :  From the sides of the Metacarpal Bones.—
They (ill up tie spaces between these, and are  some-
thing similar to the Lumbricales, but larger.
  Insertion ■■ By slender Tendons,  along  with those of
the Lumbricales, into the sides  of the Tendinous cx-
panMons ofthe Extensor Digitorum Communis.
  Action : To give the  Fingers their lateral motions,
and to assist a little, accoreling to their situations, in
bending or extending the hrst phalanx of the Fingers.
  Of tne Interossei, three,  seen  in the Palm of the
Hand, arise with  single Heads, and are called Interni •,
and four on the back ofthe Hand, with double Heads,
termed Externi, or Bicipitis. Part ofthe Externi,how-
ever, are also seen in the Palm ofthe Hand. 
                        159

              INTEROSSEI  INTERNI.

                   Prior Indicis.
   Origin :  From the outer part of the Metacarpal Bone
 ofthe Fore-Finger.
   Insertion :  Into the outside ofthe Tendon on the back
 ofthe Fore-Finger.
   Action : To draw that Finger outwards, towards the
 Thumb.
                 Posterior Indicia.
   Origin : From the inner part of the Metacarpal Bone
 ofthe Fore-Finger.
   Insertion: Into the inside ofthe Tendon on the back
 ofthe Fore-Finger.
   Action :  To draw the Fore-Finger inwards.
                 Prior Annularis.
   Origin: From the  outside of the Metacarpal Bone
 ofthe Ring-Finger.
   Insertion: Into  the outside  of the Tendon,  on  the
 back  of the Ring-Finger.
   Action :  To draw the Ring-Finger outwards.
             Interosseous Aw icularis.
   Origin :  From the outside of the Metacarpal Bone of
 the Little  Finger.
  Insertion : Into the outside of the Tendon on the back
 ofthe Little Finger.
  Action : To draw the Little Finger outwards.

            INTEROSSEI  EXTERNI.

               Prior Medii Digiti.
  Origin : From the corresponding sides of the Meta-
 carpal Bones ofthe Fore anel Middle Fingers.
  Insertion : Into the outside of the Tendon on the back
ofthe Middle Finger.
  Action :  To draw the Middle Finger outwards.
              Posterior Medii Digiti.
  Origin: From the corresponding sides of the Meta-
carpal Bones of the Middle and Ring Fingers. 
                      160
  Insertion :  Into the inside ofthe Tendon, on the hack
ofthe Middle Finger.
  Action :  To draw the Middle Finger inwards.
               Posterior Annularis.
  Origin .-• From the corresponding sides  of the Meta-
carpal Bones ofthe  Ring  and Little Fingers.
  Insertion •■  Into the inside of the Tendon on the back
ofthe Ring-Finger.
  Action : To draw  the Ring-Finger inwards.
          MUSCLES

             OF  THE

INFERIOR EXTREMITY.
 Muscles on the Pelvis and Thigh, serving for the
           Motions ofthe Thigh and Leg

      Aponeurosis of the Inferior Extremity.
  Previous to the description ofthe Muscles ofthe In-
ferior Extremity, it  is proper to take notice of a Ten-
dinous expansion, which, as in the Superior Extremity,
forms a  general c vering to the Muscles, and semis off
Partitions between them, to be connected to the Ridges
and Process: s ofthe Bones.
  It is thick and strong on the outside of the  Thigh
and Leg,  but towards the inner side  of both, particu-
larly on  the former, it gradually turns thinner, and has
rather 1 he appearance ot Cellular Membrane.
  It comes down from the Processes  and other projec-
tions on the outside-  of the Bones of the Pelvis, espe-
cially from the  Tendons of the external Layers of Mus-
cles of the Loins and Abdomen. 
                       161   v
  A little below the Trochanter Major, it is firmlv con-
nected to the Linea Aspera ;  and at the Joint of the
Knee, it receives additions from the Tendons ofthe Ex-
tensors of the Leg, and is there connected with the out-
er and inner sides ofthe Head of the Tibia and Fibula.
In the Leg, it is firmly fixed to the Spine of the I ibia ;
snd at the  under end,  to the Bones of the Ankle, v. here
part of it is thicker and stronger than the rest, and
forms the Annular Ligament ofthe Tarsus.  It is lost
»t last upon the Foot.
  It serves the same general  purposes with the  Apo-
neurosis ofthe Superior Extremity.
     Psoas Magnus.      )  0   .   ,„„,_,„,
      ,..      , 5          V See p. 133 tf 134.
     Hiatus Interims.     \

             Pectinalis, or Pectineus.
  Origin :  Broad and Fleahy, from the upper and fore-
part of the  Os P< ctinis,  or  Pubis, immediately above
the Foramen Thyroideum.   It runs downwards anel out-
wards at the inner side ofthe Psoas Magnus Muscle.
  Insertion : By a flat  and short Tendon, into the Linea
Aspera ofthe Os  Femoris, a little below the Trochan-
ter Minor.
  Action :  To pull the Thigh upwards and inwards, and
to give it,  and of consequence the Foot, a degree of ro-
tation outwards.

    '   TRICEPS  ADDUCTOR FEMORIS.
Under this appellation are comprehended three distinct
                   Muscles, viz.
            Adductor Longus Femoris.

   Origin:  By  a  strong roundish Tendon, from the tip-
per and fore part of  tlie Os  Pubis, anel Ligament of
the Synchondrosis  at the inner side ofthe Pectinalis :
It runs downwards and outwards, and has its
   Insertion, B\ a broad flat Tendon, into the middle of
the Luiea Aspera.
             Adductor Brevis  Femoris.
   Origin : Tendinous, from the Os  Pubis, at the side
of its S^ niphssis  below and behind the former Muse-le :
It runs obliquely  outwalas 
162
    Insertion.- By a short flat Tendon, into the inner and
  upper part ofthe Linea Aspera, from a little below the
  Trochanter Minor, to the beginning of the insertion of
  the Adductor Longus
             Adductor Magnua P'emoria.
    Origin; From the side of the Symphysis of the Pubis,
  a liitle lower than the former:  'The Origin is continu-
  ed downwards from the Crus and i uberosity of the Os
  Ischium ; the  Fibres run outwards  and downwards,
  spreading out wide, and forming a  . ery large Mu3cle.
   Insertion : Into the whole length ofthe Line a Aspera,
  the  under part of  the  Muscle extending along  the
  Ridge which leads to the inner  Condyle of the Os  Fe-
  moris ;  it is also fixed by a roundish 1 en don, into the
  upper part of that Condyle, a little above which the
  Femoral Artery, taking a Spiral turn towards the Ham,
  passes between the Tendon of this Muscle and die
  Bone.
   Action of the three Adductores ; To bring the Thigh
 inwards and  upwards,  according to the different di-
 rections of their Fibres, and to assist a little in rolling
 the 1 high outwards
                Obturator Externus.
   Origin:  By a semi-circular margin, from the parts of
 the Os  Pubis  and  Ischium, which form the anterior
 half ofthe Foramen Thyroideum, and from the Mem-
 brane which tills up that Foramen : the Fibres  are col-
 lected like  rays towards  a centre,  and pass outwards
 over the back part ofthe Cervix ofthe Os Femoris.
  Insertion : By a strong round Tenelon, into the Ca-
 vity at the inner and back-part of the  root of the Tro-
 chanter  Major, aelhering in its course to the Capsular
 Ligament of the Thigh Bone.
  Action: To roll the Thigh-Bone obliquely outwards,
 and to prevent the  Capsular Ligament from being
 pinched.
                Gluteua Maximus.
  Origin: Fleshy, from the back part of the Spine of
the Ilium ; from the under and outer part of the  Os
 Sacrum,  anel from the Os Coccygis; from the posteri-
or Sacro-Sciatic Ligament, over which part of the  in- 
                        163
ferior edge hahgs in a flap.  The Fibres run  obliquely
forwards, and a little downwards, to torm a thick omad
Muscle, which is composed of distinct coarse  fasciculi.
The upper part of it covers almost the  whole of the
Trochanter Major, and it is intimately connected with
the broad Tenelon of the  Tensor Vaginx Femoris.
  Insertion : By a strong, thick, anel broad Tendon, in-
to the upper and outer part of the Linea Aspera, along
which it is  continued for some way down.
  Action :  To extend the thigh, and pull it backwards
and a little outwards.
                 Gluteus Mcdius.
  Origin :  Fleshy, from all that  part  of the Spine of
the Os  Ilium  which is  unoccupied by the   Gl.iteus
M.iximus, from the upper part of the Dorsum of  that
Bone, anel from an Aponeurosis which covers  the Mus-
cle, and joins the  Fascia of the  Thigh.  It sends oft'a
broad Tendon, which has its
  Insertion  into the outer and back-part ofthe  Trochan-
ter Major.
  Aviion:  T6 pull the Thigh- ootw-ards, and a little
backwards.  The fore-part of the  Muscle assists in rol-
ling it inwards.
                 Gluteus Minimua.
   Origin .-  Fleshy, from the lower half of the Dorsum
ofthe Os Ilium : The Origin being continued from the
superior anterior Spinous Process, along a rising ofthe
Bone, as f.r as the great Sciatic Notch, it runs in a ra-
diated manner to a strong flul  Tet.tlon, which has its
  Insertion  intothe fore and upper part of the Trochan-
ter Major.
  Action :  To assist the  former  in pulling the  Thigh
outwards, and a  little backwards, it also acta, along
Vfith other Muscles in rolling it inwards.
                    Piriformis.
  Origin:  Within the Pelvis, by  th'-ee Tenelinous and
Fleshv heads, from the second, third, and fourth pieces
ofthe Os Sacrum ; and becoming round and tapering,
it passes out of the Pelvis, along with  the Sciatic Nerve,
through the great Notch of the  Ilium,  from which it
icceiw* the addition of a few-Fleshy Fibres.
     vol   '              K 
164
   Insertion :  By a roundish Tendon, into the upper part
 ofthe Cavity, at the inner side of the root of the Tro-
 chanter Major.
   Action : To assist in the Abduction of the Thigh, and
 in its rotation outwards.
                Gemini, or Gemelli.
   Origin : By two distinct Heads, the Superior from the
 Spinous Process, and the inferior from the Tuberosity
 ofthe Os Ischium, and from the Sacro-Sciatic Ligament.
 The two Heads are  united by a  Tendinous and  Fleshy
 Membrane, and form a sheath for the reception of the
 Tendon ofthe Obturator Internus Muscle.
   Insertion: Tendinous  and Fleshy, into the Cavity at
 the inner side of the root of the  Trochanter  Major, on
 each side of  the Tendon of the Obturator Internus,  to
 which they firmly adhere.
   Action ; To roll the Thigh outwards, and to prevent
 the Tendon of the Obturator Internus from starting out
 of its place while the Muscle is in action.

     Obturator  Intemua, formerly Marsupialia.
   Origin :  Within the Pelvis, by a semi-circular  Fleshy
 margin from  the anterior half of the Foramen Thyroi-
 deum, and, in part, from the Obturator Ligament.—its
 Fibres converge, and send off around Tendon  which
 passes over the Os Ischium, between the Spine and Tu-
 ber of that Bone, in  the manner a rope passes  over a
 p,,liev.—Where it goes over the  Capsular Ligament of
 the Tlngh-Bone, it is inclosed in the sheath ofthe Ge-
 mini Muscles.
   Insettion : By a round Tendon, along with the Gemini
 M u«. les, into the large Pit at the root of the Trochanter
 Major.
  Action :  To roll the Thigh obliquely outwards.

                Quadratus Femoria.

   Origin :  Tendinous and Fleshy, from the outer side of
tlit Tuberosity of tlie Os Ischium.  It runs transversely
outwnrxis.
  Insertion: Fleshy,  into a rough ridge continued from
 the loot of the great, to that of the small Trochanter.
  Action:  To roll the Thigh outwards. 
I                           165
    '. The Pyriform, Gemini, Quadratic, and  Obturatores
[    Muscles, which are the Rotators of the thigh,  when it
    is in a line with the Body, become  its Abductors when
    it is in the bended  state.

                  Tensor Vagin* Femoris.
■■    . Origin : By a narrow, Tendinous, and  Fleshy begin-
    ning, from the  external  part of the anterior superior
    Spinous Process of the Os Ischium. It goes elownw ards
    and a little  backwards, forming  a thick  Fleshy Belly,
    which is inclosed in a doubling of the Aponeurosis or
    Vagina ofthe thigh.
      Insertion :  A little below the  Trochanter Major, into
    the inner Surface ofthe Aponeurosis which covers the
 *   outside of the thigh.
      Action: To stretch  the  Aponeurosis, to assist in the
    Abduction ofthe thigh, and in  its rotation inwards.
                        Surtorius.
 '     Origin: Tendinous,  from  the superior anterior Spi-
    nous Process of the Os Ilium : It soon becomes  Fleshy,
    And runs obliquely downwards over the Muscles situated
    upon the fore and inner side of the Thigh, and is the
    longest Muscle of the Body.
      Insertion :  By a broad and thin Tendon, into the inner
    side of the Tibia, near the inferior part of its Tubercle.
      Action : To move the Knee,  and  bring one Leg ob-
    liquely inwards across the other.

               Gracilis,  or  Rectus Internus.
      Origin: By a thin Tendon, from the Os Pubis, near
    the Symphysis ; it soon becomes Fleshy, and  descends
    in a direct course by the inside  ofthe thigh.
      Insertion ;  Tendinous, into the Tibia,  under the Sar-
    torious.
      Action : To assist the Sartorious, in making the full
    Flexion ofthe Knee, after it  has been bent to a certain
    degree by the Flexors on  the back-part ofthe Thigh.

          Rectus Pemoris, or GracillU Anterior.
 ■L-  Origin ; Fleshy,  from the  inferior anterior Spinous
B* Process ofthe Os Ilium, and Tendinous  from the Dor-
\   mm of the  Ilium, a little above the Acetabulum :  It 
166
runs down over the anterior part ofthe Cervixof the Os
Femoris, and,  in its passage along tlie fore-part of the
Thigh, it becomes gradually larger as far down" in its
middle, and afterwards decreases towards its lower ex-
tremity.  In the middle ofthe Muscle there is a longi-
tudinal tendinous Line,-from which the Muscular Fibres
run oft like the  plumage of a Feather, the i'endoo itself
being most conspicuous hehind.
  Insertion : Tendinous, into tlie upper part of the Pa-
tella.
  Action : To extend the Leg.
               Cruralia, or Crureua.
  Origin : Fleshy, from between the two Trochanters
ofthe Os Femoris, near the Minor; and from the fore-
part ofthe  Thigh-Bone, to near its under extremity : its
sitles are connected to both Vasti Muscles, and, below,
it sends off a  tenelon which joins  that of the former
Muscle.
  Insertion  : Into the upper and back-part of the Patella,
behind the  Rectus.
  Action :  To assist in the extension of the Leg.

                Vaatua Externus.
  Origin: Broad, Tendinous, and fleshy from the outer
part ofthe  root of the Trochanter Major.  Its Origin in
con'inucel fiord the Trochanter, along the whole outer
sides of the Linea Aspera, to near the  outer Condyle of
the Os Femoris, by Fleshy Fibres,  which run obliquely
foi wards to a middle Tendon,  where they terminate.
  Insertion ; Into the upper and outer  part ofthe Patel-
la, at the edge of the tendon ofthe Rectus, with which
It is connected ; part of it entls in an Aponeurosis, v hich
is continued to the Leg, and in its passage is  fixed to
the Head ofthe Tibia
  Action : To  extend the Leg.
                  Vastus Internua.

  Origin; Tendinous and Fleshy, from the fore-part of
the Os Femoris, and root of the Trochanter Minor.  The
Origin is also continued along the  whole inside of the
L.nea Aspera, by Fibres running obliquely forwards and
downwards. 
                          167
    Insertion . Tendinous, at the side of the Crureus, with
  which it is connected, intothe upper and inner e<!ge of
  the Patella, continuing  Fleshy lower than  the  Vastus
  Externus.  Part of it likewise ends in an Aponeurosis,
  which is extended down to the Leg, and is  fixed, in its
•  passage, to the upper part of the Tibia.
>•    Action:  To assist the  three  former Muscles in  ex-
  tending the Leg ; in doing which, the Patella, fixed to
  the Tubercle of the Tibia by a strong Ligament, sup-,
  plies the office of a Pully.

                    Semitendinoaua.
I.   Origin :  Tendinous and  Fleshy, in common with  the
[ long Head ofthe Biceps,  from the posterior part of  the
  Tuberosity ofthe Os Ischium : Its Flesfiy  Belly runs
  down the back-part of the thigh, and sends off a long
  roundish Tendon,  which passing along the inner side of
  the  Knee, ends flat, and has its
    Insertion into the inside of the Ridge of the Tibia, a
,  little below its Tubercle, and connected to the under
I edge of the Gracilis.
    Action  : To bend the Leg, and, when bended, to roll
  it inwards.
                 Semimembranosus.
    Origin  : By a broad flat Tendon, from the  upper and
  posterior part ofthe Tuberosity of the Os Ischium. The
  Fibres composing the Fleshy Belly, rim in a very oblique
  direction, towards  a Tendon at the inner and under part
  of tbe Muscle, which is situated behind the Semitendi-
  nosus.
    Isertion : Into the inner and  back-part of the Head
  irfthe Tibia.
^ edition: Tobend theleg,and bring it directly backwards.
                Biceps Plexor Cruris.
*  Origin : By two distinct heads ; the first,or Long Head,
  irises in  common  with the Semitendinosus, from the
  upper and back-part ofthe Tuberosity ofthe Os Ischi-
  um.  The seconel or Short Head, arises from  the Linea
  Aspera, a little below the  termination of the  Gluteus
  Maximus, by a  Fleshy acute beginning, which soon
  (fruws broader, as  it descends to join the first Head,
  ft little above the external Condyle of the Os Femoris.
                     k  2 
168
  Insertion : Bv a strong Tendon,  into the upper part
ofthe Head ofthe Fibula.
  Action :  To bend the Leg.
  The Semitenelinosus anel Semimembranosus form the
inner Ham-string, and  the Biceps the outer Ham-string.
Between the Ham-strings the great Vessels and Nerves
lie, which run to the Leg.
                     Popliteus.
  Origin :  By a small round Tendon,  from  the outer
anel under part of the external  Conelyle of the Os Fe-
moris, and from the back-fart of the Capsular Liga-
ment of the Joint.  In passing the Joint, it becomes
Fleshy, spreads out, and the Fibres run obliquely in-
wards and downwards, being covered with a  tendinous
Membrane.
  Insertion : Thin and Fleshy, into  a  Ridge  at the up-
per and inner eelge ofthe Tibia, a little below its Head.
  Action : To assist in bentling  the  Leg, and,  w hen
bent,  to roll it inwards.  The Muscle also prevents the
Capsular Ligament from being pinched.
Muscles situated on the Leg and Foot, serving for the
          Motions ofthe Foot and Toes.

             Gastrocnemius E.xternus.
  Origin:  By two distinct Heads ; one from the upper
and back-part ofthe internal Condyle of tlie Os  Femo-
ris, and from that Bone, a  little above its Condyle, by
two separate beginnings. The other Head arises, Ten-
dinous, from the upper and back-part of the  external
Condyle.  A little  below  the Joint,  their  Fleshy Bel-
lies meet in  a middle Tendon, the union giving the ap-
pearance of a longitudinal Raphe ;  below the  middle
ofthe Tibia, the Muscle sends  oft" a broad thin Ten-
don, which, becoming graeliially narrower, joins that
ofthe Gastrocnemius  Internus,  a little above the An-
kle.
        Gastrocnemius Internus, or Soleus.
  Origin :  By two Heads ;  the first  is from the back- 
                       it>y
part of'he Head, and upper and back part ofthe Body
ofthe Fibula.  The other Origin is from the back-part
ofthe Tibia, and runs inwards along the under edge of
the Popliteiis, towards the inner part of the Tibia, from
which it receives  Fleshy Fibres  for some way down.
The Flesh of this  Muscle, covered by the Tenelon  of
the Gastrocnemius Externus, descends nearly as far as
the extremity of the Tibia,  a little above  which the
Tendons tif both Gastrocnemii unite, and form a strong
round Chord, called Tendo-Achillia.
  Insertion: Into  the  upper and back-part of the Os
Calcis, by the projection of  which the Tendon-Achilhs
is at a cons derabie distance from the Tibia.
  Action ; To extend the Foot, by raising the Heel.
                    Plantaris.
  Origin.- Thin and Fleshy, from the upper and back-
part ofthe external  Condyle of the Os Femoris, and
from the Capsular Ligament of the Joint.  A little be-
low the Head ofthe  Fibula, it sends off a long slender
Tendon  which descends obliquely inwards, between
the inner Heads of the Gastrocnemii Muscles, and af-
terwards runs along the inner edge  of  the  Tendo-A-
chillis.                                .        „ ,
  Insertion: Into  the inside ofthe posterior part of the
Os Calcis, below the Tentlo-Achillis.
  Action : To assist the Gastrocnemii, and to pull the
Capsular  Ligament of the  Knee  from between the
Bones.
  'This Muscle, though seldom, has been found a want-
ing.
                  Tibialis Amicus.
  Origin: Tendinous, from the upper part of the Ti-
bia, between its tubercle and the articulation with the
Fibula ;  it then runs down Fleshy, on the outside ofthe
tibia, adhering to it and to the tipper part of the Inter-
osseous Ligament; near the under part of the Leg, it
sends off a  strong  round  tendon, which passes  uneler
part of th ■ Ligamentum Tarsi Annulare,  near  the in-
ner Ankle
   Insertion : Tendinous, into the middle ofthe Ostu.
neifoi nie  Internum, and Base of the  Metatarsal Bone
of the Great toe. 
170
  Action; To bend the Foot, by bringing the fore-part
of it towards the Leg.
                 Tibialis Posticus.
  Origin: Fleshy, from the upper and fore-part of the
tibia,  under the Process which joins it to the Fibitla ;
then passing through a Fissure in the  upper part ofthe
Interosseous Ligament, it continues its Origin from the
back-part of the Fibula, next the  tibia, and from near
one half of the upper part ofthe last nameel Bone, as
also from the Interosseous Ligament, the Fibres run-
ning towards a middle tendon,  which,  in its descent,
becomes round, anel passes in a Groove behind the Mal-
leolus internus.
  Insertion -• Tendinous, chiefly into the upper and in-
ner part of the Os Naviculare. and partly into the un-
der Surface of the tarsal Bones by separate  Slips, the
last of which goes to the  root of the  Metatarsal Bone
ofthe Midtlle toe.
  Action: To extend the Foot, and, with the assistance
of the Tibialis Amicus, to turn the toes inwards, and
the outer edge of the Foot downwards

           Peroneus Longus, or Primus.
  Origin: Tendinous and Fleshy, from the fore-part of
the Head of the Fibula;  and  Fleshy from  the outer
part ofthe Bone, down to within a hand-breadth ofthe
Ankle.   The Fibres run  in a  Penniform manner tow-
ards a long tendon, which becomes round, and  passes
in a sheath through a channel, behind the  Malleolus
Externus.  It is then reflec ed to the sinuosity of the
Os  Calcis, runs along a Groove in the Os Cuboides, and
  foes obliquely across the  Bones  in the  middle ofthe
  ole.
  Insertion : Tendinous,  into the outside ofthe root of
the Metatarsal Bone of the Great toe,  and partly into
the Os Cuneiforme Internum,
  Action ■■ To extend the foot  a  little, to draw it out-
wards, and to turn the inner .edge of it downwards.

          Peroneua Drevia, or Secundua.
  Origin: Fleshy, from  the outer part of the Fibula,
beginning some way above the  middle height ofthe 
                          11 I
   Bone, and continuing its adhesion to the Malleolus Ex-
   ternus.  The Fibres run, like those of the former Mus-
   cle, to an external Tendon, which becomes round, pas-
   ses behind the outer Ankle, where  it  is included in the
   same sheath with the tendon ofthe preceding Muscle,
   and there,  crossing behind that Tendon, it runs  for-
   wards in a sheath proper to itself.
     Insertion :  Tendinous into the root and external part
   ofthe Matatarsal Bone  ofthe Little Toe.
     Action : To assist the former Muscle in pulling the
   Foot outwards, and its outer edge upwards, and in ex-
   tending the Foot in a small degree.
          Extenaor Longus Digitorum Pedis.
     Origin: Tendinous and Fleshy, from the  upper and
   outer part of the Head of the Tibia,  and from the Head
   and almost the  whole length of the  anterior Spine of
   the Fibula.   It  arises,  also,  Fleshy, from the Apo-
   neurosis which  covers the upper and  outer part of the
   Leg, and from the Interosseous Ligament.   Under the
   Ligamentum Tarsi Annulare,  it splits into four round
   Tendons, which pass along the upper  part of the Foot.
     Insertion.'  Into the Base of the first Phalanx ofthe
   four small Toes, by flat Tendons which are expanded
   over the upper side of the Toes to the root of the last
   Phalanx.
     Action :  To extend all the joints of the  four small
   Toes.
     A portion of this Muscle is called, by Albinos,
                   Peroncus Tertius.

     Origin : From the middle of  the  Fibula, in common
   with the Extensor Longus Digitorum : It continues,
   down to n< ar its Inferior extremity, and sends its Fleshy
   Fibres forwards  to a 1 endon  which  passes under the
   Annular Ligament.
     Insertion : Intothe root ofthe Metatarsal bone ofthe
   Little Toe.
     Action :  To assist in bending the Foot.
             Extensor Brevis  Digitorum.
     Origin : Fleshy and  Tendinous,  from  the outer and
lj  fore-part of the Os Calcis  It soon forms a Fleshy belly,
   which is divided into four portions;  these send off an 
172
 equal number of Tendons, which pass over the upper
 part ofthe Foot, crossing under the  Tendons of  the
 former Muscles.
   Insertion :  By four slender Tendons, into the Tendi-
 nous Expansion from the Extensor Pollicis, which cov-
 ers the Great Toe,  and into the tendinous Expansion
 from  the Extensor Longus, which covers  the  other
 toes, excepting the little one.
   Action  ; To assist in the extension ofthe toes.
               Aponeurosis Plantaris.
   This,  like  the Aponeurosis  Palmaris,  is a strong
 Tendinous Expansion, which covers the Muscles, Ves-
 sels, and Nerves of the Sole.
   It arises from the Tuberosity  at the under and back-
 part of the Os Calcis, and is divided into three portions,
 which run  forwarels to  be connected to the Heads  of
 the Metatarsal Bones of all the toes.  The middle Por-
 tion is subdivideel into five Slips, which split at the roots
 of the  toes, and embrace the  tendons of the Flexor
 Muscles.
   It serves the same purpose with Aponeuroses in  other
 parts ofthe Body, and  also performs the office of a Li-
 gament, by binding the  two ends of the arch of the Foot
 together.

 Plexor Brevis Digitorum Pedis,  Or Plexor Subli-.
               min, or Perforatus.
  Origin : Narrow and  Fleshy, from the inferior  ante-
terior part ofthe tuberosity of the Os Calcis, and from
the Aponeurosis  Plantaris.   It  forms a thick Fleshy
Belly, which sends oft'four Tendons; ami these split f;r
the passage ofthe Tendons ofthe Flexor Longus.
  Insertion :  Into the seoond Phalanx ofthe four small
toes.  The Tenelon ofthe little toe is often a wanting.
  Action: To bend the'first and  second Joints ofthe
Toes, but particularly the second.

 Flexor  Longus Digitorum, Or Flexor Profundus,
                   or  Perforans.
  Origin:  By  an acute  Tenelon, which soon becomes
Fleshy, from the back-part of the Tibia, at the under
edge ofthe Popl'rtetu ;  and tiii.<; be ginning is continued
down the »nner eige. oi  the Bone, by short Fiesby  Fi- 
17J
   bres ending  in  its Tendon;  also by  Tendinous  and
   Fleshy  Fibres, from the outer edge of the Tibia ;  and
   between this double order of Fibres the Tibialis Posticus
   lies inclosed.  Having gone under two Annular Liga-
   ments, it passes  through a Sinuosity at the inside ofthe
   Os Calcis ; and about the middle ofthe  Sole, it receives
   a Tendon from the Flexor Longus Pollicis ; it then di-
   vides into four tendons, which run through the  slits of
   the Perforatus.
    Insertion : Into the Base of the  third Phalanx of the
   four smaller toes, the tendons  of this, as well  as of the
   Flexor Brevis, being inclosed upon the toes by Annular
   Ligaments.
    Action : To bend the different Joints ofthe Toes out,
   especially the last one.

    plexor Digitorum Accessoriua, Or Massa Carnea
                     Jacobi Sylvii,
    Origin : By two portions s the Inner fleshy, from the
   Sinuosity  of the Os Calcis ; the outer tendinous,  but
   soon -becoming fleshy from the fore and  outer part oC
   that Bone.
    Insertion :  Into the Tendon of the  Flexor Longus,
   before it divides into smaller  tendons.
    Action : To assist the Flexor Longus.

                     Lumbricales.
    Origin: By four  Tendinous and  fleshy beginnings,
   from the  tendon of the  Flexor Profundus, just before.
   its  division ;  they run forwards, under the same general.
   appearance with those in the Hand, but  are somewhat
   .smaller.
    insertion :  By four slender Tendons, at the inside of
's  the first Joint of the four  small  toes,  into the  Tendi-
   nous Expansion  sent from tlie Extensors to  cover the
   upper part of the toes.
    Action : To increase  the flexion of the Toes,  and to
•   draw them inwards.
      Extensor Proprius Policis Pedis, or Extensor
                        Lngus.
     Origin :  By an accute, Tendinous, and fleshy begin,
f   ning, iiom the. fore-part of the fibula, some way below 
                       174

its Head; it continues its Origin from the same Bonr,
to near  the outer  Ankle,  by fleshy fibres, which des-
cend obliquely towards a Tenelon.
  Insertion : Tendinous, into the posterior part ot both
the Bones ofthe Great Toe.
  Action : To extend the Great Toe.
             Plexor Longus Pollicis.
  Origin : Tenelinous and  Fleshy,  from the back-part-
ofthe' Fibula, some wav  below its Head, being con-
tinued down the same  Bone, almost to its under end,
bv a double order of oblique Fleshy  Fibres ;  its Ten-
don  passes under an  Annular Ligament at the inner
Ankle
  Insertion : Into the last Joint ofthe Great Toe
  Action : To bend the Great Toe, and particularly the
last Joint.
              Plexor  Brevis  Pollicis.
  Origin : Tendinous, from the under  and fore-part of
the Os Calcis, and from the Os Cuneiforme Externum ;
It is  inseparably united  with  the  Abductor and Ad-
ductor Pollicis.
  Insertion ; Into the external 09  Sesamoideum, and
root ofthe first Bone ofthe Great Toe.
  Action: To bend the first Joint ofthe Great toe.
                 Abductor Pollicis.

  Origin : Fleshy,  from the anterior  and inner part of
the Protuberance ofthe Os Calcis, and Tendinous from
the sume Bone, where it jons with  the Os Naviculare.
  Insertion : Tendinous, 'into the internal Os Sesamoi-
deum, and root of the first Bone ofthe  Great toe..
  Action : To pull the Great toe from the rest.
                Adductor Pollicis.
  Origin : By a long thin Tendon,  from the under part
ofthe Os Calcis; from the Os Cuboieles; from the Os
Cuneiforme Externum ; and from the root ofthe Meta
tarsal Bone ot the second toe :  the Muscle is ditided
into two Fleshy portions, which unite, and have their
  Insertion : into the  external  Os Sesamoideum,  and
toot ofthe Metatarsal Bone of the  Gttat  Toe.
  Action ; To pull the Great Toe towards the rest. 
                        175
         Abductor Minimi  Digiti Pedis.
  Origin: Tendinous and Fleshy, from  the  edge of a
Cavity on the untler part ofthe Protuberance of the Os
Calcis, and  from the  root  of the  Metatarsal Bone of
the Little Toe.
  Insertion :  Into the outer part ofthe root ofthe first
Bone ofthe Little Toe.
  Action : To draw the Little Toe outwards.
         Flexor Previs Minimi  Digiti.
  Origin : Tendinous from  the Os Cuboides, near the
Groove for lodging the Tendon of the Peroneus Lon-
gus ;  and Fleshy, from the outer and back part of the
Metatarsal Bone of this Toe.
  Insertion;  Into the anterior extremity of the Meta*-
tarsal Bone,  and root ofthe first Bone ofthe Little Toe.
  Action : To bend this Toe.
                Transversalis Pedis.
  Origin : Tendinous, from the under and fore-part of
the Metatarsal  3one of the  Great Toe, and from the
internal Os Sesamoideum of  the first Joint.   It forms
a Fleshy Belly, whch runs transversely between the
Metatarsal Bones and Flexor  Muscles ofthe Toes, and
has its
  Insertion :  Tendinous,  into  the under and outer part
of the anterior extremity  ofthe Metatarsal Bone of the
Little Toe, and Ligament ofthe next Toe.
   Action: To contract the Foot,  by bringing the roots
ofthe outer  and inner Toes towards each other.
                interossei pedis.
  Tlie Interossei arise,  Tendinous and  Fleshy,  from,
and fill the  spaces between,  the Metatarsal Bones.—
Three, called Interai, arise with single Heads, and are
placed in the Sole ;  and  four, termed Externi  or Bi-
cipites. arise  with double  Heads,  and appear on both
sides of the  Foot.
  The Insertion of all the Interossei  is by slender Ten-
dons, into the expansion  sent off from the  Tendons of
the Lumbricales anel Extensor Muscles ofthe Toes,
              INTEROSSEI  INTKUNI.
       Prior, or Abductor Mudu Digiti.
  Origin : From the -inside of the Metatarsal Bone of
the M '•""  "- 
176
  Insertion : Into the inside ofthe root of the first Bone
of the Middle Toe.
  Action : To pull the Middle Toe inwards.
         Prior, or Abductor Tertii Digiti.
  Origin .- Prom the inner and under part ofthe Meta-
tarsal Bone of the third Toe.   «
  Insertion: Into the inside of the root of the first Bone
ofthe third Toe.
  Action :  To pull the third Toe inwards,
        Prior,  or Adductor Minimi Digiti.
  Origin : From the inside of the Metatarsal Bone of
the Little Toe.
  Insertion :  Intothe inside of the root ofthe first Bone
ofthe Little Toe.
  Action :  To pull the Little Toe inwards.
      INTEROSSEI EXTERNI, Or BICIPITES.
          Prior,  or Abductor Indicis.
  Origin:  From  the  corresponding sides of the Meta,
tarsal Bones ofthe Great and Fore-Toes.
  Insertion :  Into the inside ofthe  root ofthe first Bone
ofthe. Fore-Toe
  Action ■•  To pull the Fore-Toe inwards,
          Posterior, or Adductor Indicis.
  Origin:  From the corresponding sides ofthe fore and
second Toes.
  Insertion ■■ Into the outside of the root  of the first
Bone ot the Fore-Toe.
  Action i  To pull the Fore-Toe outwards.
      Posterior, or Adductor Medii Digiti,
  Origin: From the corresponding sides of the Meta-
tarsal Bones ofthe second and third Toes.
  Insertion : Into the outside of the root of the first
Bone ofthe  second Toe.
  Action ; To pull the second Toe  outwards,
       Posterior,  or Adductor Tertii Digiti.
  Origin : From the corresponding sides of the Meta-
tarsal Bones of the third and Little Toe.
  Insertion* lute* the outside of the root of the first
gone of the  Little Toe
  Action : To pull the third Toe outwards. 
PART  III.
                or  THE

       BURSJ3 MUCOSAE ■.

                OF THE

 STRUCTURE OF THE BOXES.

                OF THE

           LIGAMENTS,

                 AND

OTHER PARTS OF THE JOINTS.
        or THE

BURS^E MUCOSA.
  THE  Bursas belong to the  Extremities, and are
found between Tendons and Bones, where they play
upon each other, as at the insertion of the Biceps Flex-
or Cubiti :
  Or, where Tendons rub on each other; as between
those of the Extensores Carpi Radiales and Extensores
Pollicis  : 
                        178                        i
   Or, between Tendons and the external parts ; as in
 the Sheaths ofthe Tendons ofthe Flexors of the Fin-
 gers and Toes, where they furnish a lining  to  the
 Sheaths, without communicating with other parts :   4
   Or, between Tendons and Ligaments ofthe Joints V;
 as between the Tendons of the Flexors of the Fingers,
 and Capsular Ligament ofthe Wrist.
   They are found in a few places, where Processe* play
 upon Ligaments ; as between the Acromion and Cap-
 sular Ligament of the Humerus :
   Or, where Bones play on each other ;  as between thev
 Clavicle and Coracoid Process of the Scapula,
   Some of the Bursa of contiguous Tendons communi-
 cate with each other ;  as between the Extensor Carpi
 Radialis, and Extensor Secundi Internodii Pollicis.
   Others communicate not only  in  Adults, but oftea
 also in Children, with the Cavity ofthe Joints ;  as be- T
 hind the Tendon ofthe Extensors of  the Leg,  though '
 this is more frequently the case in advanced age.
   Their structure is the same with the inner Layer of
 the Capsular Ligament ofthe Joints.
   Like that, they are  formed of thin  pellucid Mem-
 brane, possessing little sensibility, and joined to the
 surrounding parts by Cellular Substance, and many of .
 them.are covered with Fat.
   Like the Capsul ofthe Joint, they have commonly a
 thin Layer of Cartilage, or of tough Membrane, be-
 tween them and the Bone.
   Like it too they have reddish coloured masses of Fat
 projecting into their Cavities, from the  edges of which
 Fringes are sent off; as behind  the  Ligament of the
 Patella, or at the insertion ofthe Teifdo-Achillis^
  Like it also, the inside of the Bursa is remarkably ...
smooth, being lubricated with the same kind of Gela-
tinous  Mucus  which is found in the Cavities ofthe
Joints ;—the Mucus serving the same general purpose
with that of the Joints, viz. to lessen the friction and '■.
prevent the consequences which would otherwise arise
from it. 
               t- I o

    BURSJE MUCOSA

             or THE

SUPERIOR EXTREMITY.
      fBursa about the Joint of the Shoulder.
   A Bursa under the Calvicle, where it plays upon the
 Coracoid Process.
   A large Bursa between the Acromion and Ligament,
 joining it to the Coracoid  Process, and the  Capsular
 Ligament ofthe Humerus.
   A small Bursa, sometimes absent, between the point
 ofthe Coracoid Process and Capsular Ligament ofthe
 Humerus.
   A Bursa between the Tendon of the Subscapularis
 Muscle and Capsular Ligament ofthe  Humerus, fre-
 quently communicating with the Cavity of that Joint.
   A  Bursa, not constant,  between  the origin of the
 Cnraco-Brachialis and short head ofthe Biceps Muscle,
 and Capsular Ligament of the Humerus.
   A Bursa between the Tendon ofthe Teres Major and
 the Os Humeri, and upper  part  of the  Tendon ofthe
 Latissimus Dorsi.
   A small Bursa between the  Tendon ofthe Lattisst-
 mus Dorsi, and Os Humeri.
   A Btusa between the Tendon ofthe long head ofthe
 Biceps Flexior Cubiti and the Humerus.
        Bursa about the Joint of the Elbow.
   A Bursa, with a Peloton of Fat, between the Tendon
 the Biceps and Tubercle of the Radius.
   A small Bursa between  the Tendon common to the
 Extensor Carpi Radialis Brevior, Extensor Digitorum,
 Communis,  and round head ofthe Radius.
   A small Bursa, between  the Tendon of the Triceps
 Extensor Cubiti and Olecranon.
>■  Burs* upon the Under  part ofthe Pore-Arm
                   and Hand.
   A very large Bursa surrounding  the  Tendon  ofthe
. Fhior Polite u> LOi^us. 
180
  Four long Bursae lining the sheaths which inclose the
Tendons of the Flexors' upon the Fingers.
  Four short Bursae on the tore-part ofthe Tendons of
the Flexor Digitorum  Sublimis in the Palm of the
Hand.
  A large Bursa between the Tendon of the Flexor
Pollicis Longus, the fore-part of the Radius, and Cap-
sular Ligament ofthe Os Trapezium.
  A large Bursa  between the Tendons ofthe Flexor
Digitorum Profundus, and the  fore-part of the end of
the Radius and Capsular Ligament ofthe Wrist.
  These two last mentioned Bursae are sometimes found
to communicate with each other.
  A Bursa between the  Tendon of the Flexor Carpi
Radialis anel Os Trapezium.
  A Bursa between the Tendon of the Flexor Carpi
Ulnaris and Os Pisiforme.
  A Bursa between the Tendon ofthe Extensor Ossis
Metacarpi Pollicis and Radius.
  A large Bursa common to the  Extensores Carpi Ra-
diales, where they cross behind the Extensor Ossis
Metacarpi Pollicis.
  Another Bursa common to the Extensores Carpi Ra-
dia' -s, where they  cross behind  the Extensor Secundi
Internodii Pollicis.
  A third Bursa at the Insertion of the tendon of the
Extensor Carpi Radialis Brevior.
  A Bursa ror the Tendon ofthe Extensor Secundi In-
ternodii Pollicis, which communicates with the second
Bursa common to the Extensores Carpi Kadiales-
  Another Bursa between the Tendon  of the Extensor
Secundi Internodii Pollicis and Metacarpal Bone of the
Thumb.
  A Bursa between the Tendons of the Extensor ofthe
Fore, Middle, and  Ring Fingers, and Ligament of the
Wrist.
  A Bursa for the Tendons  of the Extensor of the Lit-
tle  Finger.
  A Bursa between the  Tendon ofthe Extensor Carpi
Ulnaris and  Ligament ofthe Wrist. 
               181

    BURSyE  MUCOSA

             OF THE

INFERIOR EXTREMITY.
Burs* upon the Pelvis and upper part ofthe Thigh.
  A Very large Bursa between the Iliacus Internus and
Psoas Magnus Muscle, and Capsular Ligament of the
Thigh-Bone.
  A Bursa between the Tendon ofthe Pectinalis Mus-
cle and the Thigh-bone.
  A small Bursa between the Gluteus Mediusand Tro-
chanter Major, and before the Insertion ofthe Tendon
ofthe Pyriformis.
  A Bursa between the Tendon of the Gluteus Mini-
mus and Trochanter  Major.
  A Bursa between the  Gluteus  Maximus and Vastus
 xternus.
  A Bursa between the Gluteus Mediusand Pyriformis.
  A Bursa between the Obturator Internus and Os Is-
chium.
  An oblong Bursa continued  a considerable way  be-
tween the Obturator  Internus, Gemini, and Capsular
Ligament of the Thigh  bone
  A small Bursa at the Head of the Semimembranosus
and Biceps Flexor Cruris.
  A small Bursa between the origin of the Semitendino-
sus and that ofthe two former Muscles.  •
  A large Bursa  between  the  Tenelon of the  Gluteus
Maximus and root ofthe Trochanter Major.
  Two small Bursa between the Tendon of the Gluteus
Maximus and Thigh bone.
        Burs* abiiUt the Joint ofthe Knee.
  A large Bursa behind the 'Tendon of  the Extensors
ofthe Leg, frequently found to comiiiunicate  with the
Cavity of the  Knee-Joint.
  A  Bursa behind tiie  Ligament which joins  the Pa-
tella to th'e Tibia, "in the upper part of the Cavity  of
which a fattv substance projects. 
182
  A laTge Bursa between the Tendons of the Sartorius,
Gracilis, Semitentliimsus, and Tibia
  A Bursa between the Tendons ofthe Semimembra-
nosus and Gemellus, and Ligament of the Knee. This
Bursa contains a small one within it, from which a pas-
sage leads' into the Cavity of the Joint of the Knee
  A Bursa between  the Tendon of the Semibranosus
and the lateral internal Ligament of  the  Knee, from
which also there is a passage leading into  the  Joint of
the Knee.
  A Bursa under the Popliteus Muscle, likewise com-
municating with the  Cavity of the Knee-joint.

             Burs* about  the Ankle.
  A Bursa between the Tendon of the Tibialis Anticus,
and under part of the Tibia and Ligament ofthe Ankle.
  A Bursa between  the Tendon of the Extensor  Pro'-
prius, Pollicis Pedis,  and the Tibia and Capsular Liga-
ment ofthe Ankle.
  A Bursa between the Tenelons ofthe Extensor Qigi-
torum Longus and Ligament ofthe Ankle.
  A large Bursa common to the Tendons ofthe Pero-
nei Muscles.
  A Bursa proper to the Tendon ofthe Peroneus Brevis.
  A Bursa between  the Tendo Achillis and Os Calcis,
into the Cavity of which a Feloton or Mass of Fat  pro-
jects.
  A Bursa between the  Os Calcis and Flexor  Pollicis
Longus.
  A Bursa between the Flexor Digitorum Longus and
tlie Tibia and Os Calcis.
  A Bursa between the Tendon ofthe Tibialis Posti-
cus and the  Tibia and  Astragalus.
       Bun,* Mucosa in the Sole tf the F'oot.
  A second Bursa for the Tendon of the Peroneus Lon-
gus, with an oblong Peloton of fat within it.
  A Bursa common  to the Tendon  ofthe Mexor Polli-
cis Longus,  and that ofthe Flexor Digitorum Profun-
dus, at the tipper end of which a fatty substance pro-
jects.
  A Bursa for the Tendon ofthe Tibialis Posticus.
  Bursxc ofthe Tendons ofthe r'lexors ofthe Toes. 
                    1 Ocl


                 OF THE


STRUCTURE  OF THE  BONES.
  THE Bones  derive their Hardness  from the great
quantity of Earth contained in their Substance.
  They are more or less of a white or red colour, accord-
ing to the proportions of Earth  or Blood entering  into
their composition : and  are therefore  whitest in  the
Adult, and reddest in the Child, more Earth being
found ih the former, and more Blood in the latter.
  Bones are composed  of  Lamella, or plates,  which
are formed of Fibres running longitudinally, or in a ra-
diated manner, according  to the natural figure  ofthe
Bone ; as may be seen by  exposing them to the heat,
or to the weather, &c.
  The Plates of Bones are originally formed by the Ves-
sels ofthe Periosteum Externum, and Membrana  Me-
thillaris, and not, as has been  supposed by some Au-
thors, from Layers detached from the external Perios-
teum.
  The Plates are connected by Fibres, which some have
considered as Clavicula or Nails,  which  were  called
Perpendicular,  Oblique, Vc according to their different
directions.
  The outer Plates of Bones are firmly compacted, so as
to appear like  one solid substance.
  The inner Parts of Bones in general, whether long,
round, or fiat, have their plates and Threads running
in various directions,  intersecting each other, and for-
ming the  CancelU, or  Spungy Substance of the Bones j
the CancelU every where communicating freely  among
themselves.
  The CancelU,  in the middle of the long Bones,  are
Fibrous, and farm the Reticular Substance which divides
the Bone into larger caverns.
   Towards the extremities, the Cancelli are lamellated,
and  much more numerous than in the middle of long
Bones. 
                       184
  Cancelli of a similar nature to those of the long Bones
are also placed between the tables  of fiat,  and inner
parts of round Bones.
  In some of the broad Bones, however, the solid parts
are so much compressed,  as to lea\e little or no room
for  Cancelli.
  On the contrary, in the middle of the long Bones, the
Cavities are so large  as to'give the appearance of a hol-
low Cylinder.
  The  Cancella of Bones  are formed  by the internal
Plates being sent inwarels to decussate each other ; and
in the long Bones, the sides become gradually thinner
towards the extremities while  the Cancelli in propor-
tion bcqome more numerous.
  The Cancelli exist in the most solid partsof the Bones,
as can be readily seen by exposure to heat, or in bones
enlarged by elisease. In  either of these cases, small
caverns may be observed, anel are distinguishable from
the Canals for containing the Vessels, the former being
irregular, and the latter cylindrical.
  The  Cancelli support the Membranes containing the
Mairov\, as the Cellular Substance does the fat.  1 hey
also furnish a  wider surface  for the dispersion  of tlie
arteries wjiich secrete the Marrow.
  Upon the surface of Bones there are numerous Fis-
sures, for the  more intimate connection of the  Perios-
teum with the Bone, and  for lodgement to Blood-ves-
sels.
  Many  Orifices are observed  upon the Surface, and
particularly in the furrows of Bones, for the transmis-
sion of Blooel-vessels into their  substance.
  Ne ;.r the middle of most of the Bones, especially the
Ion., ones, there is a slanting  Canal for the passage ofthe
principal Medullary  Vessels.
  Numerous Orifices are also observed  at the Extremi-
ties of long Bones,  seiv.ng, some of them, for  the trans-
mission of liiood-vessels, and osiers giving attachment
to '.he  Fibres ofthe  Ligaments ot the Joints.
  l he principal Vessels pa^s into the Cancelli,  internal
Membranes, and Marrow,and return to  the Subsianceof
the Lone, where they meet those sent inwards from the
Periosteum.
  In some fiat Bones, as those of the  Cranium, the 
185
Bones are  entirely supplied by the vessels ofthe sur-
rounding Membranes, and the Vascularity there is uni-
form
  Bones, like other parts, have  their  Lympattcs,  as
appears bv the absorption of madder found elepositeel in
the Substance of the Bones of Animals which receive
it with their food ;—by the absorption  of part of the,
Bone itself, when in the diseased state and even by in-
jection.
  The Nerves ofthe Bones are  small, but may be ob-
served in certain parts ofthe Bones, and, it is presum-
ed, exist in all.
  From the minuteness ofthe  Nerves, Bones are not
sensible in the sound state ; and even  in the  diseased,
the pain felt, may be owing to the Membranes  withm
them.                                        ,
  The general use of Bones is,—to furnish attachment
to Muscles and to perfect and support the Bowels.

                    Periosteum.

  The Periosteum derives its name from its furnishing
 a general covering to the Bones.
  In certain parts, however, it is perforatedhy Muscles,
 Ligaments, or Cartilages, which are fixed immediately
 to the surface of the Bones ; and at the joints it sepa-
 rates from the Bone to give a covering to  the Capsular
 Ligaments.
   It is formed of many Fibres, which, m certain parts,
 can be  divided into Layers.
   The  outer Surface of this Membrane  is connected to
 the surrounding parts by Cellular Substance
   The inner Surface is more uniform than the outer, and
 its Fibres run, most frequently,  in the same direction
 with those of the subjacent Bones-
   The inner part ofthe Periosteum is connected to  the
 surface of the bones by Blood-vessels and Ligamentous
 Fibres ; and this connection is  much  stronger in the
 Child than in the Adult.
   The Periosteum, as well as other Membranes, must
 be supplied  with  Nerves ,<—but these are too minute to
 be readilv traced.
   The sensibility ofthe Periosteum, like  that of other 
186
Membranes, is by no means acute, though found to pos-
sess a certain degree of it.
  The principal uses of this Membrane are ;—To trans-
mit the Vessels which are spread out upon its surface
into the substance of the Bones ;—to give attachment
to Muscles ;•—to prevent the affects of friction between
ihem and the Bones ;—to assist in  binding  the latter
together, Sec.
            Membrana  Medollaris,
     Improperly called Periosteum  Internum.
  It is divitled into numberless small parts which  line
the inner side ofthe Bones and all the Cancelli,  and af-
fords a large surface for the tlispersion ofthe Secretory
Vessels of the  Marrow,  which it incloses.
                     Marrow.
  The Marrow may  be considered  as an appendage of
the general Corpus Adiposum, and is  tleposited in the
Cavities  of the Bones, while nature is supplying fat to
the rest ofthe Body.
  Like the Fat, when viewed  in a microscope, it re-
sembles a cluster of Pearls ;—or it is contained in sphe-
rical sacs upon which Vessels are minutely dispersetl,
but from which no Excretory  Ducts have yet been dis-
covered.
  It possesses  little  sensibility  ;  and  what it  does  pos-
sess  is considered by the latest  authors, as  belonging
rather to its Membranes than  to the Marrow itself.
                     Cartilages.
  Cartilages are of a white colour and elastic Substance,
and  much softer than Bones, in consequence  of the
smaller quantity of Earth entering into their composi-
tion.
  Their Structure is  not so evidently fibrous  as  that of
Bones, yet  by long  maceration,  or by tearing them a-
sunder a fibrous disposition is perceptible.
  Their  Vessels are extremely small, though they can
be readily injected in Cartilages where Bone is begin-
ning to form.   The  Vessels ofthe  Cartilages  of'the
Joints, however, seem entirely to exclude the red blood ;
BO Anatomist having yet been able  to inject them.— 
                         iar
•They have no  Cancelli, nor internal Membranes, for
lodging Marrow ; no Nerves can be  traced-to them:
nor do they possess any sensibility in the sound state.
  Upon their Surface, there is a thin Membrane term-
ed Perichondrium, which  in Cartilages supplying  the
place of Bone, as in  those ofthe Ribs, or at "the ends
of the long Bones in Children, is a continuation of the
Periotteum,  and serves the same general purposes to
Cartilage as this does to Bone.
  Upon the surface of Articular  Cartilages, the Peri,
chondrium is a reflection ofthe inner surface ofthe Cap-
sular Ligament, and is  so very thin,  and adheres so
closely, as to appear like part ofthe Cartilage itself.
  One set of Cartilages supply the place of Bone ,—or
by their flexibility, admit of a certain degree of motion,
while their elasticity recovers  their natural position,—
as in the Nose, Larynx, Cartilages ofthe Ribs, £5*c.
  Another set, in Chilelren, supply the place of Bone,
until Bone can be  formed, and afford a Nidus  for the
Osseous Fibres to shoot in ;—as in the long Bones of
Children.
  A third set, and that  the  most extensive,  by the
smoothness and slippcriness of their surface, allow the
Bones to move readily, without any abrasion ;—as in
the Cartilages of the Joints.
  A fourth set supply the Office both of Cartilage and
Ligament, giving the elasticity ofthe former and flexi-
bility of the latter ;—as in the Bones ofthe  Spine and
Pelvis-
             Of the formation of Bone.
  The generality of Bones, and  particularly the long
tr.es, are originally formed in Cartilage ; some, as those
ofthe skull, are formetl between Membranes ; and the
Teeth in distinct bags.
  When ossification is about to  begin  in a particular
part of a Cartilage,—most frequently in the  Centre,—
the Arteries, which were formerly transparent, become
dilated, anel receive the red blood from which the Os-
seous matter is secretetl.  This matter retains, for some
time, the form ofthe Vessels  which give it origin, till
more Arteries, being by degrees dilated, and more Os-
seous matter deposited, the Bone at length attains its
tct.iplete  from. 
                        188
  During the progress of Ossification  ^e surrounelin j
Cartilage bv degrees disappears, not by being changed
into Bone,  "but  by an absorption of its parts, the new-
formed bone occupying its place.
  The Ossification of broad Bones, as those ofthe Head,
begins by one or more points, from which the Osseous
Fibres issue in rays.                .        ^.u. «,»■
  The Ossification of long Bones, as in those ofthe ex-
tremities, begins by central Rings, from which  the fi-
bres extend towards the ends ot the Bones.
  The Ossification of Spherical-shaped Bones begins by
one Nucleus, as in the Wrist; and that of irregular-shap-
ed Bones br different Nuclei, as in the Vertebrx.
  Some  Bones are completely  formed  at the  time of
birth, as the small Bones of the Ear.
  The generality of Bones are incomplete until  the age
of puberty, or between the fifteen, h anel twentieth year,
and in some few instances not until a later period.
   In Children, the greater number of parts in Bones
 are  Epiphysis or Appendices, which, in Adults,  become

  ''The■ Epiphysic begin to appear after the Body of the
 Bone is ossified, and are themselves ossified  at seven
 or eight years  of age, though their external surface is
 still somewhat Cartilaginous.
   In the earlv  period of life, the Body and ends of long
 Bones make 'three distinct parts, which  can readily be
 separated by boiling, or bv maceration in water.
   The Epiph\ ses arc joined to the body of the  Bone by
 Cartilages, which  are thick in Clnldien,  but gradually
 become thinner as Ossification advances, till at last, in
 the Adult, the external marks of division  aie  not to be
 seen ; though  frequently some mark of distinction may
 be observed in the  Cancelli. 
DIFFERENT KINDS
OF
CONNECTIONS  OF THE BONES.
g      SYNARTHROSIS,
yt  Or Connection without inter-
       mediate Substance.
      SYMPHYSIS,
Or Connection by intermedi
      ate Substance.
       Suture,
    Like a scam.

     Gomphosis,
Like a Mail in a board.

     Schindelysis,
    Or Furrowing.
CThe Bones ofthe Cranium, &greaterpu
I of those ofthe Upper Jaw with each othr

j The teeth in the Alveoli.

$ Bones ofthe Septum Narium to each otiu
I
The Bodiesof the Vertebrae to each cthe
the ribs to the Sternum : the Ossa limoi
oata to the Os Sacrum, or to each other.
    Synchondrosis,
Or Connection by Carti-'
        lage.         '
     Syndesmosis,     5 The lower jaw and Os Ilyodes to the H _;;
Or Connection by Liga- (.the Ribs to the bp'me : the Processes of
       xnunt.         VVeiti.1.; x ami id«o Bouts of the Lutein
                     iucfc to each other. 
DIFFERENT KINDS OF MOTION*.
8
    ARTHRODIA;
Where the flat ends of Bones J
  are opposed to each other 1
  with little motion.         L
    GINGLIMUS.
The bones mutually receiving
  each other ; anel the liga-
  ments admitting of a hinge-
  like motion.
    ENARTHROSIS.
Or ball and  seicket, the liga- J
 . ments allowing motion in all*^
  directions.
r Between the clavicle and scapula.  The bones in the second vow ©
   the carpus.   The carpus and metacarpus.  The tibia and fibula
   The greater number of bones in the tarsus.  Tlie tarsus and me
   tatarsus.
     Angular*      *-The lower jaw and head.  The joint ofthe el
 One bone in mov- < how. The first arid second joints of tlie thumb
   ing  forming  an £ and second and third of the fingers.  The joinl
   angle with ano- < ofthe knee-  Ankle. The two last joints ol
   ther.          ^ the toes.
 Lateral or Circa- C Between the first vertebrse and processus denta-
        lar.       I tus of the second.  Between the radius and ulna.
                 f"Betwreen the occipital bone anel atlas.  Between
1     Compound.    < the different vertebrae.   And between the ribs
»-                C. and vertebra.
Tinner end ofthe clavicle. Head of theoshumeri. Between the fore-
   arm and wrist, and between the two rows of carpal bones. At the
   root of the metacarpal bone ofthe thumb, and root ofthe first pha-
   lanx ofthe fingers. Atthe head ofthe thigh-bone. Between the as-
   tragalus & os naviculare, at the root ofthe fust phalanx of tlie toes-
 
OF THE                      *
             LIGAMENTS,

                    AND

OTHER PARTS OF THE JOINTS.
   Ligaments are white, strong, flexible bodies, of an
intermediate firmness between Cartilage and common
Membrane.
  They are composed of Fibres variously disposed ;  the
greater part of them, however running in a longitutli-
nal tl;rection.
  The Ligaments, of moveable  Joints arise, for  the*
most part, from the Cervix, and beyond the edges of
the articulating Cartilage of one Bone, and are fixed,
in a similar manner, into the corresponding parts ofthe
other.
  The Ligaments thus fixed are called Capsular, from
their forming  a purse or bag, which includes the Joint.
  Where variety of motion is allowed, the Capsular Li-
gament is nearly of equal  strength rountl the whole
circumference of the JointJ but, where the Joint  is of
the,nature of  a hinge, the Ligament is strongest at the
sides of that hinge.
  The outer part of the  Capsular  Ligament  is formeel
of a continuation ofthe Periosteum,  which is connected
to the surrounding parts by Cellular Substance ; while
the inner La' er,--remarkably thin  and dense,—is re-
flected over the Bones and Cartilages which the Liga-
ment includes ; one part of it thus forming Periosteum,  ,
imd the other Perichoni.'rinm.
  In ceiiain parts of the Body there are,  besides the
Cap.ui.ii' Ligaments, othe:s for the firmer connection 
192
of the Bones, or for confining the motion to one parti-
cular side ;  as  the  round  Ligament of the Thigh, flir
Crucial or Lateral Ligaments ofthe Knee.
  Wherever the Ligaments  are  few, long, and weak,
the motions  will be  more  extensive ; and, on the con-
trary, where the Ligaments are numerous, short, and
strong, the motions  will be more limited.
  In some parts of the Body,  Ligaments  supply the
place of Bones, as in the  Pelvis ; In others, they give
origin to Muscles, as between the Radius and Ulnar
In some parts they assist in connecting immoveable
Bones ;  as the Os Sacrum and  Os  Innominatum .- la
others, they  form  a Socket  "ib which moveable Bones
play, as where part'of the Astragalus moves on the Li-
gament stretched between the  Os Calcis and Os Sca-
phoides.
  Ligaments have numerous Blood Vessels which can be
readily injected.
  Upon the inner side of the Capsular Ligaments, their
arteries secrete a liquor which assists in the lubrication
ofthe Joints.
  The Nerves of Ligaments are small, though, in some
parts, they can be easily tracetl upon their Surface.
  The Sensibility of  Ligaments, in the sound state,  is
inconsiderable ; when in a state of inflammation, how-
ever, they are  found to occasion extreme pain.
  Use of Ligaments.
  'The Capsular Ligaments connect Bones together,
assist in  the secretion of the Synovia, which they con-
tain, and prevent the other parts from being pinched in
the Joint.
  The other Ligaments  join Bones together, and pre-
serve them in their  proper situation.  In many parts,
they give attachment to  Tendons, and in some to the
Flesbj parts of Muscles.

               Mucous Substances,
       Commonly called  Glands of the Joints.
  These are Masses of Fat found in most ofthe Join'-,
covered with a continuation of the inner Layer ofthe
Capsular Ligament, and projecting  in such  a manner
as to be gently pressed, but not bruised, bv the motion
of the Joint; and, in proportion as this motion is more 
193
or less frequent, the liquor  which they secrete is dis-
chargetl in a greater or smaller quantity.
  In some Joints, they have the same appearance with
Fat in the other parts of the Body ;  in others, they are
of a redder colour, from the great number of Blood-
vessels dispersed upon them.
  They have been commonly considered as Glands lodg-
ed within the masses  of Fat ; but, upon a minute in-
spection, no knotty or Glandular bodies are tobe found
in them, nor have they the appearance of Glands, far-
ther than in being secreting substances ; which circum-
stance alone assimilates them to the nature of  Glands.
  From the edges of these Fatty bodies, Fimbria hung
loose, and convey a lubricating liquor, called Synovia,
into the cavity of the Joints.
  From the extremities of these fringes, the liquor can
be readily squeezed out by pressure ; but their cavities
and orifices are so minute,  or are otherwise of such  a
nature as to have hitherto eluded discovery.
  The Fimbriae have been generally considered  as Ex-
cretory Ducts of Glands within the Joints.  Dr. Monro,
however, in his Work  upon the Bursae  Mucosae,  sup-
poses them to  be  of the nature  of the  Follicles ofthe
Urethra, which prepare  a Mucilaginous  Liquor, with-
out  the assistance of any knotty or Glandular Organ.
  The Arteries which  supply  these  bodies  with olood
for their  secretions, anel the  Veins which  return  the
blood after the secretion, can  be readily seen ;  but no
Nems can be  traced  into them; nor does it  appear
that they possess  a  higher tlegree  of sensibility than
the  other parts of the  Joints already  described ; al-
though, when they inflame and suppurate, they have in
some instances been observed to occasion the most ex-
cruciating pain.
  The Synovia, which  is a thin Mucilaginous  litpior,
resembling the glair of an e^p;, appears to be furnish-
ed, not only by the substances already mentioned, but
also bv the inner surface of  the Capsular Ligament iq
general, and serves for the lubrication of the Joints,

          Ligaments ofthe Loweb Jaw,
  The Capsular Ligament, which arises from the whole
margin of the  Articular Cavity of the Tewpgral Bo»e, 
                       194
and is inserted, first into the edge ofthe Inter* ticular
Cartilage, alid afterwa ds round the cervix of the Low-
er law."  This Ligament, like others which  belong to
Joints ofthe hinge kind, is thickest and strongest at
the sides of the Joint, to confine the lateral motion ot
tlie Jaw.
  By it the Jaw is  allowed to move  upwards, down-
wards, or a little forwards or backwards, or to a side,
and the motions are  tendered  easier by the intenen-
tion of the Interarticular Cartilage, which follows the
Condvle in its different motions.
  The Suspensory Ligament of the Stylo-glossus Mus-
cle, which is attached  by  one end  to the Styloid Pro-
cess, and  to a  Ligament running from that Process to
the Os Hioides ; and by the other end to the  angle of
the Lower Jaw, serving  to support the Stylo-glossus
Musrle, and give origin to  part of it.
  The Lateral Ligament, which arises from the mar-
gin ofthe Articular Cavity of the Temporal Bone, and
is inserted into the inner Surface of the angle of the
Lower Jaw, near its  posterior Foramen—assisting to
keep the  Jaw  in situ, and to prevent the inferior Max-
illary Vessels  and Nerves from being injured by the ac-
tion of the Pterygoid Mus»le.

Ligaments  connecting the Head with the first and se-
  cond  Vertebrx ofthe Neck, and  these two Vertebrx with
  each other.
   Tbe two Capsular Ligaments, which arise  from near
the margin ofthe superior articulating Processes of the
Atlas, and are inserted into the Base of the Condyles
ofthe Occipital hone, where the Head  has its flexion
and extension without rotation
   Tin  Circular Ligament,  which arises  from  "he edge
ofthe  Spinal hol^ of the first Vertebra,  is connected
 wth the  Capsi.l.'i Ligament of the superior Articula-
 ting Processes of the Atlas,  and is inserted into tbe
 edge of the Foramen Magnum of tiie Occipital Bone.
   The  tuo Capsular Ligaments  which fix the inferior
 ob'ique Processes ofthe Atlas,  to the supe/mi oblique
 irt-'ihe Vrrti bia  Denfta.  and admit of the rota'inr. »f
 w'. e He a  ,., with :- small dot;lee l't inolion to either side.
   'ihe perpendicular Ligament, which fixes tlie P. dees- 
195
bus Dentatus of the second Vertebra to the edge ofthe
(interior part of the  Foramen  Magnum,  between the
Condyles.
  The two Lateral, or Moderator  Ligaments, which a-
rise each from the sitle ofthe Processus Dentatus, and
run outwards and upwards to be fixed  to the  inner
part ofthe side ofthe Atlas, and  to the inner edge of
the Foramen Magnum ; they  are short  but of great
strength, and they prevent the  Head from turning too
far round.
  The Transverse Ligament, which arises from  the in-
ner side ofthe Atlas, and going across behind the Pro-
cessus Dentatus, is fixed to the opposite side.
  The edges of this Ligament extend  upwards and
downwards, and form two  Processes, called its Appen-
dices, which are fixed  to the Foramen Magnum and Pro-
cessus Dentatus.  The middle  of the Ligament is re-
markably firm where that  Process plays upon it.  It
keeps the Processus Dentatus in its place, and prevents
it from injuring the Spinal Marrow in the different mo-
tions of the Head.

          Ligaments ofthe other Vertebrx.
  The Anterior Common  Ligaiuent of the  Vertebrx,
which is a strong Tendinous Band, embracing the con-
vex or fore-part of the Vertebrae, from the upper to the
under region of the  Spine.—It is  much  thicker upon
the fore-part than  on the sides of the  Vertebrae, by
which the Bones are  more firmly united, and is ttiinner
in the Neck anel Loins, where the motions ofthe Sf ine
are greatest, than it  is on the Back. Through its whole
course, it sends off' small Processes to be fixed to the
bodies of the Vertebrae, by which their connection is
made more secure    It prevents the.Spine from being
stretched too much backwards.
  The Capsular Ligaments, which join the articulating
Processes to each other.
  The Crucial Intervertebral Ligaments, which join the
bodies ofthe Vertebrae together, upon the outer edges
ofthe intervertebral Substances, to which  also they
firmlv adhere.
   The Intervertebral Substances  (already described along
with tlie Bones) which join the bodies of the Vertebrae 
                        196
rAgfetfter, and allo<v an yielding motion in all Ahrertions.
  These Substances are so compressible as to yield to
tbe weight of the upper part ofthe  Body ; so that, af-
ter having  been in the erect posture through the course
ofthe dav, the height of a person is diminished in the
evening, hut, after a night's rest in the usual attitude,
it is found to be restored.
  The Ligaments which run from the edge ofthe  Spi-
nal hole of one Vertebra to that of the next, so as to
assits in filling up the interstices, and in fixing the Ver-
tebrx together.
  A Ligamentous Cord which fixes the point ofthe Spi-
nous Processes together.
  Ligaments betweeen the Transverse Processes ofthe
Vertebrae of the back, fixing these Processes to each
other.
  The Posterior or Internal Common  Ligament of the
Vertebr* somewhat similar to the anterior one.
  It begins at the anterior edge of the Foramen Mag-
num, and after passing along the inner or concave part
ofthe bodies of the Vertebras and adhering firmly to
their upper and under edges, terminates at the lower
part of the Os Sacrum—It prevents  the  Spine  from
being too fnuch bent forwards.

              Ligaments ofthe Ribs.
  The Capsular Ligaments of the Heads  of the Ribs,
which arise from these  Heads, and are fixed to the cir-
cumference of the  Pits on the sides ofthe bodies ofthe
Vertebrae  and Intervertebral Cartilages ;—the outer
part of each Ligament sending off', or  being connected
with radiated  Fibres which  are spread out  upon the
sides ofthe Vertebrae.
  The Capsular Ligaments ofthe Tubercles of the Ribs,
which arise round the Articular  Pits  on  the points of
the Transverse Processes ofthe Vertebrx of the back,
and are fixed round the Tubercles ofthe Ribs.
  The Internal Ligaments ofthe  Baci of the Ribs, call-
ed Ligamenta  Trunsversaria Interna, which arise from
the interior Surface of the Transverse Processes, and
are fixed to the superior margin of the Neck of the
nearest Ribs.
  The External Ligaments ofthe Ned ofthe Ribs, call- 
                        197
ed Ligamenta Trantversaria Externa. They arise from
the point of all the Transverse processes externally,
and are fixed to the back-part ofthe  Neck ofthe Ribs.
  Ligamenta Cervices Costarum Externa, or External
Ligaments ofthe Neck of the Ribs, which arise from the
external, nmigin of the inferior oblique Processes,  and
descend obliquely outwarels, to be fixed to the upper
aud outer part of the Neck of all the Ribs.
  The  Ligaments at this end of the Ribs, together with
the situation ofthe Transverse Processes, admit of their
motion upwards and downwards, but prevent them from
moving in any other direction.
  Short Ligamentous Fibres, which run from the mar-
gin of the anterior extremity ofthe Bibs to the margin
of their corresponding Cartilages; the  Cartilage and
Rib being joined by an union of Substance.
  Radiated Ligaments, which go from the anterior Surf-
face of the  Capsular Ligaments upon the external Sur-
face of tlie Sternum.
  Many ofthe Fibres of these Ligaments intermixing
with their fellows on the opposite  side.
  The  Capsular Ligaments of the Cartilages  ofthe Ribs,
which arise from the margin of the Articulai Cavities
ofthe Sternum, and are fixed round the extremities of
the seven true Ribs.
  Membrane proper to  the Sternum.  This is a firm  ex-
pansion composetl of T enelinous Fibres running in dif-
ferent directions, but chiefly in a longitudinal one, and
covering the anterior and  posterior Surfaces  of  the
Bone, being confoundeel with the  Periosteum.
  Ligaments  of the Cartilago  Ensiformis.   They  are
part of the  proper Membrane of the Sternum, divided
into strong bands which  run obliquely  from the under
and fore-part ofthe second  Bone of the Sternum, and
from the Cartilages of the seventh pair of  Kibs, to be
fixed to the Cartilago Ensiformis.—The Ligaments co-
vering the Sternum, serve considerably to strengthen
that Bone.
  Thin Tendinous Expansions,  which run over the In-
tercostal Muscles at the fore-part of the Thorax,  and
connect the Cartilages ofthe Ribs to each  other. 
                198

         LIGAMENTS

              OF THE

BONES OF THE PELVIS.
   THE two Transverse Ligaments ofthe Pelvis, which
arise from the posterior part ofthe Spine ofthe Os Ilium,
and run transversely.  The superior is fixed to the Trans-
verse Process of the last Vertebrae of the  Loins ; the
inferior to the first Transverse Process ofthe Os Sacrum.
   The  Ilea Sacral  Ligaments,  which  arise from the
posterior Spinous Process "of the Os Ilium, descend ob-
liquely, and are fixed to the first, third, and fourth spu-
rious Transverse Processes ofthe Os Sacrum.
   These, with the two Transverse Ligaments, assist in
binding the Bones together, to which they are connected.
   The Capsular Ligament of the Symphysis  of the Os
Ilium and Sacrum, which surrounds the joint, and assists
in connecting the two Bones to each  other.
   A verv thin Cartilage within this Joint, which cements
the two Bones strongly together, and which constantly
adheres to the Os  Sacrum, when the Joint is'opened.
   The back-part ofthe Joint,  formed of a Ligamentous
and Cellular  Substance, containing Mucus, which a^so
ass's's in fixing the two Bones to each other, in such  a
manner as to allow no motion.   The  Joint, however,
along with its fellow, and  that between the Ossa Pubis,
are useful in eiiminishing the effects which might result
from concussion.                        t
   The two Sacro-Ischiatic  Ligaments situated in the un-
der and back-part of the I'e-lvis.  They arise in common
from the Transverse Processes of the  Os Sacrum, and
likewise  from the under and lateral part of that Berne,
and from the  upper part ofthe Os Coccygis.  The first,
called  the Large External, or Posterior, descends ob-
liquely, to be fixed to the tuberositt of the Os Ischium.
These  two Ligaments assist in binding  the Bones of the
Pelvis, in supporting its contents, and in giving origin
to part of its  Muscles. 
                        199
  There are two Membranous Productions which are con-
nected with the large Sacro-Ischiatic Ligament, termed
by Weitbrech i, its Superior and Inferior Appendices.
  The Superior Appendix, which is Tendinous, arises
from the back-part ofthe Spine ofthe Os Ilium, anel is
fixed along the outer edge ofthe Ligament, which it in-
crease k in breadth.
  The Inferior, or  Falciform Appendix, situated within
the cavity ofthe Pelvis, the back-part of which is con-
nected with the middle ofthe large External ^Ligament,
and the rest of it is extended round the Curvature of
the Os Ischium.
  These two productions assist the large sacro-Ischiatic
Ligament in furnishing a more commodious situation
for, and insertion of part ofthe Gluteus Maximus and
Obturator Internus Muscles.
  Besides the Ileo Sacro, and Sacro Ischiatio Ligaments,
several other Slips are observed upon the back of the
Os Sacrum, which descend  in an irregular manner, anel
strengthens the connection  between that Bone and the
Os Ilium.
  The large holes upon the back part ofthe Os Sacrum
are also surrounded with various Ligamentous Expan-
sions, projecting from  one  Tubercle  to  another, and
giving origin to Muscular  Fibres, and  protection to
small Vessels and Nerves which creep undcjr them.
   A General Covering sent down from the Ligaments of
the Os Sacrum, which  spreads  over and connects  the
different pieces of the  Os Coccygis together, allowing
considerable motion, as already mentioned  in the de-
scription of this Bone.
  Longitudinal Ligaments of the Os  Coccygis, which ele-
scend from those  upon  the Dorsum  of the Os Sacrum,
to be fixed to the  back part of the  OsCoccygis.   The
Ligaments of this Bone prevent  it from being pulled too
much forwards by the action of the Coccygeus Muscle,
and they restore the  Bone to its natural situation, after
the Muscle has ceased to act.
  The Inguinal Ligament,  or Poupart's,  or  Fallopius's
Ligament  which runs tranversely from the anterior su-
perior Spinous Process of the Os Ilium to the crest or
angle of the Os Pubis.   It  has been formerly described
as the under margin ofthe Tendon of the external ob-'
      v< "   "              " 
                      200
lique Muscle ofthe Abdomen.  By Weitbrecht ajid
some others, it is regarded as a distinct Ligament.  It
contributes to the support of the Viscera  at the under
end of the Abdomen, and furnishes  a  passage  to the
Muscles, Vessels,  and  Nerves, which  go behind it.
from the Pelvis to tlie Thigh.
  The Capsular Ligament of tbe Symphysis ofthe Ossa
Pubis, which joins the two Bones to  each other exter-
nally.
  The Ligamentous Cartilage, which unites the two Os-
sa Pubis so firmly together as to admit of no motion ;
excepting in the state of Pregnancy, when this  Liga-
mentous Cartilage is frequently found to be so  much
thickened  as to yield a little in the time of delivery.
  The Obturator Membrane, or  Ligament of the  Fora-
men Thyroideum.  It adheres to the margin ofthe Fo-
ramen Thyroideum, and fills the whole  of that opening,
excepting the oblique notch at its upper part, for the
passage of the Obturator Vessels and Nerve.   It as-
sists in supporting the  contents of the Pelvis, and in
giving origin to the Obturator Muscles.
        LIGAMENTS

              OF THE

SUPERIOR  EXTREMITY.
  Connection ofthe Inner End of the Clavicle.
  Radiated Ligavients, which arise from the Surface of
the inner end of the Clavicle, and are fixed round the
edge of the corresponding  Articular Cavity of the
Sternum.
  T he Capsular Ligament which, lies within the former.
  The Inter-articular Cartilage, which divides the Joint
into two distinct Cavities, and accommodates the arti-
culating Surfaces ofthe Clavicle and Sternum- 
                        201
  Tlie Inter-clavicular Ligament, joining the Clavicles
together behind the top of the Sternum,  and partly
formed by a continuation ofthe radiated Ligaments.
  The Ligamentum Rhomboideum,  which arises from
the inferior rough Surface at the anterior extremity of
the Clavicle, and is fixed to the Cartilage  of the first
Rib.
  By the Ligaments of this Joint, with the assistancp
of the intervening Cartilage, the shoulder is allowed to
move in different directions, as upon a center.
  The Ligaments which join the posterior extremity of
the Clavicle to the Acromion, and have a Capsular Li-
gament within,  and  sometimes  an  inter-articular Car-
til jfge.
  The Ligamentum Trapezoideum,  which arises from
the point ofthe Coracoid Process,  and is fixed to the
under edge ofthe Clavicle.
  A thin Ligamentous Slip which comes fr.nn the Ten-
don ofthe. Subclavian Muscle, or  from the Clavicle,
and joins the Trapezoid Ligament.
  The Ligaments fixing the Clavicle to the Scapula are
of such strength, as to allow only a small degree of mo-
tion, and that chiefly of a rolling or twisting nature.

         Ligaments proper to the Scapula.
  The Proper Anterior Triangular Ligament of the Sca-
pula, which arises brpael  from  the  external Surface of
the Cojracoid Process, anel becomes narrower  where it
is fixed to the posterior margin of the Acromion.
  Tl^is Ligament fprms  one continued Surface.  It is
thickest, however, on each side, and these thicker parts
are united by a thin intermediate Ligamentous Mem-
brane, which, when removed, gives to the Ligament the
appearance of being double—It confines the  Tendon
ofthe Supra Spinatus Muscle,  and assists  in protect-
ing the upper and inner  part ofthe  Joint ofthe Hume-
rus.
  The Posterior Ligament of the Scapula, which is some-
times double, and is stretched across the semilunar
notch of the Scapula,  forming that notch into one or
two holes for the passage of the superior posterior Sca-
pulary Vessels  and Nerves.   It also gives rise to part
ofthe r^',vi" Uirrti»l»»ii« Muscle. 
202
    Ligaments, 8cc ofthe Joint ofthe Shoulders.
  The Capsular Ligament, which arises from the Cer-
vjx of the Scapula, behind the margin of the Glenoid
Cavity, and is fixecl round the Neck ofthe Os Humeri,
looseU inclosing the Ball of that Bone.
  A  Fimbriated Organ within the Capsular Ligament,
for the secretion ofthe Synovia.
  A  Sheath sent down from the fore-part of the Capsu-
lar Ligament between the Tuberosities of the Os Hu-
meri, which encloses the Tenelon ofthe Long Head of
the Biceps Flexor Cubiti Muscle.
  Additional Ligamentous  Bands of the Capsular Liga-
ment,  which  adhere  to  its   anterior  Surface.—■ That
which gives most strength to this Joint,  as well as to
several other Joints  of the Body, is the covering from
the surrounding Muscles.
  From the shallowness of the  Glenoid Cavity, from
the extent and looseness ofthe Capsular Ligament, and
from the Structure ofthe other parts of the Joint, more
extensive motion is allowed to tbe Os Humeri than to
any other Bone of the Body ; as it cannot only move
freely to  every side, but possesses a considerable de-
gree of motion upon its own axis.
      Ligaments, &c. ofthe Joint ofthe Elbow.
  The Capsular Ligament, which arises round the mar-
gin of the Articular  Surface, at  the  lower end of the
Os Humeri, and is fixed about the edge ofthe  Articu-
lar Surface of  the Ulna,  and aUo to the Coronary Li-
gament ofthe  Radius.
  The sides of the Elbow-Joint are strengthened by two
ligamentous Bands, which adhere  so firmly to the Cap-
sular Ligament, that they appear to be part of its Sub-
stance, viz.
   The Brachio  Cubital or Internal Lateral Ligament,
which arises from the foie-part ofthe inner Comlyle of
the Os Humeri, and spreads  out, in a radiated manner,
to be fixetl to the inside ofthe Coronoid Process ofthe
Ulna, and
   t :>  :irachio-Radial,or External Lateral Ligament,
wluc. is  like the former, but larger.  It arises from the
external  Condyle of the Os  Humeri,  andspreads out
upon the Coronary Ligament, to which it is  inserted. 
203
  The Coronary, Annular, or Orbicular Ligament of the
Radius, which arises from one side ofthe small Semilu-
nar Cavity ofthe Ulna, and after surrountling the Neck
ofthe Radius, is fixed to the other side of that Cavity.
The upper edge of it is incorporated with, and may be
considered as a part of the Capsular Ligament, while
its under edge is fixed  round the neck of the Radius,
allowing that Bone to move freely round  its own axis,
upon the  Articular Surface of the Os Humeri, and in
the small Semilunar Cavity ofthe  Ulna.
  Besides the Ligaments already described, there are
others which run  in various directions upon  the  fore
and back-parts of the Joint, contributing to its strength,
and having the names of Anterior and  Posterior Acces-
sory Ligaments.
  The Ligaments ofthe Bones of the Joint of the El-
bow form a complete hinge, which allows the fore-arm
to have free flexion and extension upon the Os Humeri,
but no rotation when the Arm is in the extended state,
though a small degree of it is perceptible when the
Joint  is moderately bent, and the Ligaments thereby
relaxed.
   Within the  Capsular Ligament, and chiefly  in the
upper part ofthe  pits of the Os Humeri, in which the
Olecranon and Coronoid Process of the Ulna play, the
Fatty Substance is lodged for the lubrication of the joint.

Ligaments between the Bodies and  Under Ends ofthe
                  Radius and Ulna-
   The Interosseous  Ligament,  which extends between
the sharp ridges ofthe Radius  and Ulna, filling  up the
greater part of the space between these tw o Bones, and
composed of small Fasciculi,  or  Fibrous Slips,  which
run obliquely downwards and inwards.  Two  or three
of these, however, go in the opposite direction ; and one
of them, termed Oblique Ligament,  and Chorda  Trans-
versalis Cubiti, is  stretched between the Tubercle of
the Ulna and under part ofthe Tubercle of the Radius.
—In different parts of the Ligament  there are perfo-
rations for the passage  of Blood-vessels from the fwre
to the back-part of the Bone,  and a  large opening is
found at the upper partof it, which is filled up by Mus-
cles.   It prevents  the  Radius from  rolling too much
                       M  2 
204
 outwards, and furnishes a commodious attachment for
 Muscles.
   The Capsular or Sacciform Ligament, which  arises
 from the edges of the Glenoid Cavity of the under end
 ofthe  Radius, and surrounds the''head of the Ulna, a|-)
 lowing the Radius to turn upon'the Ulna in performing'
 the different motions of pronation and supination  ofthe
 Hand.
  Ligaments,"&6. between the fore-arm and Wrist.
   The Capsular Ligainent, which arises from the mar-
 gin ofthe extremity ofthe Radius, and from the edge
 ofthe  moveable Cartilage at the head ofthe Ulna, and
 is fixed to the Cartilaginous edge of the three first bones
 of the Carpus.
   The Inter-artieularCartilagi'^As.ted between the head
 ofthe Ulna and Os Cuneiforme, and which is a continu-
 ation of the Cartilage covering the end ofthe Radius.
   The Two lateral Ligaments which arise from the Sty-
 loid-Process of the Radius and Ulna, and are fixed to
 the Bones ofthe Carpus nearest them.
   The Ligaments of this joint allow extensive motion:
 forwards and backwards, and a considerable'degree'of
 it to either side.
   The Mucous' Ligament  which lives within the joint.
 It extends from the groove between the two first  Bones
 ofthe Carpus, to the corresponding part of the Radius,
 and is supposed to regulate the Mucous Organ connect-
 ed with it.
           Ligaments ofthe Carpus.
  The  Anterior; Annular,or Transverse Ligament,wh\ch
 is stretched across from the projecting points of the
 Pisiforme and Unciforme Bones, to theOs Scaphoides and
 Trapezium, and forms an arch which covers  and pre-
 serves in their places the Tendons of the Flexor Mus.
 cles ofthe Fingers.
  The  Capsular Ligament which arises from the Carti-
laginous edges ofthe upper row, and is fixed in a simi-
lar manner to those ofthe under row ofthe Carpus, ad-
 mitting chiefly' of flexion and extension, and that in a
 smaller degree than in the former joint.
  The short Ligaments of the bones of the Carpus, which
we small ligamentous Slips running in various directions, 
205
joining the different Bones ofthe Carpus,—first of the
same row, then of the two rows together.  They are
termed Oblique,  Transverse, Capsular, and Proper Liga-
ments of the Bones of the Wrist, and  admit only of a
small degree of yielding between the different bones in
the same row.

 Ligaments between the Carpal and Metacarpal Bones.
  The Articular  Ligaments, which arise from the mar-
gins ofthe second row ofthe Carpal Bones, and are fixed
to the margins of the bases of those of the Metacarpus.
Other Ligennents run in a radiated manner from the  Car-
pal to the  Metacarpal Bones; the  whole getting the
names of Articular, Lateral, Straight, Perpendicular, t5*c.
according to their different directions.
  From the Flatness of the Articular Surfaces,  and
strength of the connecting Ligaments, very little mo-
tion is allowed between the Carpus and Metacarpus.
Ligaments between extremities of the Metacarpal Bones.
  The Interosseus Ligaments at the Bases of the Meta-
carpal Bones.  They  are short slips, which  run trans-
versely, and join these Bones to  each other,  obtaining
the names of Dorsal, Lateral, or Palmar, according to
their different situations.
  The Interosseus Ligaments at the Heads ofthe Meta-
carpal Bones, which run transversely in the Palm,  and
connect the heads of these bones to each other.

 Ligaments at the Base ofthe Metacarpal Bone ofthe
      Thumb, and of the first joint of the Fingers.

  These consist of the  Capsular Ligaments, which in-
close the joints, and  the Lateral Ligaments which are
situated  at the  sides of the former, adhering to, and
strengthening them ; the whole admitting of  Flexion,
extension,  and lateral motion.

 Ligaments of the first and second joints ofthe Thumb,
      and second and third joints  ofthe Fingers.
  The Capsular  Ligaments inclosing the Joints.
  The Lateral  Ligaments placed  at the  sides of the
joints, and adhering to the Capsular Ligaments, confin-
ing  the motion to flexion and extension. 
206
  Ligaments retaining the Tendons of the Muscles cf
          the  Hands and  Fingers in situ.
  The Anterior, Transverse, or Annular Ligament ofthe
Wrist,—already described.
  The Vaginal Ligaments of the Flexor Tendons, which
are fine Membranous Webs connecting the Tendons of
the Sublimis, first to each  other, then to  those of tbe
Profundus, and forming at the same time, Bursx Muco-
sae, which surround the Tendons.
  The Vaginal, or Crucial  Ligaments ofthe Phalanges,
which arise from the ridges on the concave side ofthe
Phalanges, and run  over  the Tendons  of the Flexor
Muscles ofthe Fingers.  Upon the body ofthe Phalan-
ges, they are thick and strong, "to bind down the Ten-
dons ; but over the joints  they are thin, and have, in
some  parts, a  Crucial appearance, to allow  the ready
motion of the Joints.
  The Accessory Ligaments of the Flexor  Tendons of
the  Fingers, which are small Tendinous Frana, arising
from the first  and second  Phalanges of the Fingers.
They run  obliquely forwards within the Vaginal Liga-
ments, terminate in the Tendons ofthe two Flexor Mus-
cles ofthe Fingers, and assist in keeping them in their
places.
  The  External  Transverse  Ligaments of the  Wrist,
which  is part  of  the Aponeurosis  of the Fore-Arm,
extending across the back of the Wrist, from the extre-
mity ofthe Ulna and Os Pisiforme to the  extremity of
the Radius.  It is connected with the small Annular
Ligaments which  tie down the Tendons of the Exten-
sores Ossis Metacarpi et primi Internodii Pollicis,  and
the Extensor Carpi Ulnaris.
  The  Vaginal Ligaments which adhere to the former
Ligaments, and serve as sheaths and Bursx Mucosae to
the Extensor Tendons ofthe  Hand and Fingers.
  The  Transverse Ligaments, ofthe Extensor Tendons,
which are Aponeurotic Slips running between the Ten-
dons, near the  heads ofthe Metacarpal Bones, and re-
taining them in their places. 
        LIGAMENTS

             OF THE

INFERIOR EXTREMITY.
  Ligaments connecting Os Femoris with Os
                 Innominatum.
  The  Capsular Ligament, which is the largest and
fnongest ofthe Body, arises round the outside of tbe
Prim  ofthe  Acetabulum, embraces the head ofthe
  high-bone, and incloses the whole of its Cervix to the
'< -it or outer extremity, round which it is firmly con-
i.ected.
  The outer part ofthe Capsular Ligament is extended
further down than the inner, which is  reflecteel  back
u:>on the neck of the  Bone, and in certain parts forms
f.'ctinacula.
  It is every where ofthe same strength.   It is thick-
est  anteriorly ; thinner where it  is covered by the in-
t  rnal  Iliac  Muscle; and thinnest posteriorly,  where
( •■•  adjacent Quadratus Muscle is opposed to it.
  !t is strengthened  on  its outer  Surface by various
a!.-essory or  additional slips, which run down from the
J  tiicia Lata and surrounding Muscles ; but the stron-
(,. st of these slips arises with diverging Fibres from
iiu-  interior anterior Spinous Process ofthe Os Ilium.—
The Capsular Ligament allows the  Thigh-bone to be
■  "v ed to every side, and to have  a small degree of ro-
tt'on.
  i  he Internal, commonly called the Round Ligament,
w i >h arises by a broad flat beginning from  the under
  .". inner part ofthe  Cavity ofthe Acetabulum, and is
i    ccted with the Substance termed Gland of the Joint.
From  this it runs backwards and a little upwards, be-
io.u',ng gradually narrower and rounder, to be fixed to
!,,•  I »it upon the inner Surface of the Ball ofthe Os
1'err. oris. 
208
  The round Ligament prevents  the  bone from being
dislocated upwards, and assists in agitating the Mucous
Substance within the Joint.
  A Cartilaginous Ligament surrounding the Brim of
the Acetabulum, and thereby increasing the  depth of
that cavity for the reception of the head ofthe Thigh-
bone.
  A double Cartilaginous  Ligament, stretched from one
end ofthe breach, in the under  and  fore-part  of the
Acetabulum,  to the other, but leaving a hole behind it
for containing part of the Substance called Gland of the
Joint, and for the passage ofthe Vessels of that  Sub-
stance.
  This Ligament allows the Thigh-bone to be moved
inwards, and the Glandular-looking Substance to be a-
gitated with safety.
  The Substance called Gland of the Joint, covered with
a Vascular Membrane, and lodged in  a depression in
the under and inner part ofthe Acetabulum.
  At the edges of this Substance, Fringes are sent out,
which furnish part of the Synovia for the lubrication of
the Joint,
  rI ot- edges of this substance are fixed to those ofthe
Pit in the Acetabulum, by small Ligamentous Bridles,
termed Ligamenta Mucosa, or Ligamentula Mastx Aii-
poso-Glandulosx.

      Ligamenta, l$c. ofthe Joint ofthe Knee.

  The Lateral Ligaments which lie at the  sides ofthe
Joint, and adhere to the outer Surface of the Capsular
Ligament
  The Internal Laternal Ligament, which  is of consi-
derable  breadth, arises from the upper part and Tuber-
cle ofthe internal Condyle of the Os Femoris, and is
inserted  into the upper and inner part of the Tibia.
  The long External Lateral Ligament, which  is  nar-
rower, but thicker and stronger than the former, arises
from the Tubercle above the  external Condyle of the
Os Femoris,  and is fixed to the Fibula, a little below
its head-
  Behind the long external Lateral Ligament, there is
an 'Expansion attached  nearly in the same manner as 
209
this Ligament, and has been termed the external short
Laternal Ligament-
  These Ligaments prevent lateral motion, and the rol-
ling of the Leg in the extended state, but admit of a
•malldegree of both these motions whentheLimbisbent.
  The Posterior Ligament of WiksIjOw, formed  of ir-
regular bands which  arise from the upper and back-
part of the external Condyle of the  Os Femoris, and
descend obliquely over the  Capsular Ligament,  to be
fixed under the inner and back-part of the head of the
Tibia,—preventing the Leg from being pulled farther
forwards than to a straight line with the Thigh. It also
furnishes a convenient situation to  the beginnings of
the Gastrenemius the Plantaris Muscles.
  When this Ligament is wanting, which is sometimes
the case, its place is then supplied by a Membraous Ex-
pansion.
  The Ligament of the Patella, which arises from a
depression behind the Apex of the Bone, and is  fixed
to the Tuberosity of the Tibia. By the  intervention of
this Ligament, the Muscles fixed to the Patella are en-
abled to extend the Leg.
  The Capsular Ligament which arises from the whole
circumference ofthe under end ofthe Thigh-bone, some
way above the margin of the articulating Cartilage, and
above the posterior part of the great notch between the
Condyles.  From this it descends  to be  fixed round the
head of the Tibia, and into  the whole margin of the
Articulating Surface ofthe Patella, in  such a manner
that this Bone forms part ofthe Capsule ofthe Joint.
  The Capsular Ligament is of itself remarkably thin,
but so covered by the Ligaments already mentioned, by
the general Aponeurosis, and by the Tendons of Mus-
cles which surround the Joint, as to acquire a conside-
rable degree of strength.
  The Capsular  Ligament along with the other Liga-
ments  of this Joint, admit of the flexion and extension
of the  Leg, but of no lateral nor rotatory motion in the
extended state, though of a small  degree of each when
the Limb is fully bent.
  Ligamentum Alare,  majus et minus, which are folds
6f til" *"""P=«la«' T io-ampnt. rtinmncr like wings at the 
210
sides ofthe Patella, to which, and to the Fatty Substance
ofthe Joint, they are attached
  Ligamentum Mucosum, which is continued from th«,
joining ofthe Alar Ligaments to be.fixed to the Os Fe-
moris  immediately above the anterior  Crucial Liga-
ment, and which preserves the Fatty Substance ofthe
Joint in its proper place, in the  various motions ofthe
Joint.
  The two Crucial, or internal Ligaments which arise
from the hollow between the Condyles ofthe Os Femo-
ris, and decussate each other within the cavity ofthe
Joint.
  The anterior Crucial  Ligament, which  runs down-
wards and forwards,  to be fixed to a Pit  before  the
rough Protuberance in the middle of  the Articulating
Surface ofthe head of the Tibia.
  The posterior Crucial Ligament, which runs  down-
wards, to be fixed to a Pit  behind the above mentioned
rough Protuberance.
  These  Ligaments, in the extended  state ofthe Leg,
pre\ ent it from going forwards beyond a  straight Line.
When the knee is bent, they admit the Foot to be turn-
ed outwards, but not inwards.
  The two Inter-articular Cartilages, called  Semilunar
from their shape, placed upon the top ofthe Tibia.
  The outer convex edge of each of these Cartilages is
thick, while the inner concave edge becomes gradually
thinner,  whereby the Sockets for the  Condyles of the
Os  Femoris are rendered deeper, and this Bone and the
Tibia more accurately adapted to each other.
  Each of these Cartilages is  broad in the middle, and
their extremities become narrower and thinner as they
approach each other.  These extremities are termed
Cornua, anel are fixed by Ligaments to the Protuberance
of the Tibia.  The anterior Cornua are joined to each
other by a Transverse Ligament.
  The convex etlge of these Cartilages is fixed to the
Capsular and other Ligaments, in such a manner as to
allow them to play a little upon the Cartilaginous Sur-
face of the Tibia, by  which the  motions of that Bone
upon the Condyles ofthe Os Femoris  are facilitated.
  The Mucous or Fatty Substances of the Joint, which 
                         211

  are the'most considerable of any in the,Body, and are
  ■jy»ated in the. different interstices  of the  Joint, but
  chiefly round the edges ofthe  Patella.
    The Fimbrixt which discharge Synovia for the lubri-
  cation of the Joint, projecting from  the edges of the
  Fatty Substance.

    Ligamenta connecting the Fibula to the Tibia.
   vThe Capsular Ligament ofthe superior extremity of'
  the Fibula, which ties it to the outer part ofthe head
  ofthe Tibia, and which is strengthened by the external
  Lateral Ligament ofthe Knee, and  by the   Tendon of
  the Biceps Muscle which is  fixed to the Fibula.
   The Interosseus Ligament  which fills the  space be-
  tween the Tibia  and Fibula, like the Interosseous Li-
  gament ofthe Fore-arm,  and is of a similar  structure,
  being formed of oblique Fibres, and perforated in va-
  rious places for the passage of Vessels and Nerves.
   At the upper part of it there is a large opening, where
  the Muscles of the opposite sides are in contact, and
  where Vessels and Nerves pass to the fore part ofthe
  Leg-
   It serves chjefiy for  the origin of part ofthe Muscles
 which belong to the Foot.
   The Ligaments of the inferior extremity of the  Fi-
 bula, which are called Anterior superior and Posterior su- •
 perior, according to their situations.  They arise from
 the edges ofthe Semilunar cavity ofthe Tibia, and are
 fixed to the Malleolus Externus of the Fibula.
   The Ligaments between the ends ofthe Tibia, and
 Fibula, fix the two Bones so firmly together as to admit
 of no sensible motion.
 Ligaments connecting  the Bones of the Tarsus with
                  those of the Leg.
   The Anterior Ligaments of the  Fibula, which arises
 from the anterior part of the Malleolus Externus, and
 passes obliquely forwards,  to  be fixeel  to the upper and
 outer part ofthe Astragalus.
  The middle ov Perpendicular Ligament  ofthe Fibula,
which arises from the point ofthe Malleolus Externus,
and descends almost perpendicularly, to be fixed to the
outside of the Os Calcis. 
212
   The Posterior Ligament of the Fibula, which arises
 from the under and posterior p^rtof the  Malleolus Ex-
 ternus, and runs backwards, to  be  fixed to the outer
 and posterior part ofthe Astragalus.
   The Ligamentum, Deltoides ofthe Tibia, which arises
 from the Malleolus Internus, and descends in a radiated
 firm, to be fixed to the Astragalus, Os Calcis, and Os
 Naviculare.
   The Capsular Ligament, which  lies within the former
 Ligaments, and  is remarkably thin, especially before
 and behind, for the readier motion ofthe Joint.  It a-
 rises from the margin of the Articular Cavity ofthe
 Tibia and  Fibula, antl  is fixed round the edge  ofthe
 Articular Surface ofthe  Astragalus.
   The ligaments and other parts  ofthe structure ofthe
 Ankle-joint form it into a complete hinge, which allows
 fe\ om and extension, but no rotation or lateral motion,
 in the bended state ofthe Foot, though a small degree
 of each when it is fully extended.

              Ligaments of the  'Paraus.
   The Capsular Ligament, which fixes the Articular
 Surface ofthe Os Calcis to that ofthe Astragalus:
   A number of short  Ligaments lying in the  Fossa  of
 the Astragalus and ofthe Os Calcis, and forming the
 Ligamentous apparatus ofthe Sinuous Cavity, which as-
 sists in fixing the two Bones strongly together
   The Capsular,  £\e broad Superior, and the internal
 Lateral  Ligaments, connecting the  Astragalus to the
 Os Naviculare, and admitting of the lateral and rota-
 tory motion ofthe Foot.
   'The superior, the lateral and the inferior  Ligaments,
 fixing the Os  Calcis to the Os Cuboides,  where a small
 degree of motion is allowed to every side. The inferior
 Ligaments consist of a long and oblique, and a Rhomboid
 Ligament, which are the longest and strongest of the
 Sole.
   The superior-superficial, the Interosseous, and the In-
ferior Transverse Ligame-nts, which fix the Os Navicu-
 lare and Os Cuooides to each other.
   Tl,.? superior-lateral, and Plantar Ligaments,  which
 fix the Os Naviculare to the Os Cuneikirme.
   'I iie superic .uptrjiciaf, and the Plantar   L'gaments, 
                       213
which connect the  Os Cuboides to the Os Cuneiforme
Externum.
  The  Dorsal and Plantar Ligaments, which unite the
Ossa Cuneiformia to each other.
  Besides the Capsular  Ligaments of the Tarsus al-
ready  mentioned,  each  of the other Joints  of these
Bones is furnished with its proper Capsular  Ligament.
  From the strength ofthe Ligaments which unite these
Bones to each other, and from the plainness of their
Articulating Surfaces, no more motion is allowed than
to prevent the effects of concussion in walking, leap-
ing,  &c.
  Ligamenta  between the Taraua and Metataraua.
  The  Bones of the MetatarsOs fixed  to those ofthe
Tarsus by Capsular, and numerous other  Ligaments,
which,  are called Dorsal, Plantar, Lateral, according
to their situations ; and Straight, Oblique, or Transverse,
according to their directions. The nature of this Joint is
the same with that between the Carpus and Metacarpus.
Ligamenta connecting the Metataraal Bonce to each
                       other.
  The Dorsal, Plantar, and Lateral Ligaments, which
connect the bases of the Metatarsal Bones with  each
other.
  The  Transverse  Ligaments, which Join the  heads of
these Bones together.
     Ligaments ofthe Phalanges ofthe Tois.
  The Capsular and Lateral Ligaments, as in the Fingers.
  Ligaments and Sheaths retaining the Tendons of
     the Muscles of the Foot and Toes,  in  situ.
  The Annular Ligament ofthe Tarsus, which is a thick-
ened part ofthe Aponeurosis of the Leg,  splitting in-
to superior and inferior portions, which bind down the
Tendons of the Extensors of the Toes, upon the fore-
part ofthe Ankle.
  The Vaginal Ligament of the  Tendon of the Peronei
Muscles, which, behind the Ankl. , is common to both,
but, at the outer part of the Foot,  becomes proper to
each.   They preserve the Tendons in their places, and
are the Bursx of these Tendons.
  The Laciniated Ligament which arises from the inner 
214
Ankle,  and spreads in a radiated manner, to be fixed
partly in the Cellular Substance and Fat, and partly to
the Os Calcis, at the inner side ofthe heel.   It inclo-
ses the  Tibialis Posticusand Flexor Digitorum Longus.
  The Vaginal Ligament of the  Tendon ofthe Extensor
Froprius Pollicis, which  runs in a Crucial direction.
  The Vaginal Ligament qf^he. Tendon ofthe Flexor L.on-
gus Pollicis, which surrounds this Tendon in the hollow
of the Os Calcis.
  The Vaginal and Crucial Ligament* ofthe Tendons of
the Flexors ofthe Toes, which inclose these Tendons on
the Surfaces of the Phalanges, and form their  Bursas
Mucosae.
  The Accessory Ligaments of the Flexor Tendons ofthe
Toes, which,—as in the Fingers,—-arise from the Pha-
langes, and are included in the Sheaths' ofthe Tenddns
in which they terminate.
  The Transverse Ligaments of the Extensor Tendonirf
which run between them, and preserve' tneni in their
places behind the roots ofthe Toe6. 
INDEX
RUYSCHIAN ART.
                     page.                     page:
 Arm for arteries & veins 22 Lymphatics how fil-  \ 33
 Blood vessels subject    19  led with Quicksilver J
 Bones, how prepared    14 Macerated preparations 14
 '   —, how injected    30 Mercurial injections    33
 Corotheca,             15 Morbid parts, how pre-
 Cuticle, how prepared   ib.   served        _      34
 Explanation \p Quicksilver  Parotid glands.injected ib.
  Tray                12 Penis, how injected    27
 Foetus, preparations        Placenta injected,      24
  of              15,26,30 Podatheca            30
 Gravid ute- how injected 23 Preparations how made 13
 Hand filled with mercury 35------, of the viscera  ib.
 Head with fine injection 32------, morbid parts   14
 ------, for arteries and------.macerated     ib.
  veins                21------, of bones       ib.
 Heart how injected   25,28------with coarseinject.16
 Injecting instruments   15------with minute     17
 Injections,              1°-----quicksilver      33.
 ------, coarse          ib. ------corroded       36
 ______} fine             17 Quicksilver Tray      U
______' minute         ib- Testicle, how injected 27
Leg, for arteries, &c.    23 Uterus injected with 7 32
Liver, lymphatics of, in-      fine  injection      5
 jected                34 Vena portse, its sys-  7 28
------, operations on    ib.   tern injected      S   ■
Lungs, lympatics of, in-    Viscera, how preserved U
 jested               ib.------, how prepared.  .... 
INDEX
                 TO

FIFE'S  ANATOMY.
VOLUME FIRST.
                    page.                   >  page.
                          Adductor or posterior
Abdomen : Muscles si-      medii digiti pedis,   176
  tuatedon the anterior    Adductor minimi digiti
  and lateral part of it, 125  manus,              158
Abelomen, muscles  with-   Adductor or prior mini-
  in its cavity    -     131  mi digiti petlis,      175
Abductor indicis manus,156 Adductor pollicis man. 156
Abductor or prior indi-     Adductor pollicis pedis,174
  cis pedis,            176 Adductor or posterior
Abductor or prior medii      medii digiti pedis,   176
  digiti pedis,         175 Anconeus,            150
Abductor minimi digiti     Anterior auris,    -   111
  manus,             158 Anus, muscles of the  128
Abductor minimi digiti    Aponeurosis temporalisl 14
  pedis,               175 Aponeurosis of the su-
AbductorpoHicismanus,157   perior extremity,    148
Abductor pollicis peelis, 174 Aponeurosis ofthe in-
Abductor or prior tertii      ferior extremity,    160
  digiti pedis,         I76 Aponeurosis plantaris, 172
Accelerator urinx,     128 Aryteno-epiglotteus,  124
Adductor Femoris Tri-    Arytenoideusobliguus, ib.
  ceps, comprehending    Aiytenoideus transver. ib.
  SclistinctMuscles viz.    Astragalus,           48
AdductorlongHs")   fe- -g, Attollens aurem,     11(J
Adeluctor brevis5 moris    Auris retrahentes,    111
Aelductor mag. femoris 162 Azygos uvulae,        122
Adductor or podterir      Biceps flexor cubiti,   149
  indicis pedis,       176 Biceps fiexor cruris,   167 
                       £17

                     PaSe-                     page.
Biventer maxillae ioferio-    Circumflexus palati,    120
  ris,                  118 Clavicle,               79
Bones in general, the        Clitoridis erector,      130
  parts of them to be at-    Coccygeus            181
  tended to,            39 Cocqygjs os            70
Bones pf the Cranium.   /41 Qolli longus,           137
Bones of the face,        54 Colli semispinalis,     I43
Bonespf the Trupk,     63 Colli transversalis,      ib.
Bones of the superior ex-    Complexus,  '         145
  tremity,              72 Compressor naris,     111
Bones, of the inferior  ex-  .Constrictor isthmi faci-
  tremity,    "         92   um,                121
Bones, structure of     183 Qonstrictor pharyngis in-
Bones, the formation of 187   feiior,              122
Bones, different kinds of    Constrictor pharyngis
  connection of        189   medius              ib.
Bones, different kinds of    Constrictor pharyngis su-
  motion of           191   perior,              123
Brachialis internus,     150 Coraco-brachialis,     148
Buccinator,            113 Cprrugator supercilii,  109
Bursa: mucosa;, descrip-    Cranium, bones pf the  140
  tion ofthe           177 Cranium, muscles of the
Bursa: mucosae of the          integuments of the   109
  superior extremity,   179 Gremaster,            128
Bursx mucosx of the       Crico-arytcnoideus latera-
  inferior extremity,    X81   lis,                 ,123
Calcis, os               99 Crico-arytenoideus pos-  -
Capitatum or magnum os 88   ticus,                 ib.
Capitis rectus anterior      Crico-thyoideus,        119
  major,              137 Cruralis,               166
Capitis rectus anterior      Cuboides, os           100
  minor,               ib. Cucullaris.             138
Capitis rectus lateralis   ib. Cuneiforme, os         87
Capitis rectus posticus      Cuneiformia, ossa     101
  minor,              144 Deltoides             147
Capitis rectus posticus      Depressor anguli oris,   113
  major,               ib- Repressor labii inferio-
Capitis gbhquus inferior, ib.   ris,                  112
Capitis obliquus superior ib Depressor labii superio-
Carpal Bones,           86   ris alxque nasi,        ib.
Cartilages,             186 Diaphragma,          131
Cervicalis descendens,  141 Diaphragma, superior
      VOL.  X               N 
218
                     P"g'-      ,.               P%e:
   musele ofthe         132   pedis,               174
 Diaphragma Inferior       Flexor brevis minimi di-
   muscle ofthe         ib.   giti pedis,            175
 Dorsi interspinales,     145 Flexor carpi radialis,    151
 Doi si intertransversales  ib. Flexor carpi ulnaris,     152
 Dorsi latissimus,       138 Flexor digitorum pro-
 Doisi longissimus      141   fundus               153
 Dorsi semispinalis,     142 Flexor digitorum sublimis ib
 Ear, muscles of the ex-     Flexor longus digitorum
   ternal               110   pedis,                172
 Ejaculator seminis     128 Flexor longus pollicis
 Erector clitoridis       130   manus               155
 Erector Penis,          128 Flexor longus pollicis
 Extensor brevis digfto-        pedis,               173
   rum pedis,           171 Flexor parvus minimi
 Extensor carpi radialis        digiti manus,         158
   brevior,              152 Foot, muscles ofthe     168
 Extensor carpi radialis      Frontalis,              109
   longior,              ib. Frontis, os              43
 Extensor carpi ulnaris,  153 Gastrocnemius externus 168
 Extensor digitorum com- ,   Gastrocnemius internus,  ib
   munis,              i54 Gemini,                164
 Extensor longus digito-     Generation, parts of;
   rum pedis.           171   muscles belonging to
 Exteesor ossis metacarpi      them           165.168
   pollicis manus,        156 Genio-hyo-glossus,      119
 Extensor primi interno-     Genio-hyoide-us,'        118
   dii,                  156 Glottis, muscles of the  123
 Extensor propius pollicis    Gluteus maximus,      I62
   pedis,               173 Gluteus medius,        163
 Extensor secundi  inter-      Gluteus minimus,        ib
   nodii pollicis manus   156 Gracilis,                165
 Eye-lids, muscles of     109 Hand, bones of the       86
 Femoris, os            92  Hand, muscles ofthe    151
 Fibula,                 96 Humeri, os              82
 Fiexor accessorius digito-    Humeri, os, its muscles 149
   rum pedis           173 Hyoides,  os              63
 Flexor biceps cruris    167 Hyoides, os, muscles  a-
 Flexor brevis digitorum       bout                 118
  pedis,               172  Hyo-glossus           119
Flexor brevis pollicis ma-   Jaw, lower, muscles of
   nus,                156   the                  114
 Flexor, brevis pollicis       Jaw, lower, muscles be- 
219
                    Pagc                     page.
  between it and the Os    Ligaments o  the low-
  Hyoides,            118   erjaw,             193
Iliacus internus,        134 Ligaments  connecting
Ilium, os               71   the head with the first
Indicator,             157   and second vertebrx
Inferior extremity, bones      ofthe neck, and these
  ofthe                92   vertebrx  to   each
Inferior extremity, mus-      other,      -    -   194
  cles of the           160 Ligaments of the other
Inferior extremity, liga.      vertebrx,           195
  ments ofthe         207 Ligaments of the ribs,  196
Infra-spinatus,         146 Ligaments of the sepe-
Innominatum, os        71   rior extremity,      200
Intercostales externi,   135 Ligaments  connecting
Intercostales interni,   136   the inner end of the
Interossei manus,      158   clavicle,             ib.
Interossei manusexternil59 Ligaments  proper to
Interossei manus interni 159   the scapula,         201
Interossei pedis,       175 Ligaments of the joint
Interossei pedis externi 176   ofthe elbow          ib.
Interossei pedis interni  1"5 Ligaments between the
Interosseus auricnlaris, 157   bodies and under end
Interspinales et inter-       of the radius  and ul-
  transversales colli et       na,                  20
  dorsi,               145 Ligaments between the
Interspinales  et inter-       fore arm and  wrist,   204
  transversals lumbo-     Ligaments of the carpus, ib.
  mm,                146 Ligaments between the
Ischium, os            72   carpal and metacar-
Lycrymale, or  unguis,       pal bones,           205
  os                   52 Ligaments betweenthe
Latissimus elorsi,      138   extremities  of  the
Levatores costarum,   128   metacarpal bones,    tb.
Levator auguli oris,    112 Ligaments at the base
Levator am,           129   of  the  metacarpal
Levator labii inferiors 112   bone of  the thumb,
Levetor labii superioris       and of the first joint
  alxquenasi          112   of the fingers,        ib.
Levator palati,        121 Ligaments of the first
Levator palpebrx stipe-      and second joints ot
  rioris,               HO   the thumb,  and se.
Ligaments and other        cond and third of the    v
  parts of the joints,   191   fingers.              i« 
240
                    page.                     page.
Ligaments   retaining     Maxilla, inferior       59
  the tendons of  the     Maxillare superius, os  55
  muscles of the hand     Membrana medullaris,  186
  and fingers in situ,    206  Metacarpal bones,     89
Ligaments of the infe-     Metacarpal  bones, pe-
  rior extremity,      207    culiarities ofthe     90
Ligaments connecting     Metatarsal bones, pe-
  the os femoris with       culiarities of the     102
  the os innominatum, ib.  Mouth, muscels of the  111
Ligaments of the knee-     Mucous substances, cal-
  joint,               212    led  glands  of  the
Ligaments connecting  08    joints,               192
  the fibula to the tibia,   1  Multifidus spinx,      143
Ligaments connecting     Muscles in general,    137
  the bones of the tar-     Mylo-hoideus,         118
  sus with those of the     Naris compressor.     111
  leg,                 ib.  Nasi alx depressor,    112
Ligamentsof the tarsus     Nasi alx levator,      112
  and   between  the     Nasi, os                54
  bones of the  tarsus     Naviculare,  os          54
  and metatarsus 212- 213  Neck, muscles of the
Ligaments connecting       fore and lateral part
  the metatarsal bones       ofthe               116
  to each other,       213 Neck, muscles siuated
Ligaments of the pha-        on the aeterior part
  langes of the toes,    ib.   of  the yertebrx  of
Ligaments and sheaths       the                 137
  retaining the tendons     Nose, muscles of the   111
  ofthe muscles of the     Obliquus ascendens in-
  foot and toes in situ, 213   ternns,             125
Lingualis,            119 Obliquus capitis inferi-
Lips, muscles ofthe  112   or,                 144
Longus colli,         137 Obliquus capitis soperi-
Longissimus dorsi.    141   or,                  ib.
Lumbricales manus,   154 Obliquus  descendens
Lumbricales pedis,    173   externus abdominis, 126
Lunare, os             87 Obturator externus,   162
Magnum, or capitatum,    Obturator internus,    164
   os                  88 Occipito-frontalis,     109
Malx, os              <5 Occipitis, os           46
Marrow,              186 Omo-hyoideus,       117
Massa  carnea  Jacobii    Opponens, pollicis,    156
   Sylvii,              I73 Orbicularis oculi,     HO
 Masseter,            115 Orbicularis oris,      114 
221
■Oris anguu depressor,  113
Oris anguli levator,    112
Palati circumflexus,    120
Palati levator,          121
Palati, os               57
Palato-pharyngeus,     121
Palmaris  longus,       151
Palmaris  brevis,        ib,
Palpebia  supe.rioris le-
  vator,               110
Palpebrarum  orbicula-
  ris                  110
Parietalia ossa,         44
Patella,                97
Patientix musculus,    142
Pectinalis,             161
Pectoralis major,      134
Pectoralis minor,       ib.
Pedis interrossei exter-
  ni.                  175
Pedis interossei interni, ib.
Pelvis,  bones ofthe     71
Pelvis,  muscles about
  the                 160
Penis erector,          128
PerForans,             153
Perforatus,             ib.
Perinei transversus,    129
Periosteum externum,  185
Periosteum  internum,
  vid.  membrana  me-
  dullaris             186
Peroneus brevis,       170
Peroneus longus,      170
Peroneus tertius,      171
Pharynx, mnscles situa-
  ted on  tlie back-part
  •fthe               122
Pharyngis constrictor,  122
Pisiforme, os           87
Plantaris,             169
Platysma myoides     116
Popliteus,              168
*1
Posterior annularis*.    159
Posterior indicis manus 111
Posterior auris,        111
Posterior  medii digiti
  mamus,             159
Posterior  or adductor
  indicis pedis,        176
Posterior  or adductor
  medii digiti pedis    176
 g Cannularis, "}
■C -s medii dig-C manus 159
*« Citi indicis, 3
   for abductor medii"^
      digiti,          j *n
    or adductor tertii j £
      digiti          y £
    or adductor indicis j |3
    or adtluctor mini- j  P*
   l_   mi digiti,
 Pronator radii quadra-
  tic.                155
 Pronator radii teres,    ib.
 Psoas magnus,        133
 Psoas parvus,          ib.
 Pterygoideus externus, 115
 Pterygoideus  internus,  ib,
 Pubis, os              73
 Pyramidales,          127
 Pyriformis,           163
 Quadratus femoris,    164
 Qtiadratus genx       112
 Qjiadratus lumborurn, 133
 Radialis externus longi-
  or,                 152
 Radialis externus bre-
  vior,                 ib.
 Radialis internus,     151
 Radius,                85
 Rectus abdominis,    127
 Rectus capitis anterior
  major,              187
 Rectus capitis anterior
  minor,              137 
222
                     page.
 Rectus capitis lateralis, ib.
 Rectus capitis posticus
   major.              144
 Rectus capitis posticus
   minor,               ib.
 Rectus femoris,       I65
 Retractor anguli oris,  113
 Retrahentes auris,     111
 Rhomboideus,        139
 Ribs,                  76
 Sacro lumbalis,        140
 Sacrum, os             68
 Salpingo-pharyngeus,  121
 Sartorius,             165
 Scalenus anticus,      144
 Scalenus medius,      145
 Scalenus posticus,      ib.
 Scaphoides, os         87
 Scapula,               80
 Scapulx levator,       142
 Semimembranosus,    167
 Seminis ejaculator,    128
 Semispinalis colli,      143
 Semispinalis dorsi,     142
 Semitendinosus,      -167
Serratus magnus,      135
 Serratus posticus infe-
  rior,                139
 Serratus posticus supe-
  rior,                140
 Sesamoidea ossa,      103
 Skeleton in general,     40
 Skeleton, principal dif-
  ferences between the
  male  and female,    104
JSphenoides, os         51
 Sphincter ani,         129
 Spincter vaginx,       130
Spinx multifidus,       143
 Spine,                  65
 Splenius,              139
 Sterno-cleido-mastoide-
  us,                 115
                    page.
Sterno-costalis,        136
Sterno hyoideus,      117
Sterno thyroideus,      ib.
Sternum,              77
Skull in general,       40
Soleus,               168
Stylo-glossus,         119
Stylo-hyoidei,         120
Stylo-pharyngeus,      ib.
Subclavius,           135
Sublimis,             153
Subscapulars,        148
Supercilii corrugator,  109
Superior    extremity,
  bones of             79
Superior extremity, mus-
  cles of             146
Superior extremity,  li-
  gaments of         .174
Supinator radii brevis, 155
Supinator radii longus, 154
Supraspinatus,        146
Tarsus, bones ofthe    93
Teeth,                 61
Temporalis,           115
Temporum, ossa       47
Tensor vaginx femoris, 165
Tensor palati,         120
Teres major,          147
Teres minor,           ib.
Thigh-bone,            92
Thigh, muscles situa-
  ted on it and the Pel-
  vis,                160
Thorax, bones of       74
Thorax muscles situa-
  ted upon its anterior
  part,                134
Thorax, muscles within
  it  and between the
  ribs,                135
Thyro-arytenoideus,    123
Tbyro-epiglottideus,   124 
223
                page.
Thyro-hyoideus,       117
Tibialis anticus,       169
Tibialis posticus,       170
Trachelo-mastoideus   142
Transversalis  abdomi-
  nis,                 125
Transversalis colli,     143
Trausversalis pedis,    175
Transversalus primei,  122
Trapezium, os          81
Trapezius,            138
Trapezoides, os        88
Triangulare,  os        58
Triangularis oris,      113
Triangularis sterni,    136
Triceps adductor femo-
  ris,                 161
Triceps extensor cubiti, 150
Trumpeter, muscle    113
Trunk, bones of        63
Trunk, muscles situated
  on the posterior part
  of                  138
Turbinatum   inferius,
  sue spongiosum, os  58
Vaginx  sphincter,     130
Vastus externus,       166
Vastus internus,       ib.
Vertebrx, true         64
Vertebrx, false         68
Ulna,                  84
Ulnaris  internus,       152
Uniforme, os           89
Unguis seulacrymale, os 54
Vomer,                59
Urethrx transversalis,  129
Urinx accelerator,     129
Uvulx azygos,        122
Zygomaticus major,    113
Zygomaticus minor,    ib.
FINIS. 
 
 
■'  .■* 
         McA.Hist
             *7Q
           F117 to


^'•"aBu'v '^'4kHr
           ■' *'&<*    c ■■■
.V

 i